JP2018143793A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of preventing wrong connection.SOLUTION: Connector shapes of a first start pocket sensor 3002 and a second start pocket sensor 2511 corresponding to a first start pocket and a second start pocket are allowed to differ as for example ball entry ports having a similar application from among a plurality of ball entry ports. Thus, wrong connection between connectors of the first start pocket sensor 3002 and the second start pocket sensor 2511 corresponding to the first start pocket and the second start pocket can be prevented.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 153

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine that includes various entrances in an advantageous area of a game board and each sensor (detection means) that detects the passage of a game ball at each entrance (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [0014] to paragraph [0016], FIGS. 2 to 4)

  However, if the wiring from the detecting means that passes through the entrance with similar application is mistakenly electrically connected, there is no problem with the electrical specifications, so damage can be avoided, but the entrance detection signal is received incorrectly. Will affect the progress of the game. However, since the applications are particularly similar, there is a problem that in some cases, there is a possibility that an erroneous connection may not be noticed immediately.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing erroneous connection.

  Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.

(Solution 1)
A gaming machine that can be provided with detection means at each of a plurality of entrances in a game area and that can proceed with a game based on a detection signal from the detection means, A gaming machine, wherein the shape of the connector of the detecting means corresponding to the entrance with similar use is different.

  In this gaming machine, detection means can be provided at a plurality of entrances in the game area, respectively, and a game can be advanced based on a detection signal from the detection means.

  Among the plurality of entrances, the shape of the connector of the detecting means corresponding to the entrance with similar uses is provided differently. Examples of the “similar use entrances” include, for example, the 1st start entrance, the 2nd start entrance, and the entrance entrances with the same use as the gate, the 1st grand prize entrance and the 2nd grand prize entrance. A similar entrance, a plurality of general winning entrances can be cited as entrances with similar uses.

  In this way, among the plurality of entrances, the detecting means corresponding to the entrance having a similar use is provided with a different shape of the connector, so that the detection means corresponding to the entrance having a similar use is provided. Incorrect connection of the connector can be prevented. Accordingly, erroneous connection can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the game area 5a in FIG. 130 corresponds to the game area, and the gate portion 2003, four general winning ports 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the first grand prize in FIG. The mouth 2005, the second grand prize opening 2006, and the like correspond to a plurality of entrance holes, and include a gate sensor 2301, a general prize opening sensor 3001, a second start opening sensor 2511, a first start opening sensor 3002, and a first big prize opening. The sensor 2512, the second grand prize port sensor 2513, and the like correspond to detection means, and “... the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 are connected to the main control board. A connector having a pitch of 2.5 mm is selected as a connector to be electrically connected to 1310, and two wires from the second start port sensor 2511 are connected to the main control board 1310. A connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as an electrically connecting connector ... "is the point of" the detecting means corresponding to the entrance having a similar use among the plurality of entrances. This corresponds to the point that the connector has a different shape.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, erroneous connection can be prevented.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine including the partial enlarged view seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows other forms and includes the partially enlarged view seen from the front in the state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer-frame left assembly and outer-frame right assembly of an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is the XX sectional view taken on the line of Fig.38 (a). It is the YY sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 39 including a partial enlarged view. It is a disassembled perspective view of the foul cover unit containing the partially expanded exploded view which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional top view including the partially expanded view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional top view including the partially expanded view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is the vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member, (b) is the cross-sectional top view. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A), (b) is the principal part enlarged view of FIG. 45 which shows the normal flow of a game ball (foul ball), (c) is the principal part enlarged view of FIG. . It is a top view of a foul cover unit. It is a top view of a foul cover unit which shows other forms of an operation line invalidating member. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. 49 (a) is an enlarged view of a Z portion in FIG. 49, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z portion in FIG. 49 showing a state where a foul ball passes. (A), (b) is the enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49 which shows the state by which an operation line is invalidated. (A), (b) shows the state which electrically operated the operation line invalidation member, and is an enlarged view equivalent to Z section of Drawing 49 showing the state where an operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is a rear view of the payout device for explaining the rotation position of the payout blade. It is a rear view of the payout device for explaining ball clogging and ball omission prevention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper direction in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. to the ball tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled FIG. 119 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour path in the main body frame upper part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of a tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side. It is the figure which expanded a part of sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line of Fig.117 (a). It is the other structure (structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment) of this invention by which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is another structure (structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 3rd Embodiment) of this invention by which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is another structure (structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 4th Embodiment) of this invention by which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the other structure (structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 5th Embodiment) of this invention in which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the inside of the game area | region where the game ball | bowl distribute | circulates in a game board. It is a front view of the center actor and the front effect unit in the front unit of the game board. It is side surface sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the table | surface production | presentation unit in the left-right direction center with the center accessory, and was seen from right. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between LED in a front effect unit and the reflective recessed part of a front light-guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emission aspect of a front light-guide plate. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front effect unit is caused to emit light. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the lower front center decorative body is caused to emit light in the lower movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower center elevating base is raised in the lower movable effect unit and the lower front center decorative body and the lower rear central decorative body are caused to emit light. Lower lower elevating base, lower left side elevating base and lower right side elevating base are raised in the lower movable production unit to light the lower front center ornament, lower rear center ornament, lower left side ornament, and lower right side ornament It is a front view of the game board shown in the state made to do. FIG. 140 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state shown in FIG. The four rotating decorative bodies, the left side rotating decorative body, the left sub-side rotating decorative body, the right side rotating decorative body, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body in the lower movable effect unit are respectively developed to schematically show the decorations of the decorative portions on each surface. It is explanatory drawing. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the kind (size) of the arrow light-emitted and displayed in a lower movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows schematically the drive mechanism of an upper rear movable production | presentation unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the clutch mechanism of an upper rear movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the upper front movable decoration body of an upper front movable production | presentation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. It is sectional drawing of the XX line of FIG. It is A arrow line view of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of a frame earth substrate. It is a circuit diagram explaining the outline | summary of the circuit structure of a power supply board. It is the perspective view which expanded the power supply board partially. It is a B arrow view of FIG. It is the silk printing (the 1) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is the silk printing (the 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline | summary of a manufacture cancellation electronic component. It is the structure of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a payout control board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline | summary of the wiring to the board | substrate handled as a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decoration board | substrate with which a door frame is equipped. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decoration board | substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuit. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D part of FIG. It is the structure of countermeasures, such as a reflectance fall which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is the structure of countermeasures, such as a reflectance fall which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 171 is an enlarged view of the D ′ portion of FIG. 170 or the D ″ portion of FIG. 171 as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface. It is the structure of countermeasures, such as a reflectance fall which concerns on 4th Embodiment. FIG. 174 is an enlarged view of the D ″ ″ portion of FIG. 173 when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. 175 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 175. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 178 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 178. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 179; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a modification of a payout device. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 13 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 106) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 3 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, and the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the received game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a main body frame base 501 are attached. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 includes outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a center of the game area 5a in front view. An effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a rear side of the effect display device 1600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 A peripheral control unit 1500 is configured as that the transparent substrate box, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege (for the player by receiving or passing the game ball B) ( For example, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning port 2005, and a second major winning port 2006 for giving a predetermined number of game balls B) It has. The obstacle nail is implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, the second major winning port 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. The player can enter the operation of driving the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the table effect unit 2600 and the lower movable effect. The player can be entertained by causing the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like to perform a movable effect and a light emitting effect.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame are respectively disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. This prevents the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 22A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 22B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a rear portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size penetrating the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allowing only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame as seen from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner in front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching the handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the tube portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tube portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state where the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 33 and FIG. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 99). And a part of (see FIG. 100) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114 a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper dish ball passage opening 101 g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114 b is aligned with the through hole 101 j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and the pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 23 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a columnar cylinder main body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is in a state substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 23 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the ball supply unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 36A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking unit 144a and stays on the partition unit 143a (a state where the game ball B remains in the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a which is the standby position is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 36B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B in the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). State) and the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 153) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button of the dish unit downward, the upper dish ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved along with the downward movement of the operation transmission unit. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition. Is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 36 (b) or the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, The operation line invalidating member 700 serving as the first fraud prevention means is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so as to be detachable from the rear side. Yes. Here, the invalidation of the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated by cutting, pinching (pinching), entanglement (winding), or bonding with hot melt or the like. It means making it into a state.

  The operation line disabling member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right, and is a first piece that is vertically separated at the approximate center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. An inclined portion 703 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the distal end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the portion 701 and the second piece portion 702, and the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702. And. The first piece 701 of the operation line invalidating member 700 is bent with respect to the flat surface of the operation line invalidating member 700 so that the right end in front view protrudes rearward in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same plane as the flat surface of the operation line invalidating member 700. Thus, in plan view, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 form a shearing portion 700v that spreads in a V shape toward the right.

  The operation line invalidating member 700 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 is formed in the hitting ball supply port 142a. It will be in the state connected with.

  According to the operation line invalidating member 700, an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. Or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as that) is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140, and comes out to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. When an illegal act is performed by operating the operation line to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or causing an illegal ball to be taken in or out of the first starting port 2002 or the like, the ball launcher 540 plays a game The operation line attached to the illegal ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 by the momentum of the illegal ball launched (hit) with a strength that can reach the region 5a. Thus, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 Can be cut into as scissors by narrowed site of formation shear portion 700v, it is possible to suppress the fraud using a fraud sphere takes place thus invalidates the operating line.

  Note that the first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described form, but may be another form. For example, if the operation line attached to the illegal ball is cut or narrowed so as to suppress illegal acts, the operation line invalidating member 700 may be bent or bent in a form different from that described above. It is good also as a structure provided, and it is good also as a structure which replaces with a metal plate and has the resin molding member which has the shape which can cut | disconnect or narrow the operation line attached to the illegal ball | bowl.

  Further, when the illegal ball is made of synthetic resin such as acrylic, a metal game ball at the above-described standby position (on the above-described partition portion 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). ), And the detection signal is added to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 as the electric feeding means, thereby preventing the illegal ball from being launched. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal sphere made of synthetic resin and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not perform driving for ball feeding.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37A is a perspective view of the door cover base unit as viewed from the front of the foul cover unit, and FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball launcher 540 with a weaker force (a launch force that cannot reach the game area 5a) than a predetermined force (a launch force that can reach the game area 5a) and the game area 5a of the game board 5 The game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the inside is guided to the lower plate 202, and the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. .

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a which is a sphere opening of the tray unit 200. And a through ball passage 150a that communicates with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front. And a full ball receiving port 150b.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side when viewed from the front of the full ball receiving port 150b, and the momentum unit 540 is launched from the launch rail 544 by the ball launcher 540 of the main body frame 4, but lacks momentum. A foul ball receiving portion 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop opening 1013 formed between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the game area 5a, and a front view right A lower tray ball supply port 211c that is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower corner and that releases the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving unit 150c and that serves as a ball opening of the dish unit 200. 150d, a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the ball, a ball discharge port 150d (more precisely, a storage passage 150e to be described later), and a communication passage 150 connecting a foul ball receiving portion 150c. It has a, and. The communication passage 150h includes an upper passage wall 150i disposed below the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with a slope opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately one game ball from the upper passage wall 150i. And a lower passage wall 150j disposed in parallel with a distance of 始, the starting end portion opens upward to the downwardly inclined end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the terminal end portion extends from the storage passage 150e. Open downward.

  A series of passages from the foul ball drop opening 1013 established between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h and the storage passage 150e are returned to the foul ball. A return passage portion 1014 is formed by a series of elements.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving unit 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through-sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (to be described later) of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 109). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as a second fraud prevention means for suppressing fraud due to the illegal sphere Q attached with the operation line L. Similarly, the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 are provided. The foul ball dropping opening 1013 opened during the period is provided with operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S as third fraud prevention means.

  The second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. As shown in the drawing, both lateral projections 7001 are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and are fixed (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of safety, the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 are externally covered and accommodated so that the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, and the like are difficult to contact.

  A specific operation line invalidating member 7000 includes the same components as the operation line invalidating member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece 701 in FIG. A V-shaped opening that opens in a direction opposite to the flow-down direction of the sphere of the communication passage 150h by the one piece 7010 and the second piece 7020 extended from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702. The shearing part 7000v is formed.

  In addition, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40, the foul cover unit 150 of the embodiment has the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the lid member 152 constituting the foul cover unit 150. It is arranged so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface, and at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000. A tapered guiding portion 150k capable of guiding the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on its upper surface, and is directed toward the lid member 152 toward the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The first inclined portion 150ka descending to the operation line invalidating member 7000 side, and the width narrows toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka. A tapered portion 150k having a tapered shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L) and a second inclined portion 150kb. When the operation line L that receives tension by rolling of the illegal sphere Q or pulling from the outside is brought into sliding contact with the guide portion 150k, the second inclined portion 150ka to the second inclined portion due to the tension applied to the operation line L. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidating member 7000 so as to slide on the inclined portion 150 kb. Thus, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of the normal foul sphere and the guidance of the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q. In order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corner portions of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guide portion 150k may be formed in a curved shape.

  Since the second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is set using the space communicating from the lower tray ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The illegal ball Q that has been attached is allowed to enter the game area 5a and the manipulation line L on the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q. Unauthorized actions that cause the ball Q to be taken in and out of the first starting port or the like can be suppressed.

  For example, a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as “illegal act”) in which the illegal ball Q is pushed into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate and is caused to flow backward to the launch position of the ball launcher 540. A ”) is performed, and when the illegal ball Q goes over the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and goes to the firing position of the firing rail 544, When pulled (with tension applied), the operation line L wraps around the U-turn along the folded portion. Then, the operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v by the first piece 7010 and the second piece 7020, and finally Since the operation line L cannot be operated as a result of the disconnection, it is possible to suppress an illegal act using the illegal sphere Q.

  In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the launch position, which is intentionally made into a foul ball, and a lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even when a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as “fraud act B”) is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball that has become a foul ball is grabbed and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a. The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled by the subsequent launch of the illegal sphere Q (tension is applied) and the operation line. L is pressed against the folded portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing part 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above. As a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. OK To become. 39 and 40 are explanatory diagrams assuming a case where the fraudulent act B is performed. In addition, for the above-mentioned fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidating member 700 or the like as the first fraud prevention means cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent sphere Q that becomes a foul sphere (for example, a foul sphere is formed). In this embodiment, there is a possibility that the operation line L is not invalidated by the first fraud prevention means even if the fraudulent sphere Q is launched with a certain degree of strength. Therefore, this embodiment reinforces the fraud countermeasures by the first fraud prevention means. It also has the effect of For this reason, when targeting the fraudulent act B, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 serving as the first and second fraud preventing means, and the operation line invalidating member 7000H serving as the third fraud preventing means described later. , 7000S are preferably used together as appropriate, and the first operation line disabling member 700 and the second operation line disabling member 7000 or the third operation line disabling member 7000H, 7000S, which are different from the first operation line disabling member 700, are provided. It is good to install together in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the first operation line disabling member 700 and the second operation line disabling member 7000 are not conspicuous because they are provided together on the door frame 3 side and are not exposed to the outside. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble, fraud countermeasure information is difficult to leak. In addition, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 can easily maintain the crime prevention performance if the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 are exchanged together with the door frame 3 because the reduction in sharpness or the like affects the crime prevention performance.

  By the way, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 serving as the first and second fraud prevention means described above cut and invalidate the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v. In other words, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022 so that the flexible operation line L cannot be pushed or pulled, and the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be easily operated. You may make it invalidate like this.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is formed by two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined at the hatched portion of the enlarged view of FIG. 41, and the metal plates 7011 and 7022 are formed. The first half of the non-joining portion at the tip of the two is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is designated as a pinching portion 7044. Such an operation line invalidating member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and further, for safety reasons, it is difficult to contact the hands of employees, game machine assemblers, and the like. And the cover member 152 is covered and accommodated from the outside.

  According to the operation line invalidating member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When the fold-back portion of the metal plate 701 wraps around in a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the fold-back portion, and the clamping portion in the latter half of the non-joint portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 7044 is pinched and pinched like tweezers.

  As a result, the illegal ball Q that has flowed back from the lower dish ball supply port 211c due to the illegal act A described above reaches the launch position of the launch rail 544, or the illegal ball Q that is intentionally made a foul ball by the illegal act B. Can be prevented from reaching the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a sphere opening, and the operation line L is sandwiched between the operation line invalidating members 7000 even if it reaches that position. For this reason, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the flexible operation line L is only loosened, and as a result, the amount of the operation line L that can be fed cannot be adjusted (the illegal ball Q hanging on the game area 5a). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to suppress fraud using the illegal sphere Q.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joining portion at the tip of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to be the introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is the pinching portion 7044. However, instead of this, a single metal plate is bent so that the plate surfaces overlap each other, and the leading end portion of one bent plate surface is expanded in a V-shape to introduce the introduction guide portion 7033 (guide portion). ), And the sandwiched width portion of both plate surfaces may be the retaining portion 7044. Thereby, the assembly work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of a metal plate can be improved, producing the same effect as the above-described fraud prevention effect.

  Further, the operation line invalidating member 7000 that clamps the operation line L is not shown, but a double-sided tape is installed in the gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. 42 or an adhesive that does not harden is filled. Then, an adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be adhered to the adhesive portion so as not to move.

  Further, the operation line invalidating member 7000 that clamps the operation line L is changed from the above-described one composed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. You may install and form so that the induction | guidance | derivation direction of the 2nd inclination part 150kb of the induction | guidance | derivation part 150k and a self center axis line may be substantially orthogonally crossed. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb is fitted between the adjacent coils of the coil spring and clamped.

  Coil springs that have a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when no load is applied, such as tension coil springs and torsion coil springs, need to be placed in a compressed state like compression coil springs. It is advantageous in terms of installation work.

  Of course, the coil spring may be installed in a straight state when there is no load, but as shown in FIG. 43, the coil on the entry side of the operation line L is bent so as to be slightly expanded. This is preferable because the operation line L can enter smoothly. Thus, when the operation line invalidating member 7000 is formed of a coil spring, the cost can be reduced because it can be manufactured at a low cost.

  In addition, a foreign object such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line invalidating member 7000 from the opening for the sphere (lower tray ball supply port 211c), and the cell plate closes the guide portion 150k to the operation line invalidating member 7000. In order to cope with this, in the above-described embodiment, the course changing portion of the foul ball return passage portion 1014 (the portion corresponding to the upper portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in this embodiment) is possible. In addition, a slit 1015 into which the cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 39). Thereby, the further unauthorized operation | work which inserts a foreign material from the opening for balls (lower tray ball supply port 211c) and blocks the guide part 150k can also be suppressed. In addition, as a countermeasure for an illegal work to insert a foreign object such as a cell plate from the opening for the sphere (the lower tray ball supply port 211c) and close the guide portion 150k, a foreign object such as a cell plate is used as in the slit 1015 described above. As shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 39, the configuration is provided with a projecting obstacle 1016 that collides with a foreign substance such as a cell plate and blocks the arrival to the guiding part 150k. As a result, a higher level of fraud prevention may be achieved.

  Further, the first and second operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure that is invalidated after the operation line L enters, but FIG. 49, FIG. 50, FIG. 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that actively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal sphere Q may be used.

  49, FIG. 50, and FIG. 51 show one specific example of the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D. The operation line invalidating member 7000D is a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). Is pivotally attached to the path changing portion (the corner corresponding to the upper portion of the lower dish ball supply port 211c).

  That is, the operation line invalidating member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-like ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-like invalidating portion 2646 that protrudes perpendicularly to the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645 in FIG. And a shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the disabling part 2646 intersects, and an arc-shaped ball stop 2648 centering on the shaft hole 2647 protruding from the upper edge of the disabling part 2646, A support shaft 2649 implanted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture of FIG. 50 (a). Can swing to the release position. The operation line invalidating member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2660 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the shaft hole 2647 of the invalidating portion 2646, and the ball receiving portion 2645 is energized by the biasing of the balance weight 2660. 50A is maintained in a state where no external force (specifically, a load for one game ball) is applied to the ball, while a load for one game ball is applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. Sometimes it swings to the release posture of FIG.

  Further, the edge of the disabling portion 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D is an intersecting side portion 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the disabling member 7000D swings to the release posture of FIG. 50 (b), the intersecting side portion 2651 fits into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 having the above dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D, the foul ball passes through the communication passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. Immediately after flowing down and changing the course downward by the course changing unit, it is placed on the ball receiving part 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving attitude. Due to the load of the foul sphere, the operation line invalidating member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. Then, the foul sphere placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D is discharged to the downstream storage passage 150e, so that the operation line invalidating member 7000D released from the foul ball is attached to the balance weight 2660. Return to the original ball receiving posture by the force.

  In rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may be generated at one time. Even in such a case, while the previous foul ball is processed by the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the subsequent foul ball is as shown in FIG. The arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648 stops the operation line, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D moves backward to continue the processing. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul balls are generated simultaneously, they can be processed one by one without any trouble.

  Next, the above-mentioned fraud act B (a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L and one of them is launched from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the foul cover unit 150 having the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D. The foul sphere is intentionally weakly fired to form a foul sphere, which is taken out from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the sphere, and the operation line L connected to the illegal sphere is grabbed and the subsequent fraud When the illegal ball Q flows due to the illegal act of launching the ball Q into the game area 5a), the illegal ball Q flows down the communication passage 150h as shown in FIG. Immediately after that, it is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, the operation line invalidating member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 by the load of the irregular sphere Q and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. At this time, the disabling part 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D also rotates, and the crossing edge part 2651 at the edge of the operation line disabling member 7000D crosses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving part 2652 on the passage side. When the foul ball return passage is crossed, the operation line L passing there naturally also crosses, so that the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. Stop). Then, the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot fall, and the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidating member 7000D is in a position that cannot be reached even if a hand is put in from the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a sphere opening, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q that stops at this position is taken out from the outside.

  If it is made difficult for the operation line L to reversely move by meandering the operation line L between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652, the operation line L is captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000D. It is also difficult to pull the illegal ball Q back to the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thereby, the illegal sphere Q remaining on the operation line invalidating member 7000D can be stored and collected as a evidence sphere.

  The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above uses the dead weight of the illegal sphere Q. However, the operation line invalidating member 7000D may be operated by the electric drive means as shown in FIG. Good.

  That is, the operation line disabling member 7000D in FIG. 52 connects the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 serving as an electric drive means to the portion provided with the balance weight 2660 and a ball detector connected to the disabling part 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when a game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is raised, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D is changed from the ball receiving posture to the released posture. When the game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and is detected by the ball detector 2655 (change in signal from presence to absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered and the operation line is changed. The disabling member 7000D returns from the release posture to the ball receiving posture. .

  When a normal foul ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the generation and release of the foul ball is detected by a change in the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 is received in response to the detection. In order to operate appropriately, the foul balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the operation line invalidating member 7000D using its own weight.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is raised and the operation line is invalidated. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is pinched by the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidating portion 2646 and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since the release signal is not emitted from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stops at the raised position. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q cannot be taken out from the target ball opening, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade in the intersecting side portion 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidating portion 2646. be able to. Further, the operation line invalidating member 7000D of the embodiment has a function of preventing the intrusion of the illegal sphere Q from the sphere opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 blocks the return passage portion 104. It can also be used as a reverse prevention means. Therefore, a higher fraud prevention function is exhibited.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D has, for example, a disabling portion formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retracts to open and close the communication passage 150h, and the front end of the shutter plate Is formed as an intersecting side crossing the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the communication passage 150h and downstream of the movable region of the intersecting side and passes through the movable region of the intersecting side. Then, the invalid ball Q is detected by this ball detector and the invalidation unit is operated, and the operation line L is clamped or cut at the crossing side crossing the communication passage 150h. Also good.

  The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above can also be applied to the first operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operation line invalidating member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the illegal deterrent effect can be reliably increased.

  FIG. 53 shows a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that winds up the operation line L and invalidates it.

  In other words, the operation line disabling member 7000D is a square ring disabling portion 2646 that is attached to the communication passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be able to rotate around the rotation shaft 2656 oriented in a direction orthogonal to the passage. And a motor 2657 serving as an electric drive means for rotating the invalidating portion 2646 and a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the invalidating portion 2646 as an intersecting side portion 2651 provided downstream of the movable (rotating) region of the intersecting side portion 2651. The invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once each time a foul sphere is detected by the sphere detector 2655.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the foul ball enters the communication passage 150h and passes through the invalidation unit 2646, and the foul ball detects the ball. The invalidation unit 2646 idles once by being detected by the detector 2655, but the foul sphere flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside through the sphere opening.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B described above flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the illegal ball Q enters the invalidating unit 2646. Since the illegal sphere Q is detected by the sphere detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation because it passes through the invalidation unit 2646, the operation line L is wound around the invalidation unit 2646. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q stops in the communication passage 150h, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q reaches the unauthorized person.

  Note that the sphere detector 2655 for detecting the illegal sphere Q may be displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q. In such a case, the illegal sphere Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, useless emptying of the operation line invalidating member 7000D that winds up the operation line L described above can be eliminated.

As described above, the following technical idea is included in the description of the embodiment relating to the dynamic operation line invalidating member.
“A game area where games are played with game balls,
A ball launcher that launches game balls;
A launch passage portion that forms a launch ball passage communicating with the game area from a launch position of the ball launch device; and
A return passage portion that forms a foul ball return passage that connects a foul ball drop opening that is established in the middle of the launch ball passage and a ball opening that discharges a game ball to the outside of the aircraft,
Fraud prevention means capable of preventing operation from the front of the operation line attached to the illegal ball,
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that invalidates the operation line by pinching, cutting, or winding.
The operation line invalidating member includes an intersection side portion that traverses the foul ball return passage of the game ball, and operates the intersection side portion after the illegal ball passes through the movable region of the intersection side portion, thereby the foul ball. A gaming machine that traverses the return passage, and thus invalidates the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage at the intersection by pinching, cutting, or winding. "

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 10, 11, 39, 47, and 48, the third fraud prevention means provided in the foul ball dropping opening 1013 described above is the end portion (end terminal) of the firing rail 544. And an operation line invalidating member 7000S provided at an end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, a rail base 1001x made of resin).

  The operation line disabling member 7000H provided at the projecting side end of the firing rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is comb-toothed so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the blade edge. It covers with the safety cover part 1017 arranged in order. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover portion 1017.

  Therefore, as described above, an illegal act of pushing the illegal ball Q back into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate and sending it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540 When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolls by tilting toward the launching position, the manipulation line L is pulled (with tension applied) and the operation line L becomes an operation line invalidating member. It is cut by touching a cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even when an illegal act B is performed in which the operation line L connected to the illegal ball Q is grabbed and the subsequent illegal ball Q is launched into the game area 5a, the illegal ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage portion 1014 is Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidating member 7000H in the process of dropping, the operation line L is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  On the other hand, the operation line invalidating member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wires in a brush shape as shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 39 and FIG. Protruding.

  According to the operation line invalidating member 7000S, if the illegal ball Q reaches the game area 5a and hangs in a state of being connected to the operation line L, the end of the operation line L is a lower tray ball supply port which is a ball opening. Even if an unauthorized person is grasping via 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L is pulled between the wires of the operation line invalidating member 7000S by the tension. After that, even if the hand that manipulates the operation line L to lower the illegal ball Q is loosened, the operation line L is less likely to slip due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidating member 7000S. The movement of the loosened hand is not transmitted to the illegal ball Q. That is, since the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, the illegal act using the illegal ball Q can be suppressed as a result.

  As described above, the third fraud prevention means is effective in the operation line invalidating member 7000H on the firing rail 544 side in the initial stage of the fraud acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line invalidating member 7000S on the side exhibits an effect, a higher level of fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

  Of course, either one of the operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S can be used alone, and a specific invalidating member of the operation line invalidating member 7000H and the operation line invalidating member 7000S is also implemented. The forms may be interchanged or the same invalidating member may be employed.

  Further, in addition to the case where the operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S are made as separate parts and attached to the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 as in the embodiment, for example, a metal plate constituting the firing rail 544 is appropriately processed to invalidate the operation line. The forming member 7000H is integrally formed, or a wire rod is integrally formed on a resin-made rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or a corner portion of the rail base 1001x has a V-groove shape as shown in FIG. 8B. It is also possible to engrave the clamping part 7000Sv and attract the operation line L to the back of the groove of the clamping part 7000Sv.

  Furthermore, the operation line disabling member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line disabling member 7000 as shown in FIG. 48, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described in FIG. 41 and FIG. , 7022, and a guide base 150k including a first inclined portion 150ka and a second inclined portion 150kb may be provided on the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001.

  As described above, in the embodiment in which the second operation line invalidating member 7000 for invalidating the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014, the third operation line invalidating member 7000 is similarly set to the foul. Although the embodiment provided in the ball dropping opening 1013 has been described, of course, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is provided in the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, that is, the inlet portion of the communication passage 150h. The wire invalidating member 7000 is provided at the exit portion (see z in FIG. 39) of the communication passage 150h, the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. The operation line L is a part where the operation line L is bent in contact with a part of the return passage portion 1014, such as being provided at each of the start end of the rail 1001 and the end of the firing rail 544, and the operation line L is the weight of the illegal sphere Q, etc. Provided in any position in the return passage portion 1014 on the condition that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it is going to be stretched straight by receiving a tensile force caused by an unauthorized person. Unishi may be. In addition, the installation position of the operation line invalidating member 7000 according to the embodiment is a position where the player cannot touch the fingertip even if the fingertip is inserted from the opening for the ball, and this position is the player's safety aspect and the operation line invalidity. It is preferable in view of a crime prevention surface that makes it difficult to perform illegal manipulations on the adjusting member 7000 itself.

  In the embodiment, the operation line disabling member 7000 is provided to be shifted to one side of the communication passage 150h. However, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the operation line disabling member 7000 is filled to the full passage width. A cutting blade may be arranged. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the end of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the start end of the communication passage 150h are used as a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is the operator. Is not touching. In this case, the cutting blade of the operation line disabling member 7000 uses a well-known broken blade structure or chip structure, which is installed in the sheath-like holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and the unit main body 151. If each of the lid members 152 is provided with a loading port 1019 and a discharge port 1020 so that the cutting blade can be pushed out in place to replace the old and new ones, the sharpness can always be maintained. In addition, in FIGS. 44A and 44B, reference numeral 1021 denotes a clamping line portion for the operation line L cut into the trough portion of the safety cover portion 1017, and the operation line L can bite into the clamping line portion 1021. It is like that. Therefore, even if the operation line disabling member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can bite into the clamping part 1021 such as the bottom wall 150g, so that the reliability of fraud prevention is ensured. improves.

  Moreover, although the example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate is shown in the above-described embodiment, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where there is no lower plate). In this case, using a space communicating from the upper bowl supply port (ball opening) to the game area 5a, a fraudulent act of intruding the illegal ball Q attached with the operation line L into the game area 5a (the fraud A, A fraudulent act similar to B) may occur. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is exemplified that the second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in a space communicating from the upper tray ball supply port to the gaming area 5a as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side. However, the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, one second fraud prevention unit is provided in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage unit 1014. However, a plurality of the second fraud prevention units may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the above-described embodiment are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (for each of the folded portions), Two fraud prevention means may be provided. Thereby, it becomes possible to further enhance the deterrence effect of fraud using the illegal ball Q.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal plate is provided as the second fraud prevention means in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014. However, a resin molding having the same configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Or, the molding itself of the foul cover unit 150 may have a special shape so that it can function as the second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment is not provided, but instead, a taper provided at a folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. The slit-shaped capture portion is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage portion 1014 so that the operation line L can be captured at the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the guide portion 150k. The operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q may be clamped by the capture part which is the narrowest part of the guide part 150k. Even with such a configuration, an illegal deterrent effect equivalent to that of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. However, as shown in FIG. 45, 46, and 49, an illegal sphere that prevents the intrusion of the illegal sphere Q from the opening for the sphere (inhibits the backward or reverse flow of the illegal sphere Q) without affecting the flow of the normal foul sphere. By providing a reverse prevention means, fraud due to the illegal ball Q is prevented.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a dedicated tool such as a cell plate (foreign material) that pushes the illegal ball Q into the course changing portion (the portion corresponding to the portion directly above the lower dish ball supply port 211c) of the return passage portion 1014. In addition, it is possible to exemplify the provision of an attracting part 1022 for attracting the illegal sphere Q itself to another passage and sealing the movement (first illegal sphere reverse prevention means). As a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal act that causes the illegal sphere Q to flow backward, such as the above-described illegal action A, without affecting the flow of the normal foul sphere. In addition, a trapping valve that can swing only in the intrusion direction of the backflowed illegal sphere Q into the attracting part 1022 at the inlet part of the attracting part 1022 (allows the intrusion to the attracting part 1022 and A single-open valve (not shown) that disables disengagement may be provided, so that traces using the illegal ball Q and evidence of fraudulent activity can be left.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, it is exemplified that a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the flow-down direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the illegal ball Q from moving backward (back flow). Yes (second illegal ball reverse prevention means). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an illegal act that causes the illegal sphere Q to flow backward, such as the above-described illegal act A, without affecting the normal flow of the foul sphere. Note that the operation line invalidating member 7000D in FIG. 49 is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023.

  The static operation line invalidating member and the dynamic operation line invalidating member described above may of course have both.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line invalidating member different from the first operation line invalidating member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014. However, such an operation line invalidating member is, for example, a foul ball dropping port 1013. And the firing position or between the foul ball drop opening 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

  Moreover, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, it is not limited to this, It applies to a pachislot machine or the game machine which unites a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 30 and 31. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 115). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 115).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by a procedure reverse to the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in the shallow box shape open | released back by the main-body part 171 and the back protrusion piece 172, and intensity | strength and rigidity are high. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 54A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 54B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and the player can drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 when operated. Is.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 as viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the counter-rotation around the opposite side The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side face in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side face in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is away from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 rotates most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is most strongly struck into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the fourth protrusion 182d is formed on the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state, It is possible to reduce a player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the door frame tray unit as viewed, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each of the main members. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 that stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper dish 201 and is supplied from the upper dish 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252 in the left and right directions, and The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5-1. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged portion to the right in front view, the front end is retracted rearward, and the guide passage portion 201a whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (FIG. 62). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. 59 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open at the rear). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left in the lower right corner of the front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the left end and a through port 213b penetrating up and down in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5-3d. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish lower left decorative board 283, the dish lower right decorative board 288, and the operation unit relay board 392. Is to do. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed, This is for subtracting and returning the game balls B from which the rented cash or prepaid card has been lent.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit before removing the upper bowl and after removing the upper bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower plate 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Accordingly, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

  In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Therefore, in a state where the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a dish unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and a dish attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252 separately from each other on the left and right. The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a has the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball | bowl B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish lower left decoration unit 280, the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower right decoration unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  In addition, the dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is notched upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5-4c. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction cover 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5-4e. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The dish upper left decorative substrate 273 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right so as to follow the dish upper left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The dish upper right decorative substrate 278 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right so as to follow the dish upper right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4f. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end and the center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The dish lower left decorative substrate 283 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish lower left decorative body 281. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The dish lower right decorative substrate 288 is formed in a long and narrow strip shape extending left and right so as to follow the dish lower right decorative body 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 68A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the back. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. The dish center lower decoration board 316 with which a plurality of LEDs which can irradiate is mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the back in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and the unit front cover 312 is formed at the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left edge of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the front (outside) on the upper surface. Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) on the upper surface. Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are caused to emit light, each of them can be light-decorated substantially uniformly and can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 69 and FIG. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354. The vibration can be amplified, and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5-5c. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 71B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 72A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 72B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

  The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc that forms the outer and lower part of the circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and centrally from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the back. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with a rotational drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. Driving the motor 342 can assist the player's rotation operation, and driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player's rotation operation to be performed. Can be loaded. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operational feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects transmission by rotating integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The production operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a shape in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, a front decoration substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a front semicircular arc shape, and a rear semicircle It is comprised by the back decoration board | substrate 352b formed in the elongate strip shape which has arc shape. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 69 and FIG. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as sound, sound effects, music, and the like by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a vibration plate. The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player will feel as if the production operation unit 300 has trembled. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can provide a player with more various effects.

  The vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information and vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and gives sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, when resonating, since it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the gaming machine, the material of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, the hardness, and the attachment method, sound information of only a specific frequency is input. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variation in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a width. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (sweep) eight times in one cycle for about 1 second in units of 1 Hz. This is intermittently performed by sweeping for 1 second and inputting again after 1 second.

  In the assembly work of the gaming machine, for the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game is operated. Based on that. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the gaming machine is turned on (or when the inspector turns on the gaming machine with the RAM clear switch operated), the main control board A command to clear and initialize the RAM 1310 is transmitted (output) to a peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, the peripheral control board performs vibration speaker operation confirmation processing for performing inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibration speaker. The inspector can confirm sound (sound) such as voice and music from the vibration speaker 354 by the vibration speaker operation confirmation processing, and can also confirm vibration of the presentation operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354. .

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the top and front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 78A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 78B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar center press operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery press operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively A pair of lift springs 365 urges the provided lift base 364 is passed upwardly, and a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a lift detection sensor 382 that detects the lift of the lift base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lift detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a position that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through in the center, And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c that is notched at two locations facing each other and is notched and is detected by the lift detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 78). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 includes a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and downward from the bottom 373b A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the lifting base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted into the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is urged upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Therefore, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 79, etc.).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward in this state (the state shown in FIG. 78A) and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height that substantially matches the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81 (c)).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in front in FIG. 78 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position state, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 81B and the like). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 78 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5-5i. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the tray unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are relayed. Yes.

[3-5-5j. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81 and the like. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 81 (a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 79 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. At the same time, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Thus, the pressing operation portion 303, together with the lifting base 364, protrudes upwardly by the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365 and enters the raised position (see FIG. 81 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is approximately the same as the top surface (see FIG. 81 (c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 81 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and therefore it is possible to attract attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Accordingly, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. 82A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and includes a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. Has been. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window decoration part decoration substrate 413 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the side window decoration member 412, and on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411, the side window decoration member 412. It attaches to the site | part which becomes the back of the connection base 412a. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape on the top, bottom, left, and right around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 is vertically extended at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative board 418 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419, and includes a right side upper decorative board 418a and a right side lower decorative board 418b. Has been. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) that extends forward in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window decoration portions 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 88A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 88B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 A plate 467, and a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front projecting portions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the front end upper portions of the left and right front projecting portions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are arranged on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, and form an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  Further, the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Accordingly, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. FIG. 92 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 97 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a lower portion of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a game ball B therein, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that is attached to the rear side of the game board 5 so as to be opened and closed and covers the rear side of the game board 5; And Tsu (500) viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and has a single guide passage extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, and a first rail attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. One rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555 that is spaced from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view and attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 The ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at the position of the tank rail 553 and the downstream end of the tank rail 553 It includes a Tamatome member 557 are, a.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball guided by the single guide passage of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 99A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a and the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 is a flat guide body 502a that extends to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 100 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge in the left-right direction. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 100 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 100B).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  In the present embodiment, the door passes more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 around the center axis (axial axis) of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 on the door frame through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. The angle at which the tangent line that touches the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view, with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in a state where the ball is in the state, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hit ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Is dropped to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 150.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin and has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. A left side plate portion 551b extending substantially downward with substantially the same width, and a right side plate portion 551c extending in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a with the same width as the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially constant rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A back plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end of the width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left plate portion 551b, and the left plate portion 551b From the front of the lower side to the right It includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape. In addition, on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, a flange portion 551da is formed in the left-right direction so as to protrude rearward at a portion separated by a predetermined length from the lower side.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in opaque black, and has a horizontal direction that is approximately half the horizontal width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. In addition, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is molded from a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward, thereby forming a single guide passage. Has been. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the single guiding passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are disposed on substantially the same surface. It has become so. The cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is bent multiple times downward from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in opaque white, and are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The sphere straightening member 556 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque white, and the first rectifying member 556 is formed between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553. The end of one rail cover 554 is attached so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The sphere straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 110). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that circulates in two upper and lower stages by this rectifying piece 556a, the flow is rectified so as to flow in a single stage on the downstream side, so that the inside of the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in opaque red color, and is slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the tank rail 553 as viewed from the front. , The opening at the bottom left end of the tank rail 553 is closed, and the game ball B can be prevented from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit downstream.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is downward as it goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape that is bent multiple times. A part of the plurality of bent portions is formed as a substrate housing portion 551aa to which the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 are attached. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k molded from a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal plate 558 includes a mounting surface and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, external terminals XCN1 arranged in a line from the left side to the right side when the payout base unit 550 is viewed from behind). And 10 external terminals of XCN10 are provided.))) And the substrate is accommodated so that its mounting surface is vertical toward the rear of the payout base 551 when the payout base 551 is viewed from the front. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 is horizontally oriented with its mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are mounted) facing downward. As seen from the front, the payout base 551 is disposed in front of the external terminal plate 558 and attached to the board housing portion 551aa and covered with the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground substrate 559 is housed in a space formed by the substrate housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be viewed from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

  Of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height is 18.6 mm). In contrast, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm). When the frame ground substrate 559 is accommodated and attached inside the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the frame ground substrate 559 is seen. Is hidden due to the presence of the external terminal plate 558, but it is difficult to visually recognize, but of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. 1 can be visually recognized from the back surface (for example, refer to FIG. 93). Although the height of the ground terminal ECN3 is as high as 13.4 mm as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the ground terminal ECN3 is hidden by the presence of the ball rectifying member 556 and is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 have a low height of 7 mm and cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558. It is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

  The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame ground substrate 559 is used for once collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding (earthing) the island equipment of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 103 and 104. 103 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the back. FIG. 104 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the gaming balls B aligned in a line by one guide passage of the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 includes a single payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the single guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 can flow, and a single ball pullout branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. In a normal state, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is discharged from the ball extraction passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B toward the payout device 580. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 110).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 105 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 106 (a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 106 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. It is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotational position of the dispensing blade. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the payout device for explaining prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. In FIG. 107, in order to explain the rotational position of the payout vane, the payout gear member and a part of various gears that cannot be seen from the back of the payout device are described so as to be visible, and are the subject of explanation. A small circle is attached to the bottom of the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589. Here, the configuration of the payout device 580 will be described first, and then the rotation position of the payout vanes, prevention of clogging of the balls, and prevention of ball dropout will be described.

[4-7-2a. Configuration of dispensing device]
The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side of the back plate 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing device rear lid 582 is made of polycarbonate resin and is molded transparently. Therefore, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a can be viewed from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent payout device rear cover 582.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur-gear-like drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached, a spur gear-like shape that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front lid 583. Of the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z1: 20), the second transmission gear 586, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. It extends outward from the transmission gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20), the spur gear-like payout gear 588a and the payout gear 588a (number of teeth Z3: 24) meshing with the second transmission gear 587. A payout gear member 588 having a number of detecting pieces 588b and rotatably mounted between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and paying out between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 A payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the gear member 588 and project into the payout passage 580a, and a detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 are detected. Blade rotation detection sensor 590. The payout motor 584 is controlled by the payout control board 633 and is step-driven. When the payout motor 584 is step-driven, the rotation shaft rotates stepwise at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in this embodiment). That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation shaft by 18 degrees in one step rotation. A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and are molded in opaque black. The payout blade 589 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque white.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582. In addition, the ball removal movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque white. The ball release lever 593 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque red color.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction, as viewed from the rear. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in the rear view. It opens downward near the left end. At this branching portion, a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the payout passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension, and a ball clogging prevention portion 581r is projected in a rib shape toward the ball extraction passage 580b. The upper surface of 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage that forms the payout passage 580a are formed in the same plane to form a right downward inclined surface in rear view. A detailed description of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r will be described later.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three plate-like detection pieces 588b having an arcuate shape extending outward at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape extending concentrically outwardly from the rotation axis thereof at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius that is slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a, and is recessed with an arc on the outer peripheral portion of the columnar shape. By forming the ball storage portions 589b at equal intervals, the blade pieces 589a serving as peaks and the ball storage portions 589b serving as valleys are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 106). As described above, the ball removal can be performed by opening the ball removal passage 580b using the ball removal lever 593.

  When ball removal is performed by raising the ball removal lever 593 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in the state of daisy chaining upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592 However, it will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side over the ball removal movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592. Therefore, more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7-2b. Rotating position of dispensing blade
As described above, the payout device 580 includes a spur gear-like drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 (meshing with the drive gear 585). Tooth number Z1: 20), spur gear-like second transmission gear 587 (tooth number Z2: 20) meshing with the first transmission gear 586, spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a (tooth number) meshing with the second transmission gear 587 Z3: 24) and a discharge gear member 588 having a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a discharge blade 589 that rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588, a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the detection piece 588b of the discharge gear member 588, and the like. When the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is driven to rotate, the rotation is paid via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. It is transmitted to rotate the blade 589.

  Here, the rotational speed of the payout gear member 588 is obtained by reducing the rotational speed of the payout motor 584 by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. . The reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by calculation based on the mechanism. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor excited by 2-2 phase excitation having a rotation shaft that rotates 18 degrees in one step rotation (the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 360 steps ( = 18 degrees × 20 steps))), the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 is 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees × reduction ratio n) when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates one step. It will rotate. Thus, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 54 steps), and when one rotation (360 degrees rotation), 4.5 turns. It will rotate an extra degree.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees, so that the dispensing blade 589 rotates once (360 degrees). It is necessary to rotate the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 step by step 53.333 (= 360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees), and the stepping drive to the dispensing motor 584 corresponding to one rotation (360 degrees rotation) of the dispensing blade 589 is performed. The number of steps that is the number of times is not an integer.

  That is, in this embodiment, three ball storage portions 589b are formed at equal intervals on the payout vane 589, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to step driving. The delivery blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588 (that is, the rotational axis of the delivery motor 584 is 1). Since the payout vane 589 rotates 6.75 degrees when it is stepped (rotated 18 degrees), one game ball B can be sent out every 120 degrees of rotation. In order to rotate the blades 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by 17.777... Step rotation (= 120 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees). Therefore, in this embodiment, the 18-step rotation, which is an integer rounded up to the nearest decimal point, is set as the number of times of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589, whereby the payout blade 589 is rotated more than 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation × 6.75 degrees)), so that the rotation position of the payout vane 589 reaches the position where the next game ball B is received. Can be rotated.

  The payout blade 589 can pay out three game balls B each time it rotates (360 degrees), but only one game ball B may be paid out. For example, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 may be erroneously detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590. Therefore, every time one game ball B is paid out, the origin of the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set. Is preferred. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is 18 step rotation that is an integer rounded up to the nearest decimal point, as described above. The payout vane 589 is rotated more than 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation × 6.75 degrees)) and paid out each time one game ball B is paid out. Processing for setting the origin of the rotational position of the blade 589 is performed to increase the accuracy of the rotational position of the payout blade 589.

  In addition, as described above, the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, so that each game ball is paid out. Even if errors accumulate, the rotation angle of the payout vane 589 is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout vane 589. Each time it is paid out, the accumulated error can be reset. Thus, even if an error occurs every time a game ball is paid out due to the influence of cigarette dust, dust, etc., the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time one game ball is paid out. It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an error from occurring in the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game ball.

  In addition, as described above, the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, so that each game ball is paid out. The positioning position is different every time. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, so that the positions where dust and dust are attached can be dispersed. Naturally, if the reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member that causes such a positioning error is set, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the rotation angle of the payout vane 589 is Detecting with a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589 resets when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is ensured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotational position of the ball feed rotating unit that receives and sends out the game ball is changed every time the game ball is paid out, and the positions where the dust and dust adhere are distributed to the dust and dust. On the other hand, a strong dispensing device 580 can be provided. The payout device 580 has a single payout passage 580a as described above. For this reason, when compared with the payout device having the payout blades in the two payout passages, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout passage 580a in the present embodiment when the payout speed of the game balls is the same. Needs to rotate twice as fast. Then, in the present embodiment, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout passage 580a collides with the game ball and the payout blade 589 in comparison with the payout device having the payout blades in the two payout passages. Since the number of times is also doubled, the probability that cigarette dust or dust adheres to the dispensing blade 589 is high.

  In this embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, as described above, the dispensing blade 589 exceeds one rotation, so that one rotation of the dispensing blade 589 is equivalent to the 54-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584. If the control is determined and managed as a set to be managed, an angular difference of 4.5 degrees with respect to one rotation of the dispensing blade 589 occurs every 54 steps of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584. For example, 80 sets In this case, the angle difference is finally increased to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of game balls B to be paid out increases by three.

  As described above, the payout gear member 588 is provided with three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120 degree regions having a 60 degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60 degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. . As described above, the detection piece 588 b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the dispensing control board 633.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 rotates the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 so that the above-described angle difference does not occur. As a management range, a 120-degree area having a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed is used as one game ball B. It can be managed as a payout operation.

  Specifically, first, the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed in the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588. Since this is a state, the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps as the light shielding range (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 rotating integrally with the dispensing gear member 588). The 60 ° region where the detection piece 588b is not formed is in a state in which the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is not cut off by the detection piece 588b, so that the rotation axis of the discharge motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps as the light receiving range. (Corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588).

  In other words, in this embodiment, the rotation gear rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is detected with the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the dispensing gear member 588 as the light-shielding range and the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed. The area of 60 degrees where the piece 588b is not formed is set as the light receiving range and is managed by 18 step rotation including the 9 step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. This is done by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by 18 steps.

  When the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates nine steps, the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps). Since the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can rotate slightly larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, a 60-degree region (light-shielding range) in which the detection piece 588b is formed, A 60-degree region (light receiving range) where the detection piece 588b is not formed can be reliably determined.

  Here, a method for setting the origin of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the payout control board 633 has a state in which the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 has changed the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state ("first edge "Detected state") is set with the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 as the point A. At this point A, the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 is restricted by the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which has rotated the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 from this point A by 5 steps, as the origin as shown in FIG. 107 (b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout vane 589, which has rotated the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 for four steps from the origin, as a B point. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 is in a state where the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state (referred to as “second edge detection state”). In a region where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates from point A to the origin and point B, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the light receiving range (that is, the above-described dispensing gear). Of the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the member 588, a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed).

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout vane 589, which has rotated the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 for 9 steps from the point B, as the point A described above again. At this time, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 at the origin is moved to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), in the region where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates from the point B to the point A, as shown in FIG. In the region of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of FIG.

  Here, the control of the dispensing device 580 by the dispensing control board 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes a power-on process on the payout control side when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). In the payout control side power-on process, the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the steady process when executing the initial setting process and the interrupt start setting. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after the interrupt start setting, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processes such as a payout motor control process, a history creation process, and an origin setting process in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process.

  The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation with a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms by repeatedly executing the history creation process. The payout control board 633 detects the rotation of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed every 4 ms for switching the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation, that is, this time and the previous time. The result of confirming whether the detection piece 588b is in a state of blocking or non-blocking the optical axis is determined from the least significant bit of the history information having a width of 8 bits. After bit shifting one bit at a time, when both the current and previous confirmation results are in a state where the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, both the current and previous confirmation results indicate that the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, or this time (For example, one of the confirmation results of this time and the previous time is when the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is the blade rotation detection sensor) When the detection piece 588b is not blocking the optical axis 590), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

  In this manner, the payout control board 633 updates and creates history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms for switching the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation in the history creation process. The payout control board 633 executes origin setting processing for setting the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the payout motor control process to rotate the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 for five steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A, as described above. Since the rotation position of the delivery blade 589 is the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b described above is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is detected by the detection piece. 588b is in a non-blocking state.

  Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having a width of 8 bits, the detection piece 588b has the blade rotation detection sensor 590 immediately before the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point A. 000001B (“B” indicates bit information. The same applies hereinafter) is set because the optical axis of the optical fiber is changed from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state (first edge detection state). . When the rotational position of the payout vane 589 advances from the point A to the origin, the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having an 8-bit width is set to 00111111B. In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 performs the first masking process on the history information with the first determination value of 11110000B, and extracts the data from the previous 8 times to the previous 5 times as the calculation result. Later (here, the calculation result is 00110000B by the first mask processing), and the second judgment value of 00010000B is further subjected to the second mask processing for the extracted data, so that the previous five times from the history information. Data is extracted as an operation result (here, the operation result is 00010000 by the second mask process). When the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotation position of the payout vane 589 is not at the origin, and the current rotation position of the payout vane 589 is not set as the origin. It is determined that the current rotational position of the blade 589 is at the origin, and the current rotational position of the payout blade 589 is set as the origin.

  In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as the origin, and rotates the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the origin. Then, the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589 is set to point B, and the rotational axis of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 9 steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589 is located at the point B (that is, exceeding the light shielding range). This processing is finished as it is for a total of 13 steps with the rotation position of the delivery vane 589 as the point A again. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the time until the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates for a total of 13 steps passes. An origin detection prohibition time for prohibiting the origin setting for the payout blade 589 is provided.

  The payout control board 633 switches the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms by executing a payout motor control process. As shown in FIG. 107, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A, and sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589 to the origin. Is set to 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the discharge motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the origin, and the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is changed to B. The time taken as a point is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the discharge motor 584 is rotated 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the B point (that is, the light shielding range is reduced). The time when the rotation position of the delivery vane 589 again becomes point A again is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 step rotation). As described above, the payout of one game ball B is performed by 18-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. Therefore, the time required for paying out one game ball B is paid out. By performing 18 step rotation of the rotating shaft of the motor 584, 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18 step rotation) is obtained.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine having a payout device that pays out a number of game balls according to the amount of rotation of a payout rotating body that receives and sends out game balls by driving a payout motor has been proposed (for example, No. 2004-041261 (paragraph [0052] and FIG. 4)). In the gaming machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor rotates 30 degrees by the output of the data drive data for four steps, so that one game ball is paid out. ing. In a pachinko machine installed in a pachinko parlor, it is inevitable that tobacco dust or dust adhering to the game ball will adhere to the inside of the dispensing device. In addition, since the dispensation device is not disassembled and cleaned, a dispensation device that is strong against cigarette dust and dust is required. By the way, in the gaming machine of this document, since the payout motor rotates 30 degrees by driving the payout motor for 4 steps and is set to pay out one game ball, an accurate operation can be expected. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotating body is the same every time. For this reason, there has been a problem that the position at which tobacco dust and dust adhere is fixed and easily deposited.

[4-7-2c. Ball clogging prevention and ball omission prevention]
Next, ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, prevention of ball clogging at the time of ball removal will be described first, and then prevention of ball dropout due to a non-energized state of the dispensing motor 584 will be described.

  As described above, the ball pulling lever 593 is positioned at the rising end so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened. It can be done. When ball removal is performed, the ball removal lever 593 is raised so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated. At this time, in a state where the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is stopped at the origin, a part of the inner wall of the passage that forms the payout passage 580a from the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589 as shown in FIG. Are in a state where a total of four game balls B are parked over the rib-shaped ball clogging prevention portion 581r projecting toward the ball extraction passage 580b with a predetermined distance dimension. As the predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and downstream (that is, the payout blade 589 is present). It is a length located on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a. As a result, a rib-shaped ball clogging preventive portion in which a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the payout passage 580a has a predetermined distance from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and protrudes toward the ball extraction passage 580b. When a plurality of game balls B stays in the payout passage 580a up to 581r, a part of the last game ball B that stops stops from the ball clogging prevention portion 581r toward the ball removal passage 580b. That is, the predetermined distance dimension is formed so as to constitute the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. The game ball B flowing down along the above-mentioned main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. Even so, the length is such that it can flow down to the ball extraction passage 580b. In this way, a part of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stops on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r in a state of protruding toward the ball extraction passage 580b (in other words, ball clogging prevention). The length of a part of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the portion 581r protrudes toward the ball extraction path 580b), and the width of the ball extraction path 580b is restricted to a width that allows one game ball B to flow down. Be able to.

  In addition, as described above, the ball clogging prevention portion 581r has an upper surface and a passage inner wall surface that forms the payout passage 580a formed in the same plane and has a right downward inclined surface in a rear view.

  That is, in the case where the ball is removed while the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the game ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a. However, even if it collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r has a right downward inclined surface in the rear view. The center (center of gravity) of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clog prevention unit 581r is located on the right side and the downstream side of the left end side of the ball clog prevention unit 581r. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r from bouncing due to a collision and flowing down toward the ball removal passage 580b. Be able to Going on. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a from causing a ball blockage in the vicinity of the left end of the ball blockage prevention unit 581r.

  As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is moved along the ball removal path (the body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a). The flow path of the game ball B on the flow path to the side) is restricted to a width that allows one game ball B to flow down as the width of the ball removal passage 580b, as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. Thus, clogging of the balls can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent clogging of the balls when removing the balls. In the present embodiment, although the width of the ball extraction passage 580b varies depending on the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589, it is set to be from the minimum width: 12 mm to the maximum width: 14 mm. It is set to 13 mm when the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging is likely to occur in places where the width of various passages is narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) and slightly narrower (eg, 21 mm) than the diameter of the game ball.

  Next, a description will be given of prevention of ball dropout due to the non-energized state of the dispensing motor 584. In a state where the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. And the game ball B is stopped in the payout passage 580a in a state in which the following game balls B are in contact with the game balls B. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and slightly to the right from there. After being bent obliquely downward, it bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the discharge vane 589.

  For this reason, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B that comes into contact with the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is the center of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 ( When the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is stopped at the origin, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout vane 589 follows the game ball B. A rightward force (that is, a force rotating in the clockwise direction) is applied to the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 by the ball pressure due to the weight of the game ball B to be played.

  In this state, when the dispensing motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the dispensing motor 584 naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589 and is accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. The game ball B will flow down (send out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and the ball will drop out.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the dispensing motor 584 is in a non-energized state, even if the dispensing motor 584 rotates naturally in the clockwise direction with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589, the rotational axis of the dispensing motor 584 The shape of the payout passage 580a on the right side of the payout vane 589 in the rear view is formed so as to be able to stop by 6-step rotation from the origin.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 108 (c), when the dispensing motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 6 steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stopped. , The game ball B that comes into contact with the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 has a point S1 that comes into contact with the side wall of the payout passage 580a and the outer periphery of the blade piece 589a having the arc shape of the payout blade 589. Of the surface, the side closer to the ball housing portion 589b in which the game ball B is housed (that is, the ball housing portion 589b in which the game ball B is housed, and the ball housing portion in which the game ball B that follows this ball housing portion 589b is not housed. Of the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a that connects the portion 589b and the S2 point that contacts the ball storage portion 589b side where the game ball B is stored from the center of the outer peripheral surface. It is formed the shape of sea urchin dispensing passage 580a. As a result, a ball pressure that presses the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the discharge blade 589 can be generated, and the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 can be stopped by rotating six steps from the origin of the discharge blade 589. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from coming off due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

  When the payout control board 633 starts controlling the payout motor 584 in a state where the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stopped, the payout motor 584 is rotated by 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), it is in a state where it has advanced by rotating 2 steps in the light shielding range (9 steps) beyond the point B which has been rotated 4 steps from the origin as shown in FIG. 107 (d). However, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 13 steps (as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the remaining 7 step rotation + 5 step rotation from the point A because it proceeds by rotating 2 steps out of 9 steps), the dispensing blade 589 Is the origin, and the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout vane 589 flows down (sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a. It is adapted to be reliably detected by the detection sensor 591. Therefore, even when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is deviated from the origin of the payout vane 589 (rotated and advanced by 6 steps) and stopped, an excessive number of balls from which the game balls B are paid out does not occur.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 receives the payout command from the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 as described above. Accordingly, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202). At the time of power recovery after power recovery after a momentary power failure (momentary power failure), first, the operation of returning the rotational position of the payout blade 589 to the origin by controlling the payout motor 584 is not performed. As described above, when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is deviated from the origin of the payout vane 589 (rotating 6 steps) and stopped, an excessive number of game balls B are paid out. This is to prevent this.

[4-7-3. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full sphere path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 below the payout device 580 from the rear. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full sphere path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is open on the rear side, and a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and is open on the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 110).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are aligned side by side, and are opened forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens rightward in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the turning center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the discharge unit 560, and the lower normal discharge path 610a, the lower full tank discharge path 610b, and the lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is open.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of ball tanks 552 are detected from the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570 Of game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball pass unit 610, and fills up the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 enters a non-detection state.

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 111A is a perspective view of the main body frame substrate unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 111B is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 115 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses sound output from the main body speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631. There is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 volts (AC100V) is stepped down to the power supply voltage for gaming machines of AC 24 volts (AC24V). AC24V, which is stepped down in the island facilities of the game hall, is supplied to the power supply board 630 via a power cord (not shown). The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc.) from AC24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall and supplies them to various boards.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 115). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Thus, the instructed number of game balls B are to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202).

  The payout control board box 632 includes a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The dispensing control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. The cover body and the beta body are transparently molded of polycarbonate resin, so that the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the dispensing control board 633 (whether unauthorized modification has been performed or unauthorized IC is mounted) It is possible to confirm whether or not it has been done from the outside of the payout control board box 632. Further, the dispensing control board box 632 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the beta body, respectively, and when the dispensing control board box 632 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the dispensing control board box 632 is then paid out. In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the dispensing control board box 632. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrent against fraud to the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600. When the left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551 i of the payout base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601 a of the upper full ball path unit 600, it is formed on the upper side of the back cover 640.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward, and an abutting portion 640a that is lowered forward by one step is formed on the upper side. In a state assembled to the frame 4, the rear surface is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same surface as the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 (the rear surface of the flange portion 551da formed on the above-described back plate upper portion 551d). Yes. Further, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551, and this contact portion is , And is covered with a flange portion 551da formed to protrude from the back plate upper portion 551d.

  Except for the contact portion 640a, the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame flange 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame collar 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the body frame]
Next, a detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 124. 117A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 117B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 118 is an enlarged view showing the upper part in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the ball tank as viewed from the front and the tank rail and the like assembled, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view of FIG. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 119 (a) as seen from the front. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 124 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 that is rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-letter shape that is mounted along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. A payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tab spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a tank rail A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551, and for paying out the game ball B to the player side; It is equipped with.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a quadrilateral shape in plan view that extends in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in front view, and a front wall and a rear wall of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape that is open on the upper side. Has been. In the ball tank 552, a game ball B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f is approximately 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the end of the left wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right wall 552e side). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view and a downstream side extending to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guide portion 553a extends to the left after extending from the right end to about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to the position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. .

  In the main rail 553a, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in parallel to the axis extending in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed. Is formed at a height that allows only one to be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  Further, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left-right direction (in the present embodiment, about the bottom surface of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a when viewed from the front, at a portion where the upper side is closed. Three rectangular cutout portions 553aa having a predetermined interval (about 10 mm in this embodiment) are formed. Due to the rectangular cutout portion 553aa, the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a has a thickness of the rear wall (about 2.5 mm in this embodiment) from the rear wall toward the front of the main guide portion 553a. A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate on the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a is formed upward from the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a (in this embodiment) , About 2.5 mm), a rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a lateral length of about 30 mm is formed, and these rectangular holes are formed in communication.

  The game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 fall off with the metal powder being peeled off from the game balls B due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is attached to the main guiding portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is prevented, so that the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B, and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a, and the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a by naturally falling from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa, Metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a due to vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. Thus, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a, and the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by an attendant such as a game hall clerk. It is possible to remove the metal powder from the main guiding portion 553a by performing the work of removing the removed metal powder.

  The tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that changes in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to coincide with the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Yes. By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is in a line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight gap between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature at the downstream side than at the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B that circulates in the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulge portion 553b that abuts. It will change to various directions, and generation | occurrence | production of a spherical spot can be suppressed in the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B that circulates in the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force is less likely to disperse, so that the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clumps) to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. Since the direction in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed is dispersed is dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball balls) can be made difficult to occur.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball clog) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's game can be enjoyed for the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized from the rear. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gear, belt, etc. can be confirmed while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. The same operational effects as the effects can be obtained.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Extending from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side being low And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a side opposite the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j in between, are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a that can be connected to the electrical wiring from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), the upper surface being the overflow surface portion And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from the lower side to the rear side from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically, from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the outer frame upper member 30 and the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are both higher in the left and right direction than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, and extend in a strip shape in the front-rear direction. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed to be higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552 f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the bypass passage 552g and the left end of the bypass passage 552g coincide with each other in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, a container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and the passage surface 552h is inclined so that the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g has a left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side in the front view extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552, and the left end side It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the rear end thereof is along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Thereby, the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the rear end that is inclined so that the circulation direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The rear end of the bypass passage 552g that extends obliquely extends substantially parallel to the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends diagonally (the direction in which the game balls B flow in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is wide in the tank rail 553. Can receive a game ball B from Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B moves from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the rear end that extends obliquely allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow, , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball scum in the tank rail 553.

  Further, the part for guiding the game ball B through the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that lies under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening portion 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). (Height) is not exceeded. Therefore, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B is not spilled rearward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate that extends to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d on the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in front view that is approximately 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, From there, it is formed in a shape extending in parallel with the rear wall 552c from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width.

  The spherical tank 552 includes a right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape described above in a plan view, and a straight line connecting the end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side of the right end side. The enclosed region has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. Further, the spherical tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction and the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and on the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. Part 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges (the main body frame base 501) of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c. The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the upper step).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled with each other, the upstream end (right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of a portion extending obliquely of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge part 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that it is lowered stepwise from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side when viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, the position is higher along the tank rail 553 to the left than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to the rear and then extends backward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is attached in a state where a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can be grasped at the tip of the electric wiring by opening the grip portion by operating the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

  Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g is lower as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower, and the right step 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side is lowered in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the upper overflow edge 552f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper edges. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the overflow surface portion 501m and discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 122). Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball play) due to the engagement between the game balls B.

  Since the bypass passage 552g is provided, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from strongly acting backward on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by preventing the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing the overflow portion 552f from the ball tank 552 and flowing into the overflow surface portion 501m is left on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour path 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Therefore, the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other due to the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B can be blocked. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end is provided at the bottom of the tank rail 553, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are in an aligned state, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided, so that the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a is increased. Since they are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) The plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction in FIG. 1 are circulated downstream through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction. Can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rails 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a line.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of game balls B can be stored in the overflow surface portion 501g and the bulging portion 553b is provided in the tank rail 553. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  In addition, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be distant from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a. The game ball B does not cause a problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the electrical wiring.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is stored in the ball tank 552. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces at the overflow surface portion 501m, and to prevent falling from the rear side even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (rightward in FIG. 122) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. However, as shown in FIG. 122, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g due to their inclination, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4, which causes a problem. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes through the lower side of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, the game ball is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Accordingly, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

  The ball tank 552 is molded from a conductive resin, whereas the tank rail 553 and a peripheral control board box of a peripheral control unit 1500 described later are molded from a nonconductive resin. In the present embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 has the same polarity. It is repelled and is not drawn to the peripheral control board box.

[4-12. Metal powder countermeasure configuration]
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view of a part of a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 117 (a), and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for metal powder countermeasures. In FIG. 125, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the part of the game board 5 necessary for explanation is represented as a cross-sectional view.

  When the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble may occur, causing a malfunction in the peripheral control unit 1500 or causing a malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with an IC such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM described later, and the peripheral data ROM board described later is provided with an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. The pin spacing of these ICs is reduced, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is narrowed, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased, thereby narrowing the spacing of various connectors. Therefore, since the distance between the connector and the special connector is also narrow, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, it is shifted backward (in this embodiment, about one half of the diameter of the game ball B). The distance is shifted by a distance of.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape that is bent multiple times downward. A back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, a bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are substantially flush with each other. It is arranged. When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. In addition, the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d.

  Thereby, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa is received and attached at the top plate portion 551a, or received and attached at the convex portion 551da. Be able to. Further, the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 come into surface contact protrudes rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. Since it is covered with the formed convex portion 551da, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 starts from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa abuts. It cannot be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It has become.

  In this way, the top plate portion 551a and the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 are metal of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Prevents powder from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a trap that can be. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of notches 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 that is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 that is attached to the cover body 1501 is displaced (in the present embodiment, the displacement is about a distance of about half the diameter of the game ball B). (In other words, because the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly below the notch 553aa), the electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 This is effective in preventing metal powder.

  The plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, whereas the upper side, the left side, and the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). However, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the cover body 1501.

  Further, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 has a FAN mounting recess having a square shape for mounting the air cooling fan FAN formed on the center side thereof, and a plurality of concentric circles on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are formed along each. Further, the cover body 1501 has seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume control switch and seven connectors described later provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 along the lower side. Volume adjustment holes are formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. In the state in which the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, the gaps are formed by seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed in the cover body 1501. The volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume adjustment hole. In addition, in a state where a liquid crystal output board (to be described later) is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board and two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed from these two connector holes.

  When the wing part of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the peripheral control is performed by ejecting the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing part by this rotation. Air from the outside of the unit 1500 passes through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. In addition, the gaps described above (seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, gaps formed in the peripheral control board 1510, volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, cover) A volume adjustment hole formed in the body 1501; During and through the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal driving board, and two connector hole formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The area (total area) of each of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess of the cover body 1501 is the total area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 as described above. Clearance (seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed on the cover body 1501, gaps formed on the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the cover body 1501. The volume adjustment hole, the gap formed in the liquid crystal output substrate, the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output substrate, and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501) It is getting smaller. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air flow is taken in via the air flow rate, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be kept small. Thereby, heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from entering the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the ventilation holes 1501az due to the influence of the air flow.

  Incidentally, when the wing part of the air cooling fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, when the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is sucked into the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the wing part by this rotation, the air cooling fan FAN Since the air flow velocity due to the rotation of the wings of the game ball increases, the probability that the heavy powder of metal powder of the game sphere B is sucked into the inner space of the cover body 1501 due to the influence of the air flow is increased. Due to electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by metal powder, various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 may cause problems (failures). Become.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protruding portion along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy powder of the metal powder of the game ball B is air-cooled. It can be configured to have a function as a bag for preventing the fan FAN from being sucked in, and by forming a protrusion along the vicinity of the upper side of the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501, a game ball It can be configured to have a function as a bowl that prevents heavy powder of metal powder B from being sucked into the air cooling fan FAN, and the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN is thin. (That is, the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN compared to the distance dimension in the depth direction of the FAN mounting recess) When the air cooling fan FAN is accommodated in the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501 by selecting a short distance dimension), the heavy powder of the metal ball of the game ball B is blown by the inner wall of the FAN mounting recess. It can be configured to have a function as a bag for preventing inhalation by FAN. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

  Next, another configuration of the present invention in which an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B can be avoided (hereinafter referred to as “the metal powder countermeasure according to the second to fifth embodiments”). Will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment. FIG. 127 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment. FIG. 128 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment. 126 to 129, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (hereinafter referred to as “a configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the part of the game board 5 necessary for explanation is represented as a cross-sectional view.

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same surface.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and upward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. And a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the bent end surface of the top plate portion 551a is disposed above the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. While the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553, The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 are arranged on substantially the same surface. In addition, the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 disposed substantially on the same plane as the tank rail 553 is branched from the portion to which the effect display device 1600 is attached and is extended rearward.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. The mounting recess 3010da is in contact with the mounting recess 3010da, and the contacted portion is covered with an upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

  As described above, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail Whereas the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment. In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back box in the back unit 3000 are arranged. 3010 is different from the rear surface 3010d in that it is arranged on substantially the same plane. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The abutting portion is in surface contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the mounting recess formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. 3010da is in contact with the surface, and the contacted portion is covered by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. It is different at the point.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, the same effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is received on the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It can be attached. Further, the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting recess 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in surface contact is formed by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. Since it is covered, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa comes into contact. The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  As described above, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 have dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Toward the peripheral control unit 1500 where the metal powder of the game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a bag that can prevent it from falling. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same surface.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is close to the rear surface of the tank rail 553. The main guide part 553a is arranged so as to protrude below the notch part 553aa formed in the main guide part 553a.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a which are in contact with the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Are arranged on the same plane.

  As described above, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail Whereas the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion of the back plate 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment. The bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are substantially on the same plane. It is different in that it is arranged in. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The abutting portion is in surface contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is bent below the tank rail 553. The abutting portion 6 is in contact with the end surface of the top plate portion 551a and is in contact with the top surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. And the upper surface of 0a are different in that they are arranged on the same plane.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, the same effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is a bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. And the upper surface of the contact portion 640a of the back cover 640 can be received and attached. Further, the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551 a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in abutment is in abutment. As a result, no gap is formed, so that the game panel of the game board 5 starts from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa comes into contact. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base body 1502. It is like that.

  In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 has the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a trap that can be prevented. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same surface.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is directed rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude by a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about one third of the diameter of the game ball B).

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. The bent top plate portion 551a is in contact with the convex portion 551ab that protrudes downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a, and the contacted portion is in contact with the tank rail 553. Is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a.

  As described above, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail Whereas the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion of the back plate 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, in the configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. The bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed so as to slightly protrude rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. Is different. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The abutting portion is in surface contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is disposed below the tank rail 553. In addition, the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in contact with the convex portion 551ab formed to protrude downward, and the contacted portion is Disposed below the tank rails 553, it is different in that covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the same effects as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is a bent top plate portion disposed below the tank rail 553. It can be received and adhered at 551a. Further, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640, and a convex portion 551ab formed below the tank rail 553 and projecting downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a, Since the abutting portion where the surface contacts is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553, it falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the notch portion 553aa. Attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the contacted portion of the metal balls of the game ball B The peripheral control unit 1500 cannot be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a bowl that can prevent the game ball B and also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a functioning as a cage disposed below the tank rail 553 is used as a separate member (another structural component). It can also be configured to be attached to.

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are disposed. Are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Are not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. And a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to protrude downward as compared with the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the contact portion formed by largely bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4. The front surface of 640a is disposed in parallel with the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a disposed so as to protrude downward relative to the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a. It is in contact.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  In contrast, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has a bowl-shaped main guide. It is arranged in parallel with the front wall of the portion 553a and is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged to protrude downward compared to the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. The part in contact with the main guide portion 553a is arranged so as to be largely displaced forward from the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

  As described above, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail Whereas the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion of the back plate 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment. The bent top plate portion 551a is not disposed below the tank rail 553, and the upper side of the back cover 640 is largely bent forward and formed in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4. The difference is that the portion 640a is arranged. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The abutting portion is in surface contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is connected to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a. It is arranged in parallel and is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged to protrude downward as compared with the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. Min, is different in that it is arranged largely shifted forward from notches 553aa which is plurally formed to the main guiding part 553a.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the same effects as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is the upper side of the back cover 640 disposed below the tank rail 553. The side can be received and attached to the upper surface of the contact portion 640a formed by being greatly bent forward. Furthermore, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a are disposed parallel to the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. The abutting portion where the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a comes into surface contact is arranged to be largely shifted forward from the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a and is in contact with the gap. Is not formed. For this reason, from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa comes into contact, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000) The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface 3010 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  As described above, the contact portion 640a formed by bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward greatly is formed from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. To the peripheral control unit 1500 where the metal powder of the dropped game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In addition to functioning as a bowl that can be prevented from falling, it also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine including a tank rail that guides a game ball from a ball tank to the downstream side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). The tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter that falls from the hole provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board located below the tank rail, an electrical trouble may occur, causing the control board to malfunction or malfunction. It was. In recent control boards, the pin spacing of the connector is narrowed by increasing the number of controlled objects, the connector spacing is narrowing by increasing the number of connectors, and the IC pin spacing is further reduced. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electrical problems caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. 130 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 131 is a front view showing the inside of a game area where game balls circulate in the game board. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a gate unit that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B 2003, a second start opening 2004, a first big prize opening 2005, and a second big prize opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 131). Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B has the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, and the second grand winning in the gaming area 5a. This is for playing a game in which the operation of driving the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be received or passed through the mouth 2006 or the like.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 131). In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 115 and 153, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit (not shown) arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 A front unit 2000 attached to the front surface and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder (not shown) to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear side.

  The effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A frame-shaped metal frame accommodates a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. A metal back is fixed to the frame-shaped metal frame to be electrically connected, and also electrically connected to a ground (GND) line of a drive circuit housed in the frame-shaped metal frame. It is like that.

  The effect display device 1600 is controlled by a peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as a peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. The ground (GND). The effect display device 1600 is a display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the area of the liquid crystal panel surrounded by the frame-shaped metal frame is visible by surrounding the liquid crystal panel with a frame-shaped metal frame. Double-sided adhesive tape is affixed to the front surface of the frame-shaped metal frame, and a single transparent plate (in this embodiment, 1 mm thick) covers the front surface of the frame-shaped metal frame and its inner region. Is attached (adhered).

  An attachment portion for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 is formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and one of the metal shield plates of the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed. A through-hole for exposing the portion is formed. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, a detailed description thereof will be described later. A part of the metal shield plate of the peripheral control unit 1500 is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. Through the through-hole formed, the metallic display back of the effect display device 1600 is in contact with the conductive elastic member. Thereby, the metal shield plate of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are a gaming region. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; A second start opening 2004 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the passing of the game ball B through the gate portion 2003; The first special lottery result or the second special lottery drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the reception of the game ball B at the one start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 A first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 which is possible to accept the game ball B at either depending on results, and a. A plurality of general winning openings 2001 (four general winning openings 2001) are winning openings (entrance entrances) having similar uses, and the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, and the gate part 2003 have uses. The first prize winning opening 2005 and the second major winning prize opening 2006 are similar prize winning openings (ball entering openings). Here, the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the gate part 2003 will be briefly described as winning holes (ball holes) having similar uses. The first start port 2002 is a game ball B. The first special lottery result is obtained by executing the lottery by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the acceptance of the game, and the second start port 2004 is based on the acceptance of the game ball B. The second special lottery result is obtained by executing the lottery by the main control board 1310 of the control unit 1300, and the gate unit 2003 is based on the passage of the game ball B and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. This is because the normal lottery result can be obtained by executing the lottery.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200 which is attached to the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front opening unit 2100 in front view and has two general winning ports 2001, and the center in the vertical direction at the right end in front view in the game area 5a. A gate unit 2300 having a gate portion 2003 attached to the lower side of the game area 5a, and a general winning opening 2001, a second start opening 2004, which are attached to the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first big prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006.

  The back unit 3000 is a box shape that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and has a front opening. And a lower movable effect unit 3100, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and an upper front movable effect unit 3300 that are mounted in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop portion 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 coincides with a notch portion of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder (not shown) attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder is provided with a through-hole that holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has an inside that is substantially the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. ing.

  Moreover, the panel holder is provided with the notch part notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch are penetrated to penetrate the lower part. Front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the sphere path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 153) that controls game contents, payout of the game ball B, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. A main control board 1310 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are molded transparently by polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side or back side of the main control board 1310 (whether unauthorized modification has been performed or unauthorized IC is mounted) Or not) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found, and the deterring power against the illegal action on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second start opening sensor 2511, a first large winning opening sensor 2512, a second large winning opening sensor 2513, a starting opening solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid 2515. Are connected to a second attacker solenoid 2516, a general winning port sensor 3001, a first start port sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 is not shown in detail, but the two shins display a status indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs, and a normal hold display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate part 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the game, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for display, and a second special reservation number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second start port 2004. ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 repeats the number of times of opening / closing patterns of at least one of the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like ( A round indicator composed of five LEDs for displaying the number of rounds).

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the progress of effects provided to the player based on commands from the main control board 1310.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, and other boards (peripheral data ROM board and liquid crystal output board described later). Yes. The configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end forms an opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (in this case, a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; The second starting port 2004 that allows the game ball B to be received by opening and closing the movable piece according to the normal lottery result that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or The first big prize opening 20 that allows the game ball B to be received in at least one of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the second starting port 2004. And 5 and the second special winning opening 2006, and a. The first big prize opening 2005 can open and close the opening / closing member to receive the game ball B, and the second big prize opening 2006 opening / closing member can open and close to receive the game ball B.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view in the game area 5a. A right general winning opening 2001 is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004 is disposed at a lower position on the lower left side of the gate portion 2003 and slightly lower than the general winning port 2001 on the right side. The first grand prize winning port 2005 is disposed below the second starting port 2004 and at a slightly lower height than the first starting port 2002. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged at a slightly lower position on the left side of the first big prize opening 2005.

  The front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1008. The start unit 2100 has one general winning port 2001 and a first start port 2002, and a start port A side unit 2200 which is attached to the left side of the unit 2100 in the front view along the inner rail 1002 and has two general winning ports 2001, and the center in the vertical direction at the right end of the game area 5a in the front view. A gate unit 2300 which is attached to the lower side and has a gate portion 2003, and a general winning port 2001, a second start port 2004, which is attached to the upper side of the game area 5a and slightly in the middle of the front view. A frame-shaped center object 2500 having a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second major prize opening 2006, and the frame of the center prize 2500 are closed. Includes a transparent front direction unit 2600 is attached to so that the.

  The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is disposed at the right end of the game area 5a as viewed from the front and below the center in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2003 formed so that the game balls B can always pass one by one in the vertical direction, and a gate sensor 2301 that detects the game balls B that have passed through the gate portion 2003.

  In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Discharged. Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is done. The first start port sensor 3002 includes a first start port sensor main side (hereinafter referred to as “first start port sensor main side 3002a”) and a first start port sensor slave side (hereinafter referred to as “first start port sensor”). Mouth sensor slave side 3002b "), and the first starter sensor main side 3002a and the first starter sensor slave side 3002b are at least a false detection prevention distance dimension (14 mm in this embodiment). And has a larger distance dimension than the diameter of the game ball (11 mm). Since the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b use the same non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port If the sensor slave side 3002b is disposed in a state where the distance from the sensor detection side 3002b is equal to or smaller than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension, the game ball B passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a is moved together with the first start port sensor main side 3002a to the first start port. The game ball B that may be detected by the sensor slave side 3002b and that passes through the first starter port slave side 3002b is detected by the first starter sensor slave side 3002b together with the first starter sensor main side 3002a. Because there are cases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor subordinate side 3002b are spaced apart by a dimensional distance (43 mm in this embodiment) that is larger than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. As a result, when the first start port sensor main side 3002a detects the game ball B passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, the electrical influence of the detection reaches the first start port sensor sub side 3002b. Thus, even though the game ball B has not yet passed through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b, the physical detection that the first start port sensor slave side 3002b erroneously detects it. When the first start port sensor slave side 3002b detects a game ball B that passes through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b, When the electrical influence by the knowledge reaches the first start port sensor main side 3002a, the game ball B is already passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, but the first start It is possible to prevent the mouth sensor main side 3002a from erroneously detecting the physical structure. Thus, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is first detected by the first start port sensor main side 3002a by passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, and then the first start port sensor subordinate. After passing through the side 3002b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002 including the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor subordinate side 3002b (double sensor) is employed, so that the first start The game ball B received in the mouth 2002 can be reliably detected. It should be noted that an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as it or a synthetic resin ball having approximately the same diameter as it) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) is attached. A detailed description of the fraud detection process that can detect and notify a fraudulent act caused by radio wave irradiation using a first start port sensor 3002 composed of two sensors (double sensors) will be described later.

  In addition, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2511 and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is detected by the first big prize opening sensor 2512 or the second big prize opening sensor 2513 and then moved to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. Sent to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8-1. Center character]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 132 is a front view of the center accessory and the front effect unit in the front unit of the game board. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the front center of the game area 5 a and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the lower movable effect unit 3100 and the upper front movable effect unit provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. 3300 etc. can be visually recognized from the front. The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5 a Can not invade.

  The center accessory 2500 has one general winning opening 2001 arranged at the lower right corner when viewed from the front on the outer periphery of the frame, a second starting opening 2004 arranged slightly below the general winning opening 2001, It has a first big prize opening 2005 arranged below the second start opening 2004 and a second big prize opening 2006 arranged slightly below the first big prize opening 2005. Further, the center accessory 2500 is capable of releasing the warp inlet 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and the game ball B having entered the warp inlet 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. And a warp outlet 2502 opened in the frame, and a stage 2503 capable of releasing the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then released into the game area 5a.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape that is depressed in the center side in the left-right direction, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110) is formed so that the position of the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowest. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the lowest part at the center in the left-right direction becomes lower toward the front, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from this part. In the center accessory 2500, the height of the lowest part of the stage 2503 is substantially the same as that of the second start port 2004.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the elevated portion (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and the first large sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first big prize port 2005. A winning opening sensor 2512 and a second winning opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second winning opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 153). Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a start opening solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second start opening 2004 with a movable piece in accordance with a normal lottery result lottered by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003, and a first start opening 2002 or A first attacker solenoid 2515 that opens and closes the first big prize opening 2005 by an opening / closing member in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B at the second starting port 2004; A second attacker that opens and closes the second big prize opening 2006 by an opening / closing member in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 And a solenoid 2516.

  The center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right side and the upper side of the right side of the upper surface in the front view are the outer periphery (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. A gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. Further, when the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the lower right corner when viewed from the front is arranged with the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, and the second major winning port 2006. The lower right corner portion in front view that extends is extended to the lower right corner in the game area 5a, and a space is formed between the lower right corner portion and the upper right portion. In that space, the gate unit 2300 is arranged.

  Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-hand hit), the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. In addition, the game ball B can be received into the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 that are opened (open) with high probability.

[5-8-2. Table production unit]
The table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 136 and the like. FIG. 133 is a cross-sectional side view of the front effect unit cut along the center in the left-right direction together with the center accessory and viewed from the right. FIG. 134 is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs in the front effect unit and the reflective recesses of the front light guide plate. FIG. 135 is a front view showing a light emission mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front effect unit emits light.

  The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is closed on the center actor 2500 and has a transparent flat front light guide plate 2610, a reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610, and an upper surface of the reflector 2620. The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 on which a plurality of LEDs 2630 that irradiate light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610 are mounted, and the center light so as to cover the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 and the reflector 2620 from the front. And a front cover 2650 attached to 2500.

  The front light guide plate 2610 of the front effect unit 2600 is formed on the transparent flat light guide plate main body 2611 and the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611, and from any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 on the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. And a plurality of fine reflecting recesses 2613 for reflecting incident light forward. The plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 are composed of a first specific light incident portion 2612a, a second specific light incident portion 2612b, a third specific light incident portion 2612c, and a fourth specific light incident portion 2612d. It is configured. The first specific light incident portion 2612a, the second specific light incident portion 2612b, the third specific light incident portion 2612c, and the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d divide the upper surface of the light guide plate body 2611 into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction). Then, they are arranged in order from the left to the right in two rounds (the order of returning to the beginning after the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d to become the first specific light incident portion 2612a).

  The reflection concave portion 2613 has a plane that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 and is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. . The reflective recess 2613 is recessed in a pent roof-like triangle. The reflective concave portion 2613 can reflect the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate body 2611. In addition, the reflection concave portion 2613 can reflect the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate body 2611.

  As a result, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 134, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the light is reflected to the front front surface of the light guide plate body 2611 (perpendicular to the paper surface) by the reflective recess 2613. The reflective recess 2613 appears to emit light from a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 134, when light is incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the light is reflected in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate body 2611 by the reflective recess 2613 From the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflective recess 2613 does not appear to emit light.

  In the present embodiment, the reflective concave portion 2613 has a shape that is recessed in a triangle and extends in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be any one that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612.

  The plurality of reflective concave portions 2613 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612, and the plurality of first reflective concave portions 2613a and second specific light incident portions 2612b corresponding to the first specific light incident portion 2612a. A plurality of fourth reflections corresponding to a plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b corresponding to the third specific light input part 2612c, a plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c corresponding to the third specific light input part 2612c, and a fourth specific light input part 2612d. A recess 2613d.

  In addition, the front light guide plate 2610 includes a plurality of patterns 2614 that can emit and display in different modes by reflecting light forward from a specific group of the plurality of reflecting recesses 2613. Yes. The plurality of patterns 2614 includes a first pattern 2614a including only a plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a, a second pattern 2614b including only a plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b, and a third including only a plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c. The pattern 2614c includes a fourth pattern 2614d including only a plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d.

  The first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are concentric, in order from the outside to the center, as shown in FIGS. 132 and 135, and the like (following the fourth pattern 2614d). Are arranged so as to return to the beginning and become the first pattern 2614a).

  The reflector 2620 has a fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of the front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. The reflector 2620 can sandwich the front light guide plate 2610 between the front light guide plate 2610 and the front light guide plate 2610 by inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed recess 2621, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without rattling. it can. On the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixed recess 2621, a through hole 2622 that penetrates up and down is formed at a portion corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640.

  The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 has a strip shape extending in the left-right direction, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted on the lower surface of the reflector 2620 immediately above the fixed recess 2621. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are respectively mounted (attached) to portions corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622 of the reflector 2620. The front light guide plate decoration board 2640 is formed on the upper surface of the reflector 2620 so that the plurality of LEDs 2630 face downward through the through holes 2622.

  The plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached so as to correspond to the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2630 include a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light incident part 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light incident part 2612b, and a third specific light incident part 2612c. And a fourth LED group 2630d corresponding to the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d. The first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d divide the plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction, and from left to right The second LED group 2630d is arranged in order in the order of the second LED group 2630d. In the present embodiment, the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d each have six LEDs 2630.

  Next, the light emission effect by the front effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the first specific light incident portion 2612a, is reflected to the front by the first reflective recess 2613a, and the remaining second Since the second reflection recess 2613b, the third reflection recess 2613c, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the first reflection recess 2613a appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, The first pattern 2614a composed of a plurality of first reflective recesses 2613a can emit light (see FIG. 135 (a)).

  When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the second specific light incident portion 2612b, is reflected to the front by the second reflection concave portion 2613b, and the remaining second Since the one reflecting recess 2613a, the third reflecting recess 2613c, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the second reflecting recess 2613b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, The second pattern 2614b composed of a plurality of second reflective recesses 2613b can emit light (see FIG. 135 (b)).

  When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the third specific light incident portion 2612c, is reflected to the front by the third reflection concave portion 2613c, and the remaining second Since the first reflective concave portion 2613a, the second reflective concave portion 2613b, and the fourth reflective concave portion 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the third reflective concave portion 2613c appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, The third pattern 2614c composed of a plurality of third reflective recesses 2613c can emit light (see FIG. 135 (c)).

  When the fourth LED group 2630d of the front light guide plate decoration board 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d, is reflected to the front by the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d, and the remaining second Since the one reflecting recess 2613a, the second reflecting recess 2613b, and the third reflecting recess 2613c are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting recess 2613d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, The 4th pattern 2614d comprised from the some 4th reflective recessed part 2613d can be light-emitted (refer FIG.135 (d)).

  As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can each emit light, the plurality of LEDs 2630 are divided into the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth. When the LED group 2630d emits light in the order, the first design 2614a, the second design 2614b, the third design 2614c, and the fourth design 2614d can be emitted in the order, and there is a movement that spreads outward from the center. A lighting effect such as animation can be performed.

  On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs 2630 are caused to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630d, the third LED group 2630c, the second LED group 2630b, and the first LED group 2630a, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, Light can be emitted in the order of the pattern 2614b and the first pattern 2614a, and a light-emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that concentrates from the outside toward the center can be performed.

  Thus, according to the front effect unit 2600, a single front light guide plate 2610 can emit a plurality (three or more) of different pictures 2614, so that each picture can be displayed for animation display or the like. There is no need to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and a wide space is provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. It can be easily secured. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like are provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. The pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal to the player by improving the appearance in the game area 5a can be arranged, and in addition to the effect by the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect Various effects can be provided to the player by performing the movable effects by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. be able to.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 136, the front light guide plate 2610 causes a plurality of translucent patterns 2614 due to point light emission of the plurality of reflective recesses 2613 to emerge in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600. Because it can show a light-emitting decoration that moves like an animation, it can have a strong impact on players familiar with light-emitting effects using conventional light guide plates, and it can surprise and entertain players, It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since only the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the pattern 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 well, other players away from the front can see the pattern 2614. The light-emitting display becomes difficult to see, it can be difficult for other players to notice that an effect using the front light guide plate 2610 is performed, and other players can be prevented from paying attention. In addition to being able to play, the game can be performed without worrying about other players, and the game can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached so as to be sandwiched between the fixed recesses 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decoration board 2640 are reliably positioned with respect to the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. Thereby, each LED 2630 (the 1st LED group 2630a, the 2nd LED group 2630b, the 3rd LED group 2630c, the 4th LED group 2630d) is arrange | positioned in the position corresponding to each specific light-incidence part 2612 of the front light-guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each LED 2630 can be reflected frontward by the corresponding reflection recess 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be reliably emitted.

  Furthermore, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is displayed by the LED 2630, the light emission is displayed. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be viewed in a good state from the player side, making it difficult to see the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and entertain the game in a good state.

  Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the case where the light guide plate main body 2611 is attached by two members as in the prior art. Can be eliminated, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light incident portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 can be reliably irradiated with light from the LED 2630, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be irradiated. It is possible to reliably display the light emission.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 are arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611. Compared to the case where the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 and the front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611. It is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the player, so that the effect image can be easily seen from the player side, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. It is possible to entertain in a good state and suppress a decrease in interest, and there is no frame-like partition in the game area 5a in front view. In a feeling of opening may be a pachinko machine 1, can be assumed to be appealing is strongly attracted the attention of a player to improve the appearance of the game area 5a.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) is made by matching the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. Or a plurality of LEDs 2630) from the player side, making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who thought that 2610 did not exist and to surprise the player with light emission display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, since the front cover 2650 prevents the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from being seen from the player side, it is possible to prevent the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated by seeing the reflector 2620 and the like. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are not seen from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630, and thus the LED 2630. The display 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 is displayed in a light-emitting manner, so that the player can be greatly surprised by the light-emitting display that the player has not predicted, and the player 26 can enjoy the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614. It is possible to think that there is something good for the game, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image behind the front light guide plate 2610 is provided, a light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610, and an effect image by the effect display device 1600 Since it is possible to show the player a combined effect, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 It is possible to entertain the player by directing and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610, the distance to the effect display device 1600, Therefore, by displaying the effect image related to the plurality of patterns 2614 displayed and emitted on the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to add a sense of depth and a three-dimensional appearance to the displayed pattern 2614. An effect (display effect) that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the above-described embodiment, the reflective concave portion 2613 is shown as having a triangular cross section and extending uniformly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cross section is a semicircular arc and extending uniformly. May be a polygonal and constant extension, a curved cross-section and a constant extension, and the like.

  Further, the LED 2630 may be a single color or a full color. The number of the patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the number of the specific light incident portions, the reflective recesses, and the LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number of the patterns 2614.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. 137 is a front view of the game board showing the lower front center decorative body in the lower movable stage unit, and FIG. 138 shows the lower front central base body and the lower front center base body in the lower movable stage unit. FIG. 139 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state where the lower rear center decorative body is made to emit light, and FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the central decorative body, the lower rear central decorative body, the lower left side decorative body, and the lower right side decoration are illuminated. FIG. 140 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 139 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. Further, FIG. 141 shows the four rotating decorative bodies, the left side rotational decorative body, the left sub-side rotational decorative body, the right side rotational decorative body, and the right sub-side rotational decorative body in the lower movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration of no. FIG. 142 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the types (sizes) of arrows that are emitted and displayed in the lower movable effect unit.

  FIG. 143 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board shown with the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit lowered. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit.

  The rear unit 3000 has an effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the front unit 2000 and a first start port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first start port 2002 (see FIG. 153).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and has a box-like shape that is open at the front. The back unit 3010 includes a back box 3010 having a square opening on the rear wall where the effect display device 1600 faces forward. A lower movable effect unit 3100 attached to the lower part, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box 3010, and an upper part in the back box 3010 attached to the front of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200. The upper front movable production unit 3300 is provided.

[5-9-1. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. Lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part in back box 3010, and a part thereof is located in front of the lower part of effect display device 1600. The lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a lower front center decoration unit 3110 attached below the effect display device 1600 and near the front end of the back box 3010, and a lower center effect arranged behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110. The unit 3120 includes a lower left side effect unit 3150 and a lower right side effect unit 3170 which are respectively disposed on the left and right sides of the lower center effect unit 3120.

  The lower front center decorative unit 3110 includes a lower front central decorative body 3111 having a trapezoidal shape (an inverted isosceles triangle shape with a flat apex) constricted downward and having translucency. The lower front center decoration unit 3110 is located behind the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 in a state assembled to the game board 5. The lower front central decorative body 3111 can be decorated with light emission by the lower central decorative board of the lower central effect unit 3120.

  The lower center directing unit 3120 is attached to the lower central lifting base 3121 that can be moved up and down in the back box 3010 behind the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and the front of the lower central lifting base 3121 and is translucent. Lower rear decorative body 3122 having a lower central decorative board (shown in the figure) on which a plurality of LEDs arranged on the rear side of the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. And a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the lower central elevating base 3121.

  Although not shown, the lower center stage unit 3120 has a unit base attached to the back box 3010, a pair of elevating guides attached to the unit base and guiding the lower central elevating base vertically. A rod-like arm member that is rotatably attached to an axis whose base end extends back and forth on the unit base, a sliding pin that is attached to the distal end of the arm member and is inserted into a slit of the lower central lifting base 3121, and an arm member A lower center raising / lowering drive motor.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the lower center elevating base 3121 has a slit extending left and right, and a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted into the slit. The lower center elevating base 3121 is lowered by a lower center elevating drive motor between a lowered position that is entirely behind the lower front center ornament 3111 and an elevated position that is entirely above the lower front center ornament 3111. It is mounted so that it can be raised and lowered.

  The lower rear center decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle and has a plurality of light emitting areas 3122a arranged in the vertical direction. The lower back center decorative body 3122 can be decorated with light emission by the light emission of the LED of the lower center decorative substrate. The lower central decorative board is mounted so that a plurality of LEDs can independently illuminate the respective light emitting areas 3122a of the lower rear central decorative body 3122, and the lower central lifting base 3121 is raised. Sometimes, it is mounted so as to be able to irradiate light toward the lower front center decorative body 3111 which is lower and forward.

  Although not shown in detail, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 with a space in the left-right direction, and each has a plurality of mounting bases extending upward in a flat plate shape, A plurality of central rotary drive motors mounted on a plurality of mounting bases with the rotary shafts directed in the left-right direction, and attached to the rotary shafts of the respective central rotary drive motors. And a plurality of cube-shaped rotating decoration bodies 3126 covering the above. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 can be rotated around an axis extending in the left and right directions by a central rotation driving motor, and are arranged coaxially in the left and right directions. In addition, each rotating decorative body 3126 is formed with different decorative portions 3127 on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 141). The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 can be independently rotated by the respective central rotation driving motors.

  Although not shown in the figure, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the lower surface of the lower central elevating base 3121 below the rotary decorative bodies 3126, and a plurality of movable movable bodies 3126 can be irradiated with light. The lower center upper surface decoration board | substrate with which LED is mounted is provided. Each rotating decorative body 3126 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LED on the lower central upper surface decorative substrate.

  The lower left side production unit 3150 of the lower movable production unit 3100 is not shown in detail, but the flat plate-like lower piece portion extending horizontally, and the plate-like side extending upward from the left end of the lower piece portion. The front side of the unit base of the lower central stage unit 3120 has a side and a flat upper side extending from the upper end of the side to the upper side of the lower piece and extending to the right shorter than the lower piece. The left unit base mounted in the back box 3010 on the left side of the view, and the columnar guide with the lower end and the upper end mounted on the lower piece and the upper piece, respectively, near the right side of the side portion of the left unit base A rod-shaped male screw that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by a lower piece and an upper piece of the left unit base so as to extend in parallel with the shaft and the guide shaft, and has a male screw formed on the outer periphery. Members, Lower left side elevating base 3151 slidably attached to the guide shaft with a nut screwed to the screw member, and lower left side elevating drive attached to the left unit base and rotating the male screw member A motor and a lower left side decorative body 3152 which is attached to the front surface of the lower left side elevating base 3151 and has translucency, and are attached to the right side of the lower left side decorative body 3152 and light toward the left. And a lower left side decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating is mounted.

  The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3152a arranged in the vertical direction, and each of the light emitting areas is appropriately emitted by causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative board to emit light appropriately. The 3152a can be independently decorated with light emission.

  The lower left side production unit 3150 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper part of the lower left side lifting base 3151 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and has a slider having a slit extending in the front-rear direction, The lower left slide drive motor is attached to the rear side of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so that the rotary shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower left slide drive motor. And a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin that is slidably inserted into the slit of the slider on the distal end side extending in the horizontal direction from the proximal end side.

  Further, although the lower left side production unit 3150 is not shown in detail, the lower left side production unit 3150 is attached to the slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the rotation base is directed to the left and right in the mounting base. A left side rotation drive motor that is attached, and a cubic left side rotation decoration body 3153 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the left side rotation drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the left side rotation drive motor. The left side rotating decorative body 3153 has different decorative portions 3154 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 141). The left side rotating decorative body 3153 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a left side rotation driving motor.

  Further, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is not shown in detail, but is attached below the left side rotating decorative body 3153 on the upper surface of the slider and can emit light toward the left side rotating decorative body 3153. A lower left side upper surface decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided. By appropriately emitting the LED on the lower left side upper surface decorative board, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Further, the lower left side production unit 3150 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base and extends upward in the form of a flat plate, and the sub attachment base A left subside rotation drive motor attached to the rotation shaft of the left subside rotation drive motor and the left subside rotation drive motor that is mounted with the rotation shaft directed in the left-right direction, and a cubic left subside rotation that covers the outer periphery of the left subside rotation drive motor And a decorative body 3155. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 has different decorative portions 3156 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 141). The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a left sub-side rotation drive motor.

  Further, the lower left side production unit 3150 is not shown in detail, but is attached below the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base, and faces the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. And a lower left sub-side upper surface decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting the LED on the lower left sub-side upper surface decorative board.

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 is assembled to the game board 5, and the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 attached to the left unit base is at a height that allows the left side rotation decoration body 3153 to enter the lower part. The lower center elevating base 3121 of the center effect unit 3120 is disposed at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower center elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. Further, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a left side rotation ornament 3153 between the left sub rotation effect body 3126 and the leftmost rotation ornament 3126 of the lower center effect unit 3120 when the left sub-side effect decoration 3155 is assembled to the game board 5. There is a space that can enter.

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member with a lower left side elevating drive motor so that the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the lower center effect unit 3120 are moved together with the slider via the lower left side elevating base 3151. The lower central lift base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the lowered position and an elevated position having the same height as the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. In addition, the lower left side production unit 3150 rotates the cam member with the lower left slide drive motor, thereby bringing the left side rotation decoration body 3153 close to the lower center production unit 3120 and the adjacent appearance position via the slider. Further, it can be slid in the left-right direction between the lower center effect unit 3120 and a retreat position in which about half is located below the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155.

  The lower right side production unit 3170 of the lower movable production unit 3100 is not shown in detail, but the flat plate-like lower piece portion extending horizontally, and the plate-like side extending upward from the right end of the lower piece portion. The front side of the unit base of the lower center stage production unit 3120 has a flat upper side that extends from the upper end of the side and the side to the upper side of the lower piece and to the left shorter than the lower piece. The right unit base mounted in the back box 3010 on the right side of the view, and the columnar guide whose lower end and upper end are respectively attached to the lower piece and the upper piece near the left side of the side portion of the right unit base. A rod-shaped male screw that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by a lower piece and an upper piece of the right unit base so as to extend parallel to the shaft and the guide shaft, and has a male screw formed on the outer periphery. Members, Lower right side elevating base 3171 having a nut screwed to the screw member and slidably attached to the guide shaft, and lower right side elevating drive attached to the right unit base and rotating the male screw member A motor and a lower right side decorative body 3172 which is attached to the front surface of the lower right side elevating base 3171 and has translucency, and are attached to the right side of the lower right side decorative body 3172 and light toward the right. And a lower right side decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating is mounted.

  The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3172a arranged in the vertical direction, and each of the light emitting areas can be appropriately emitted by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative board. 3172a can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The lower right side production unit 3170 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper part of the lower right side lifting base 3171 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and has a slider extending in the front-rear direction. A lower right slide drive motor attached to the rear side of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so that the rotary shaft extends upward below the slider, and a base end side is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower right slide drive motor. And a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin that is slidably inserted into the slit of the slider on the distal end side extending in the horizontal direction from the proximal end side.

  Further, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the rotating base is directed to the mounting base in the left-right direction. A right-side rotation drive motor that is attached, and a cubic right-side rotation decoration body 3173 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the right-side rotation drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the right-side rotation drive motor. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 is formed with different decorative portions 3174 on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 141). Further, the right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a right side rotation driving motor.

  Although the lower right side effect unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is attached below the right side rotating decorative body 3173 on the upper surface of the slider and can irradiate light toward the right side rotating decorative body 3173. The lower right side upper surface decoration board | substrate with which several LED is mounted is provided. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED on the lower right side upper surface decorative board.

  Further, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base and extends upward in the form of a flat plate, and the sub attachment base Right subside rotation drive motor attached to the right subside rotation drive motor and the right subside rotation drive motor mounted with the rotation axis facing the left and right direction, and a cubic right subside rotation that covers the outer periphery of the right subside rotation drive motor And a decorative body 3175. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 has different decorative portions 3176 on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 141). Further, the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a right sub-side rotation drive motor.

  Further, although the lower right side effect unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is attached below the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base, and faces the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. And a lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right sub-side upper surface decorative board.

  When the lower right side effect unit 3170 is assembled to the game board 5, the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 attached to the right unit base is at a height that allows the right side rotating decorative body 3173 to enter the lower part. The lower center elevating base 3121 of the center effect unit 3120 is disposed at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower center elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. Further, the lower right side effect unit 3170 has a right side rotation ornament 3173 between the right sub side rotation ornament 3175 and the rightmost rotation ornament 3126 of the lower center effect unit 3120 when the right sub-side ornament 3175 is assembled to the game board 5. There is a space that can enter.

  The lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the male screw member with the lower right side elevating drive motor, whereby the right side rotating decoration body 3173 and the lower center effect unit 3120 are moved together with the slider via the lower right side elevating base 3171. The lower central lift base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the lowered position and an elevated position having the same height as the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. Also, the lower right side production unit 3170 rotates the cam member with the lower right slide drive motor, thereby bringing the right side rotation decoration body 3173 close to the lower center production unit 3120 and the adjacent appearance position via the slider. Further, it can be slid in the left-right direction between the lower center effect unit 3120 and a retreat position in which about half is located below the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175.

  As shown in FIG. 141, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a decorative portion 3127 of each of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, a decorative portion 3154 of the left side rotating decorative body 3153, a decorative portion 3156 of the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, Different decorations are formed on the decoration part 3174 of the side rotation decoration body 3173 and the decoration part 3176 of the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175, respectively. The four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 are each formed in a dice-shaped cube and extend left and right. Different decorations are formed on the first surface to the fourth surface around the rotation axis.

  In the state where the first surfaces of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 are directed to the front, It is “凰”, “First Eye”, “First Eye”, “Second Eye”, “Third Eye”, “Four Eye”, “First Eye”, “凰”. In the state where each second surface is directed to the front, “star”, “super”, “chi”, “ja”, “n”, “su”, “!”, And “star” are displayed from the left. In the state where the third surface is directed to the front, “!”, “凰” “ge” “ki” “a” “tsu” “凰” “!” Is displayed from the left. Furthermore, in the state where the fourth surface is directed to the front, “celebration”, “!”, “O”, “me”, “de”, “to”, “u” and “!” Are displayed from the left.

  In this way, the four rotational decoration bodies 3126, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 are respectively directed to the front with the same numbers. Thus, a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expected value that is “big hit” can be displayed according to the content of the message.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 142, the lower movable effect unit 3100 causes the lower front center decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light appropriately. “Arrows” of different sizes can be displayed in a luminous manner. Specifically, when only the lower front center decorative body 3111 is caused to emit light, a “small arrow” of a triangle with the apex of the isosceles triangle facing downward can be emitted and displayed (FIGS. 137 and 142 (a)). reference). Further, when the lower front center decorative body 3111 and the raised lower rear central decorative body 3122 are caused to emit light, a “middle arrow” facing downward with a bar extending upwardly larger than the “small arrow” is displayed in a light emitting manner. (See FIGS. 138 and 142 (b)). Further, in the state of “middle arrow”, the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 are raised, and the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right When all of the side decorative bodies 3172 are caused to emit light, a “large arrow” in which the upper end of the arrow that is directed downward and larger than the “middle arrow” spreads to the left and right can be displayed by light emission (FIGS. 139 and 142 (c)). See).

  In this way, three different sizes of arrows, “small arrow”, “middle arrow”, and “large arrow”, can be displayed in a light-emitting manner, so “big hit” in the order of “small arrow”, “middle arrow”, and “large arrow”. It is possible to display that the expected value of “is high”.

  Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 130 and the like, the lower movable effect unit 3100 is a lowered position in which the lower center elevating base 3121 is behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and cannot be seen from the front. The four rotating decorative bodies 3126 attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 are positioned so as to be in contact with the upper end of the lower front central decorative body 3111 in a front view.

  Further, in a normal state, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, the lower left side lifting base 3151 is located at a lowered position that is slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decorative unit 3110 and almost invisible from the front, The left side rotation decoration body 3153 is separated from the lower center stage production unit 3120 to the left via the slider, and a half of the rotation decoration body 3153 is positioned below the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155, and the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155 is a game. It is located in the vicinity of the lower left end of the region 5a from the center in the vertical direction.

  Further, in a normal state, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, the lower right side lifting base 3171 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and in a lowered position almost invisible from the front. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 is located at a retracted position where the right side rotating decorative body 3173 is separated from the lower central effect unit 3120 to the right via the slider, and about half of the right side rotating decorative body 3175 is below the right sub side rotating decorative body 3175. It is located near the lower right end of the region 5a from the center in the vertical direction.

  As one of the effects provided to the player in this normal state, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, for example. According to the lottery result, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of the respective rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing the front in each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 stopped to rotate To the player. Thereby, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops in a desired combination, and a movable effect by the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 can be enjoyed.

  When the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies a predetermined condition, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 attached to the lower central lift base 3121 by the lower central decorative board. Is emitted to decorate the lower front center decorative body 3111 of the lower front central decorative unit 3110 located in front.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 137, a downward arrow is emitted and displayed by the lower front center decorative body 3111. Therefore, the player's line of sight is displayed below the game area 5a by the emitted display of the downward arrow. The player can be directed to the production operation unit 301 arranged on the screen, can prompt the player to operate the production operation unit 301, and can easily participate in the player participation type production that operates the production operation unit 301. It is possible to make the player entertain the player participatory type effect and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Or, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B from the normal state to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lower central lifting base 3121 is changed. Raise from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front-view game area 5a so as to block part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. The player can be surprised and the player can think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. After that, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of the respective rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portion 3127 facing forward in each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 that has stopped rotating is given to the player. Make it visible. As a result, when the four rotating decorations 3126 stop rotating in a desired combination with respect to the player, “big hit” (an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage (sometimes described as “big hit gaming state”). The result is a lottery and thrilling player depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops in a desired combination, and the player has a sense of expectation for the lottery result. Can be raised. Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies a predetermined condition, a plurality of lower central decorative boards attached to the lower central lifting base 3121 rising. The LED is caused to emit light, and the lower rear center decorative body 3122 disposed in front and the lower front central decorative body 3111 disposed forward and downward are illuminated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, a large downward arrow is emitted and displayed by the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111. The player's line of sight can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 disposed below the game area 5a to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301. By operating it, it can be thought that it will be a “big hit”, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 to entertain the player participation type effect.

  Furthermore, the lower center elevating base 3121 is selected according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B from the normal state to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Is raised from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front-view game area 5a so as to block part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. The player can be surprised and the player can think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. Subsequently, the left and right left side rotating decoration bodies 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body 3173 are slid to the appearance position on the center side, respectively, and then the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 are respectively moved. Raise to the raised position (see FIG. 139). As a result, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 are aligned in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the game by making it seem that the lottery result is a “hit”. Then, after rotating the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175, the rotation is stopped and the left A decoration part 3156 of the sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, a decoration part 3154 of the left-side rotation decoration body 3153, a decoration part 3127 of each of the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, a decoration part 3174 of the right-side rotation decoration body 3173, and a right sub-side rotation decoration The player visually recognizes the combination of the decorative portion 3176 of the body 3175. At this time, since the plurality of decoration portions 3127 include a decoration portion 3127 that is decorated with numbers, the countdown is performed by stopping the rotation so that the number decoration portions 3127 face forward. As a result of the countdown effect, it is possible to make the player think that the lottery result must be a “hit” and to enhance the interest in the game. Then, when the rotation of the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 is stopped and the countdown ends, The lower front center ornament 3111, the lower rear center ornament 3122, the lower left side ornament 3152, and the lower right side ornament 3172 are illuminated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 139, since a larger downward arrow (giant arrow) is displayed in a flashing manner, the player operates the effect operation unit 301 arranged at the end of the giant arrow. Therefore, it can be convinced that the lottery result is “big hit”, and the player can be surely operated on the production operation unit 301. When this huge arrow is displayed in a flashing manner, a message explaining the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 is raised, and the effect operation unit 301 is rotated. The operation unit 302 is rotated at a high speed (see FIG. 140). Thereby, since the rotation operation part 302 rotates at high speed, the player's interest can be enhanced, so that the press operation part 303 can be surely pressed, and the player is entertained and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  As an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. 140, the effect display device 1600 displays the characters “Rotation of the lower button is hot!”, Causing the player to pay attention to the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation operation. The faster the rotation speed of the section 302, the higher the expected value for “big hit” is to inform the player. That is, the expected value is represented by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302, and an effect image informing the player of the expected value is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 140, as an effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a lower front center ornament 3111, a lower rear center ornament 3122, and a lower left side ornament as shown in FIG. An effect image suggesting an operation method of the effect operation unit 301 in which the player's operation is prompted by an “arrow” emitted and displayed by the body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, and the like may be displayed. Specifically, effect images such as “Press the button!”, “Turn the dial!”, “Turn the dial left!”, “Turn the dial right!”, Etc. are displayed. Thereby, operation in the production | presentation operation part 301 can be performed exactly, and the player participatory production which operates the production | generation operation part 301 can be enjoyed reliably.

  Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an expected value that is a “hit” by the effect image may be displayed. Using the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175, each formed in a dice shape, You may make it display.

  As an indication of an expected value using four rotating decoration bodies 3126, a left side rotation decoration body 3153, a left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, a right side rotation decoration body 3173, and a right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 each formed in a dice shape Performs an effect of displaying an expected value that is a “big hit” by a combination of the decoration part 3127, the decoration part 3154, the decoration part 3156, the decoration part 3174, and the decoration part 3176 that face the front by the respective rotations and stops. . Specifically, when only the four rotating decoration bodies 3126 of the lower center stage production unit 3120 at the center are used, for example, there are the following three patterns. The pattern a1 displays an expected value in a state in which the combination of the decorative portions 3127 that face each other when the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating is a combination that cannot be read by the player. No pattern. The pattern a2 has a high expected value to some extent when each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops rotating with the second surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is “CHI” “A” “N” “SU”. Pattern showing that. The pattern a3 has a very high expectation value when each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops rotating with the third surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is “ge” “ki” “a” “tsu”. Pattern showing that. As described above, the expected value can be displayed by the pattern displayed by stopping the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, and the expected value increases in the order of the pattern a1, the pattern a2, and the pattern a3.

  Furthermore, as the effects using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left subside rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right subside rotating decorative body 3175 ( Eight (8) dice-shaped rotating bodies are used to produce an effect of displaying an expected value that will be a “big hit” by combining the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176. You may make it do. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. In the pattern b1, the combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176 that have stopped rotating is a combination (no display of an expected value). In the pattern b2, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left-side rotating ornament 3153 is “!” Or “凰”, and the four center rotating ornaments 3126 are “Chi”, “ャ”, “「 ”. “S”, right side rotation decoration 3173 is “!” Or “凰”, and right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 is “凰” or “star” (chance display). In the pattern b3, the left sub-side rotation decoration 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left-side rotation decoration 3153 is “!” Or “凰”, and the four center rotation decorations 3126 are “ge”, “ki”, “ A) “tsu”, right side rotation decoration 3173 is “!” Or “凰”, and right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 is “組合 せ” or “star” (gekiatsu display). In the pattern b4, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left-side rotating ornament 3153 is “super”, and the four center rotating ornaments 3126 are “chi”, “ja”, “n”, “su”. ”, A combination of“! ”For the right side rotational ornament 3173 and“ 凰 ”or“ star ”for the right sub side rotational ornament 3175 (super chance display). In the pattern b5, the left sub-side rotational ornament 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left-side rotational ornament 3153 is “super”, and the four central rotational ornaments 3126 are “ge”, “ki”, “a”, “tsu”. ”, The right side rotational ornament 3173 is“! ”, And the right sub-side rotational ornament 3175 is a combination of“ 凰 ”or“ star ”(super-gequity display). In the pattern b6, the left sub-side rotational decoration 3155 is “celebration”, the left-side rotational decoration 3153 is “!”, The four central rotational decorations 3126 are “o”, “me”, “de”, “to”, and the right side. A combination in which the rotational decoration body 3173 is “U” and the right sub-side rotational decoration body 3175 is “!!” (“big hit” is determined). In this way, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 are displayed by stopping the rotation of the eight rotation bodies. The expected value can be displayed by the pattern, and the expected value increases in the order of the pattern b1, the pattern b2, the pattern b3, the pattern b4, the pattern b5, and the pattern b6.

  In the above-described effect, if the player does not operate the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, the above-described effect of displaying the expected value is not performed. The “arrow” light-emitting display also turns off. On the other hand, if the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is urged, the effect of displaying the above-described expected value using the remaining effect time is continued. When the production time ends, the above-described production is finished and the light emission display of “arrow” is also turned off, and the production is finished.

  As described above, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when a game state is changed by playing a game in the game area 5a in a normal state (a game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004). (Depending on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery selected by receiving B), the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front central decorative body 3111 rotate or the lower center Four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged side by side by the lifting base 3121 rise together with the lower rear central decorative body 3122, four rotating decorative bodies 3126 raised by the lower central lifting base 3121 rotate, Lower left slide drive motor of side effect unit 3150, lower right slide drive motor of lower right side effect unit 3170, etc. (slide The pair of left side rotation decoration body 3153 and right side rotation decoration body 3173 slide in the left-right direction, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173 rotate, the slide mechanism and the lower left side. The four rotating decoration bodies 3126, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 in which the left side rotation decoration body 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173 are raised by the lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171. The left and right sub-side rotating decorative bodies 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 rotate and the like can be shown to the player so that the player can see the central movable unit 3125 (four Rotating decorative body 3126), left side rotating decorative body 3153 and right side rotation Decorative body 3173, and it is possible to focus on the left Sabusaido rotary decoration member 3155 and the right Sabusaido rotating decorative body 3175 and the like, it is possible to entertain the movable effects by them.

  Further, when the lower center elevating base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower rear center ornament 3122 emits light and the lower front center ornament 3111 emits light to display a downward arrow, or lower center elevating By raising the base 3121 and causing the plurality of LEDs on the lower central decorative board to emit light from the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111, a large downward arrow is displayed by light emission, or a pair of lower left side up and down Since the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 are raised and the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. It is possible to entertain the player by directing, and the downward light is displayed. Arrow makes it possible to guide the viewpoint of the player's downward staging operation unit 301, it is possible to prompt the operation of the staging operation unit 301 to the player. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, or the press operation unit 303 is pressed, so that the player participates in the player participation type effect. And can entertain.

  Accordingly, since various movable effects, light-emitting effects, and player participation effects as described above can be performed, various combinations of effects can be provided to the player by combining them appropriately. Since it can make the player hard to get bored and make it difficult for the player to predict the production pattern, the player can be surprised by the unexpected production. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  As described above, the lower front center decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, etc. When prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 provides an effect image that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 301, an effect image that explains the operation of the effect operation unit 301, or an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage By displaying an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of the event and the effect operation unit 301, etc., it is possible to strongly encourage the player to participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. The production operation unit 301 can be made easy to operate, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

[5-9-2. Upper rear movable production unit]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145 and the like. Upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the upper part of back box 3010 above effect display device 1600. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 includes an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner in the back box 3010, and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner in the back box 3010.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable production unit 3200 is not shown in detail, but is slidable in an oblique direction from the upper left to the lower right on the left base 3211 attached to the back box 3010 and the left base 3211. The left slider 3212 attached, the linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with the rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction, the upper rear A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the left drive motor 3214 and connected to the input side of the rotating shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214, and a spur gear-like drive gear 3215 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 The spur gear meshed with the drive gear 3215 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211 The first transmission gear 3216, the second transmission gear 3217, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 3216 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211, and the second transmission gear 3217. A third transmission gear 3218 that is rotatably attached to the left base 3211, and a spur gear pinion gear 3219 that meshes with the third transmission gear 3218 and the rack gear 3213 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211. And.

  Further, the upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and is attached to the rear side of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the flat upper rear left decorative body 3220 extending left and right. And an upper rear left decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear left decorative substrate to emit light.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 can raise and lower the upper rear left decorative body 3220 via the rack gear 3213 by driving the upper rear left drive motor 3214.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the right base 3231 mounted in the back box 3010 and slidable to the right base 3231 in an oblique direction from upper right to lower left. The right slider 3232, the linear rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232, the upper rear right drive motor 3234 attached to the right base 3231 with the rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction, and the upper rear right A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3234 and connected to the input side of the rotating shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234; a spur gear-like drive gear 3235 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250; A spur gear meshed with the drive gear 3235 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231 The first transmission gear 3236, the spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3237 that is meshed with the first transmission gear 3236 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231, and the second transmission gear 3237. A third transmission gear 3238 that is rotatably attached to the right base 3231 and a spur gear-like pinion gear 3239 that meshes with the third transmission gear 3238 and the rack gear 3233 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231. And.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and is attached to the rear side of the upper rear right decorative body 3240 and the flat upper rear right decorative body 3240 extending left and right. And an upper rear right decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear right decorative board to emit light.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 can raise and lower the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the rack gear 3233 by driving the upper rear right drive motor 3234.

  The clutch mechanism 3250 has a cylindrical storage case 3251 and a plurality of protrusions 3252a extending radially near the inner surface of the storage case 3251 in the storage case 3251, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper An input member 3252 to which the rotation shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and a plurality of transmission grooves 3253a inserted in the housing case 3251 with the protrusions 3252a of the input member 3252 having a gap in the circumferential direction, A plurality of cam surfaces 3253b formed so as to be narrower from the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 projecting from the housing case 3251. An output member 325 having an output shaft 3253c to which is attached A plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between the plurality of cam surfaces 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251; a tightening spring 3255 for tightening the housing case 3251 from the outside; a housing case 3251; The main body housing 3256 attached to the left base 3211 or the right base 3231 and the housing concave portion 3256a of the main body housing 3256 are closed, and the output of the output member 3253 is provided. A lid member 3257 through which the shaft 3253c passes, and a bearing 3258 attached to the lid member 3257 and through which the output shaft 3253c is inserted are provided (see FIGS. 145 (a) to (c)).

  In the clutch mechanism 3250, when the input member 3252 is rotated by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the plurality of protrusions 3252a of the input member 3252 are positioned at the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253. The output member 3253 rotates in contact with the output member 3253, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 rotates. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 as it is.

  Further, when the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 moves in the direction of the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Therefore, the space between the cam surface 3253b and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 is narrowed, and the roller 3254 is caught between them. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, the rotation of the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side is caused by the upper rear via the input member 3252. There is no transmission to the left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if a force for moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 or the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward acts due to gravity, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 to be driven via the output member 3253. Since the rotation is locked, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward arbitrarily, and a load is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234. Instead, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary position.

  In the clutch mechanism 3250 of this embodiment, the housing case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by a tightening spring 3255 made of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied to the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 via the output shaft 3253c becomes larger than a predetermined value, the tightening force (biasing force) of the tightening spring 3255 is increased. ), The circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 abuts on the protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated with a strong force from the output side, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and cannot be unlocked, or the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 are damaged. Can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts two rollers 3254 between the protrusions 3252 a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253 b, and two rollers 3254. Each may be urged by the lock spring 3260 toward the projecting portion 3252a close thereto. Thus, when a force is applied to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved to the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251. The rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from when the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side is applied to when the lock is applied can be inserted between the inner surface and the inner surface. It can be reduced as much as possible.

  Next, an effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is normally positioned behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300 above the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is in a state invisible from the player side. In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are not driven. However, as described above, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 The rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253 by the clutch mechanism 3250 interposed between the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward without permission.

  Accordingly, in order to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving downward, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward. It is not necessary to provide an electrical lock mechanism for preventing the movement, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. Further, since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving without permission due to the presence of the clutch mechanism 3250, the game board 5 is being transported or attached to the island facility of the game hall. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 remain in the original state at the time of shipment even when vibration or acceleration is applied, and unnecessary origin adjustment is not necessary. It is possible to reduce the labor involved in installing the game board 5 and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  In this normal state, depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved obliquely downward toward the center via the clutch mechanism 3250, respectively. And the left end of the upper rear right decorative body 3240 come into contact with each other to form one large decorative body (see FIG. 143). As a result, a large decorative body extending left and right appears in the upper front portion of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Thus, according to the upper rear movable rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the decorative body 3240 and the decorative body 3240), vibrations from the rendering operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies that can be operated by the player, the left slider 3212, the right slider 3232, and the upper part Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate because the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are about to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the output The roller 3254 is moved to the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the member 3253. As a result, the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the upper side from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and upper rear right decorative body 3240 side). Since transmission of rotation to the rear left drive motor 3214 side and upper rear right drive motor 3234 side is interrupted and rotation of the output member 3253 is locked, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are arbitrarily lowered. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from unexpectedly moving (falling) via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, and the upper The rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 cause untrustworthiness to the player due to unintended movement. The can be avoided, it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest to delight movement of the upper left rear decorative body 3220 and the upper right rear decorative body 3240 to the player.

  In addition, as described above, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250 even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side are about to be lowered. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position via the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are various. A variety of performance patterns that stop moving up and down at the position can be shown to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with the movable effects of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 even if the upper rear left decorative body 3240 is stopped. The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and early damage to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload can be prevented, and the upper It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by avoiding interruption of the game due to breakage of the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. be able to.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 145 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively moved by lock springs 3260. When urging to the projecting portion 3252a side close to each, when a force is applied to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately applied. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the lock is applied after the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 until this can be reduced as much as possible. Thus, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without being jerky. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and enjoys the movable performance by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved downward to bring the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 into contact with each other. Since the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body, the combined appearance of a large decorative body can have a strong impact on the player, making the player enjoyable And the appearance of a large decorative body can make it seem that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit game”) that would be advantageous to the player may occur, and expectation of the game A feeling can be raised and the fall of interest can be suppressed. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other and joined together, the upper upper right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side is moved by contacting each other. However, since each has the clutch mechanism 3250, the force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (from the output side to rotate). Force 3), the roller 3254 is engaged between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 to lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving due to contact between the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3240. The decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 can also be prevented from returning, and the player can surely entertain a movable effect in which the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 come together. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. 3253 is rotated, and the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, so that the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force for rotating the housing case 3251 is applied via the plurality of rollers 3254, a force (torque) for rotating the housing case 3251 is a frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. Is larger between the housing case 3251 and the clamping spring 3255. Rigashoji, the accommodating case 3251 is able to rotate. Then, by rotating the housing case 3251, the output member 3253 rotates through the plurality of rollers 3254, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253 abuts on the protruding portion 3252 a of the input member 3252, The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated with a strong force from the output side, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and cannot be unlocked, or the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 are damaged. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized.

[5-9-3. Upper front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. Upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part of back box 3010 above the effect display device 1600 in a front view. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the upper part of the back box 3010, a horizontally long unit base 3301, an upper front drive motor 3302 attached to the unit base 3301, and a unit base 3301 that can be moved up and down. And an upper front movable decorative body 3350 which is moved up and down by driving of the upper front drive motor 3302.

  The upper front movable decorative body 3350 is arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 and a circular central decorative body 3351 that is attached to be vertically movable (downward) in the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction. A pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a and a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a are connected to each other, and are attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A first projecting decorative body 3352 having a connecting rod 3352b, a pair of second projecting decorative parts 3353a disposed on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, and a pair of second projecting decorative parts 3353a are coupled to each other. The second projecting decorative body 3352 is coaxially connected to the first connecting rod 3352b and is attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A second projecting decorative body 3353 having a Yuibo 3353B, and a.

  The first protruding decorative body 3352 is formed in an isosceles triangular shape in which a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a protrudes long with the central decorative body 3351 side as a base. In the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is disposed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the left side. Further, the first projecting decorative body 3352 has a link attachment portion 3352c to which the distal end of a right second link bar 3304, which will be described later, is rotatably attached to the distal end of the right first projecting decorative portion 3352a.

  The second protruding decorative body 3353 is formed in an isosceles triangular shape in which a pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a protrudes long with the central decorative body 3351 side as a base. In the pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353a, the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 is disposed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the right side. Further, the second projecting decorative body 3353 has a link mounting portion 3353c to which the tip of a left second link rod 3304, which will be described later, is rotatably attached to the tip of the left second projecting decorative portion 3353a.

  In the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353 are formed in the same shape and the same size. Yes. The upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a left second protruding decorative portion 3353a behind the left first protruding decorative portion 3352a and a right first protruding decorative portion 3352a behind the right second protruding decorative portion 3353a. It is located and the 1st protrusion decoration body 3352 and the 2nd protrusion decoration body 3353 are comprised so that it may overlap in the front-back direction.

  Further, although not shown, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a plurality of LEDs on the front surface on the rear side of the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a, respectively. Are mounted on the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board, the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first protruding decorative parts 3352a, and the pair of The second projecting decorative portion 3353a can be independently decorated with light emission.

  Further, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a symmetrical position with the center in the left-right direction on the front side, and outward in the left-right direction. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in a rod shape, and attached to the respective distal ends of the pair of first link rods 3303 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and the distal end side projecting first A pair of second link rods 3304 attached to the link attachment portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link attachment portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative body 3353 so as to be rotatable around the respective axes, and the front surface of the unit base 3301 An upper stopper 3305 that protrudes forward from the first link bar 3303 and restricts upward rotation of the first link bar 3303 on the front end side, and the front end of the first link bar 3303 It includes a lower stopper 3306, a for regulating the rotational downward.

  Next, an effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 has the upper front movable decorative body 3350 raised as shown in FIG. 130 and the like, and the central decorative body 3351 is located near the upper left and right direction of the game area 5a. In addition, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 147 (a)). In this normal state, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are overlapped with each other in the front-rear direction, so that the player can recognize that it is one decorative body. In a normal state, the pair of first link bars 3303 are in contact with the upper stopper 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip side moves upward is prevented.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. As a result, the central decorative body 3351 moves downward together with the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353. At this time, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 move downward while remaining in a horizontally extended state. When the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward, the right second link rod 3304 attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the right first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the left side The left second link rod 3304 attached to the link attachment portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative portion 3353a moves downward, and a pair of second link rods 3304 are attached to the respective tips. The first link rod 3303 rotates so that the tip side moves downward.

  Then, when the pair of first link rods 3303 rotating with the downward movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 (central decorative body 3351) come into contact with the lower stopper 3306, further rotation is prevented. A state is reached (see FIG. 147 (b)). When the central decorative body 3351 further moves downward after the pair of first link bars 3303 abut against the lower stopper 3306, the right first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the left second protruding decorative portion 3353a are Since the downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are located at the center of the first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b (see FIG. The first projecting decorative part 3352a and the second projecting decorative part 3353a on the opposite side to the side on which the second link bar 3304 is attached rotate about the center) of the central decorative body 3351. (See FIG. 147 (c)). As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 rotate so that the scissors open around the central decorative body 3351, respectively. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enlarged, and the player can be surprised and a decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

  As described above, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 overlap each other in the front-rear direction. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first projecting decorative part 3352a and second projecting decorative part 3353a are rotated and opened so that the distal ends are separated from each other, The player who has been recognized as one decorative body can be surprised, and the movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enjoyed.

  Further, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are moved to the central decorative body 3351 simply by moving the upper front movable decorative body 3350 downward by the action of the first link bar 3303 and the second link bar 3304. Since the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be rotated and rotated in directions opposite to each other, there is no need to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353.

[6. Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 13 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The overall configuration will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 148 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 149 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 150 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 151 is a XX line in FIG. 152 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a transparent cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and main control that controls the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of presentation based on commands from main control board 1310 of unit 1300, peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control board 1510 A liquid crystal output board 1530 that is electrically connected to the peripheral board, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a metal shield plate 1540 that can reduce (suppress) electromagnetic wave noise entering the liquid crystal output board 1530; A conductive material that is attached (adhered) to a predetermined portion of a metal shield plate 1540 A sexual member 1545 includes a transparent base member 1502 for closing the opening of the cover member 1501, a. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position together with a metal shield board 1540, whereby the shield board 1540 is provided. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) including the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is configured by being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510, in various boards attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and is arranged on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed in the upper right portion of the cover body 1501 because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape in the remaining one-third area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

  The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Connected.

  The cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, is transparently molded, and covers the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) when viewed from the front. Side walls 1501b to 1501e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding toward the rear (front side of the pachinko machine 1).

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached to the air cooling fan FAN at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, which is slightly in the center and the upper right side when viewed from the front. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa have predetermined cylindrical shapes inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air-cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aa1 to 1501aab4 each having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. In addition, by forming the arc-shaped slit hole 1501aaa, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of illegally taking out various electronic components and the like included in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air cooling fan FAN is installed by being pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal-headed pan head screw (not shown) having a shape in which the pan head and the flat washer are integrated is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer that is the seat portion of the pan head screw with the seat comes into contact with the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In the present embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  Note that the cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance distance shorter than the distance from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along its lower side when viewed from the front, and the positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are 1 The connector recess 1501ac is formed as two closed, substantially oblong rectangular regions (to be precise, a convex region with the volume adjustment switch 1510d and the connector CN1 as the upper part and the connectors CN2 to CN7 as the lower part) of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). Yes. Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. For this reason, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 are formed to protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, And the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are exposed. At this time, when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height becomes lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted on the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac by the protruding wall called the cover flat plate 1501a, the plug is hidden. The cover flat plate 1501a cannot protrude from the surface. The volume adjustment switch 1510d is lower than the heights of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, some metallic powder or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it adheres to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d. Can be prevented.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a closed horizontally long rectangular region at a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side when viewed from the front. The connector recess 1501ad is opened at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, respectively. . At this time, when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height becomes lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, even if plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted on the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac by the protruding wall called the cover flat plate 1501a, the plug is hidden. The cover flat plate 1501a cannot protrude from the surface. Thereby, even if dust adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallicity, or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN8 and CN9. It is like that.

  Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for attaching the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead opening 1501ae and can block the wiring lead opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a short distance compared to the distance from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503 at a predetermined height of a columnar shape inserted through the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). And a mounting hole 1501afb1 at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring lead opening 1501ae is closed, and a plurality of wirings (to transmit drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover for protecting the wiring from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of non-conductive resin and is molded transparently.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed which protrude in the upper and lower sides at predetermined intervals in the center in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side wall 1501c. At the same time, there are formed a hinge hook 1501cc arranged above the guide 1501ca and projecting outward, and a hinge hook 1501cd arranged below the guide 1501cb and projecting outward. Chamfering is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having circular shapes are formed on the back side of the substrate 1510, respectively, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively peripheral control boards. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line 1510.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A through hole 1540c2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is aligned with a mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange as follows. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed as the through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 and the L-shape of the shield plate 1540. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to match the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. The mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are respectively contacted. In addition to being in contact, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Further, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan-screw are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shaft (screw part) of the metal pan-screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Accordingly, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal shield plate is obtained. 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. .

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwed into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, solder copper foil (so-called “land”) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520; Solder copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are respectively A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It arrange | positions so that it may match with the attachment boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the land 1520rf4 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 are respectively abutted. It will be in contact. Further, the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the seat surface of the metal pan-screw are in contact with each other. Further, the metal pan head screw shaft (screw portion) is screwed into mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 becomes the peripheral data. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. Become.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged on the inner side of the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surfaces on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface of the peripheral control board 1510 to be fixed is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions so as to protrude diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the liquid crystal output Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having circular shapes are formed on the back side of the substrate 1530, respectively, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively liquid crystal output substrates. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line 1530.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It arrange | positions so that it may match with boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. In addition, the lands 1530 rb 1 to 1530 rb 4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seat surface of the metal pan-screw are brought into contact with each other. Further, the metal pan head screw shaft (screw portion) is screwed into mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Accordingly, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1520. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. .

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 and screwed into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Is arranged on the inner side of the side end face (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is fixed to the back side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

  Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a, whereby the shield board 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the peripheral control IC 1510a and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the gap having the predetermined distance dimension described above is fixed. (In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the peripheral control is performed by ejecting the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 A gap is formed, and a gap is formed in the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. Further, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are provided. A gap is formed. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. In addition to taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the described ventilation hole 1501az, the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven formed on the cover body 1501) Gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, a volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and a gap formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 Two connectors CN8 with And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  Each of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa plus the area (total area) is the area in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501; The volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the gaps and the peripheral control board 1510 formed in the gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501). And the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the gap formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover body 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. A plurality of air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 are formed in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in through the ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept small.

[6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is transparently formed, and is formed on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular base plate 1502a when viewed from the front. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding toward the front (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Thus, in a state where the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are placed inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e. Will be in a state of being inscribed (surface contact).

  The base flat plate 1502a is wired to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined interval along the lower side when viewed from the front. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed in the vertical direction to prevent the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped by a force when inserting a connector for connection, and to be disconnected. The force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 at the position where it does not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the force when operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the peripheral control board 15 Electrical wiring pattern formed on the zero elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa4 in the lateral direction to prevent the breakage is formed.

  Further, the base flat plate 1502a is on the right side when viewed from the front thereof, and at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540 described later. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab that is longer than the back surface of the ground piece 1540d and that is long in the vertical direction is formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engagement portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left base side wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are described above. L-shaped flange portions 1501 cca and 1501 cda of hinged portions 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. In addition, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It can be engaged.

  In addition, a base side sealing portion 1502ea protruding outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 at the center of the right base side wall 1502e. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are respectively formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right base side wall 1502e.

[6-3. Shield plate]
A metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield as viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment) on the upper left side center and lower left side center lower side of the flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Are formed respectively.

  Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, on the upper right side and lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, respectively, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) Between the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, an L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (25 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment) is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached to (attached to) the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

  The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa and the wiring lead concave portion 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is formed. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a, and The wiring lead recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane, The L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 are formed so that the back surface of the shield plate 1540a and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are parallel to each other. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension from the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  In the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2, through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 protrudes from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is one attachment boss hole of a pair of attachment boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed in the above manner. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501am1 protrudes from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is one mounting boss hole of the formed pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  In the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 extend from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. These are two mounting boss holes out of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed to protrude.

  Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a, whereby the shield board 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height (the present embodiment) between the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In the embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

  These two spaces are distance dimensions of a first predetermined height between the front surfaces of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (In this embodiment, a second space between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 151) having a thickness of 12 mm) and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 151) having a distance of a predetermined height (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b described later, SDRAM 1510c described later, real-time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e described later, power supply generation circuit not shown, Resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, LEDs ML1 to ML4 to be described later, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 to be described later), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, etc. (peripheral data ROM 1520a to be described later, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, A special connector SCN3 (to be described later) and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 (resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN4 to be described later) are accommodated. The second space 1505b, various electronic parts and the like is not at all accommodated. This is because various electronic components that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. This is because heat generated from various electronic components in the first space 1505a by not containing the etc. is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise.

  The shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 is provided with vent holes 1540az having the same shape at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular vent holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, similarly to the ventilation holes 1501az. Yes. When the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. Thus, air is taken in from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 via the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[6-4. Conductive elastic member]
A conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and a conductive covering portion 1545a; It is comprised from the foam 1545b which has a rectangular shape as a core material coat | covered with the electroconductive coating | coated part 1545a, and the electroconductive adhesive tape 1545c stuck on the electroconductive coating | coated part 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of the foam 1545b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be listed. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive cover 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

  The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape with a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a rectangular shape with a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

[6-5. Various connectors]
The peripheral control board 1510 attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / Os. Peripheral control IC 1510a in which an O interface or the like is integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of the game presentation (demonstration performed while waiting for the player) and the progress of the presentation Various control information (peripheral data) stored in the control ROM 1510b for preliminarily storing various schedule data to be defined and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be transferred and stored. Supply power to the SDRAM 1510c composed of DRAMs (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume control switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is cut off. Backup power supply 1510e, a power generation circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The peripheral control IC 1510a, the ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510. The IC pin interval is reduced, and various connectors CN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 are provided. ~ CN7, pin spacing of special connectors SCN1, SCN2 is narrowed, the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased, the distance between connectors CN1 to CN7 is narrowed, and the distance between connector CN7 and special connector SCN2 is also narrowed ing.

  The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbits.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os, various parallel I / Os, and the like. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

  In the present embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side. In some cases, SPI communication or I2C communication is employed as a communication method for transmitting control data (communication via a corresponding connector among connector CN3, connector CN6, and connector CN7).

  In the present embodiment, for example, an electrical drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in the lower movable effect unit 3100 using SPI communication or I2C communication, and communicates via the connector CN6 or the connector CN7. And an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operation ring drive motor 342 and an operation button lift drive motor 367 provided in the rendering operation unit 300), which communicate with each other via the connector CN3. Drive data is transmitted to the drive control IC for driving, and various sensors (eg, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300) provided on the game board 5 side ), And communicates via the connector CN6) as detection data. Received or various sensors provided to the door frame 3 side (e.g., a variety of sensor provided in the staging operation unit 300, communicating via a connector CN3.) And receives a signal from the detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / Os, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of the control target and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or control signals for the control target (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are output from the GPIO (connector CN6). Or a signal is output from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. In this embodiment, GPIO is used so as to function as serial communication. For example, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), a clock signal is generated from GPIO, and data is output bit by bit from GPIO based on this clock signal. Serial data can be created. By using such GPIO to function as serial communication, for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side in predetermined interrupt processing (for example, interrupt processing generated every 16 milliseconds (ms)) The light emission data can be output as a plurality of game board-side serial systems and a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN6) provided on the door frame 3 side. Light emission data can be transmitted by a plurality of door frame side serial systems.

  In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is allocated to the connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are allocated to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is allocated as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to connector CN6 (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to connector CN7. Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The data can be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Random Access Memory) and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the board, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board. The liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board.

  Peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from special connector SCN2 using a plurality of types of video signals. As the plurality of types of video signal systems, for example, there are a plurality of types such as the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) system, the eDP (Embedded Display Port) system, and the clockless system. In this case, four systems (four systems in total) are employed, one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system and second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. Peripheral control board adopting eDP method, for example, instead of MIPI method, 1 system for RGB system, 2 systems for LVDS system (first LVDS system, 2nd LVDS system), and 1 system for eDP system 1510 can also be created.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. LEDML1 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 5V is being supplied. LEDML2 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 12V is supplied. LEDML3 is for confirming (monitoring) a state in which DC + 35V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state in which DC + 35V is supplied. LEDML4 is for confirming (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a, whereby the shield board 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surfaces of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space, so that two spaces are formed. As described above, the two spaces have a first predetermined height between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 151) having a distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) and the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. 2 and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 151) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height of 2 (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

  As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic parts provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic parts provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 being lit.

  Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 included in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are completely different. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the vertical direction with respect to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. When the sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are fitted, there is no amount of movement in the vertical direction when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are viewed from the front.

  Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively. Special connector SCN3 provided on peripheral data ROM board 1520 and special connector SCN4 provided on liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets.

  The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, so that the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1 and the front side) when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. It is a structure provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range in the direction of Note that the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even when the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not contact the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, a gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into and inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front (the direction between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). It has a structure provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward). The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the board 1510) is moved as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the special front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is not contacted with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of connector SCN4 and the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a peripheral data ROM 1520a capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Various control information (peripheral data) includes image data such as background images, character images, and design images for rendering various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game board 5 The drive data etc. for drive-controlling the various movable production bodies with which it is provided can be mentioned.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, is cheaper than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, by adopting the NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the cost can be reduced and the power consumption can be suppressed, and various stored data can be read out at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a need to be accurately and reliably transmitted from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

  Although the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after being pushed in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Thus, a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction generated when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510. Prevent damage to the surroundings The transmission path between the substrate and the control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during the operation, the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket are prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is established. It can be reliably formed.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to progress the effect (for example, for the player). An image that tells you that an advantageous big hit gaming state will occur compared to the normal state, an image that tells you that no big hit gaming state will occur, and a state where a big hit gaming state will occur compared to the normal state, although no big hit gaming state will occur This is an important substrate for drawing an image or the like indicating that it is approaching as an image. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not used without adopting a configuration in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which 1510 is electrically connected to the inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

  Although the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after being pushed in, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is pushed. Peripheral control board to prevent damage The transmission path between the substrate 510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at the time, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket are prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is reliably established. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the front surface. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced as compared with the case where the three-dimensional arrangement is performed, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body is operated on the game board 5). Electric drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) It can contribute to ensuring the order in the depth direction of the distance dimension.

[6-6. Peripheral control unit assembly method]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is replaced with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss is formed so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Placed to match hole 1501ah2, made of metal A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Accordingly, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 have an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is The cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are sandwiched.

  Subsequently, since the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, they are directly or finely adjusted. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield board 1540 is covered. The body 1501 and various substrates are sandwiched and fixed.

  Thus, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restraining movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the cover flat plate 1501a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, the peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restriction is applied to the peripheral control substrate 1510. When fixing to the back surface side of 1501a, absorption is performed by the respective dimensional tolerances in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Can be done.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are The base body 1502 is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are attached to the base body. Inserted into U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502 cae and 1502 caf of hinge receiving portions 1502 cac and 1502 cad formed in the engaging portion 1502 ca of 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is wrapped around so that the opening side of the cover body 1501 is covered, and the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. In the state of covering the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Metal one-way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 by entering. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a sealed state.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and inscribed (surface contact). Further, in the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is protruded from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d is projected from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) extending to the back surface is 6.8 mm.

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 has to be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by observing the opening and closing traces, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and deterring power against illegal actions on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been increased.

  Subsequently, the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN are drawn from the wiring lead recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. From the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the rear, respectively, a lead screw with a metal seat (not shown) having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated is screwed into the drawer and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2.

  Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out openings 1501ae formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered with the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  Subsequently, the peel sheet of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is formed on the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) 1545 adhesive tape 1545c.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to an attachment portion formed on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box that is inserted into a mounting groove that constitutes a mounting portion formed in the outer peripheral control unit 1500 and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It fixes by screwing in toward the attachment hole which comprises the attachment part formed in the back surface side.

  As described above, the effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A frame-shaped metal frame accommodates a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of itself, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. Are connected to the same ground (GND). When peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to a mounting portion formed on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box of production display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit ground piece of metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back side of base body 1502 1540d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and contacts the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545 as shown in FIG. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed and crushed in the height direction (in this embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby causing a dimensional deviation due to a dimensional tolerance or an assembly error. Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are in an electrically and reliably connected state, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 Since it can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to be the same ground (GND), an environment strong against electromagnetic noise is constructed for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. Can do.

  In the assembly method described above, in the procedure for attaching various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the through-hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, The through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through-hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to match the formed mounting boss hole 1501ag4, and the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Of the metal shield plate 1540 A through hole 1540b2a formed in shape attachment pieces 1540B2, arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover body when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side). And the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 The peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the predetermined position described above. It can also be fixed to the left side.) Even in such a procedure for attaching various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, it is possible to absorb the error in the front-and-rear direction caused by the pushing-in, so that the plug and socket It is possible to prevent breakage of a plurality of connection terminals formed on the substrate, and to reliably form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, and to connect the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards attached to the pachinko machines having different game specifications. In this embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common without depending on the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game board game specification. The peripheral data corresponding to is stored as a board that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (recycled). Further, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 including a peripheral data ROM 1520a in which peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and a peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described board-to-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily exchanged according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems that are input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types of systems are electrically connected by the above-described inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced in accordance with the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is used as the video signal system input to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the liquid crystal output board 1530 matched to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the inter-board connector described above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are configured by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and a peripheral control board is provided in the internal space of the cover body 1501. Various substrates such as 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. Then, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Connected. For this reason, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is used as a circuit ground via the metal shield plate 1540, and the ground of various boards (GND) and the ground of the power supply board 630. (GND), and can be removed from the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 (b) by guiding it to the ground of the island facility of the game hall. Thereby, it is not necessary to provide each type of substrate (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can do.

  Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming whether or not there is fraud.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 150, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the peripheral control board. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b included in the 1510, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number) In other words, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are confirmed from multi-directional angles. So that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. It is. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. . Further, the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 5V from the power supply substrate 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, so that the direct current + 5V is supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of being controlled, it also has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, the area is larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , Connector pin count, IC Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are silk-printed on each. The contents are distributed so as to be a large area where the contents can be substantially confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Accordingly, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 35V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special data SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, the surface data of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the IC pin state is improved, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are respectively silk-printed. And improving the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 special connectors provided in SCN3 obtaining.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. And an area larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. The contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the 1530 are respectively distributed and arranged. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in the lighting state when the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN4 on the special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Improved visibility of the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improved visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are part numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1, respectively. The state of the IC pins of 1510c2 and the contents (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And the state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that they can be confirmed from multi-directional angles. Has been placed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. Can do. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state in a state where the direct current + 12V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620. The surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) is originally provided with a function of confirming (monitoring) a state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but also having a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM 1510c. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the blades of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades and the blades when the inspector rotates the blades of the air cooling fan FAN). The product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the periphery control IC 1510a.

  In the present embodiment, as LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a surface mount type and a wide angle of about 120 degrees are employed, and a type with weak directivity is employed. It is also suitable for lighting applications. Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a, whereby the shield board 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surfaces of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space, so that two spaces are formed. As described above, the two spaces have a first predetermined height between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 151) having a distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) and the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. 2 and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 151) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height of 2 (1.6 mm in this embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic parts provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic parts provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be illuminated brightly by turning on the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 that is also suitable for use as illumination.

  Further, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has gloss, and the area on the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 that faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. And the surroundings also have a function as a reflection part that can reflect the light emitted from the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and direct the light toward the peripheral control board 1510 again. You may comprise so that the coloring paint which has glossiness may be further apply | coated to these reflection parts.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5, and the payout unit 560 is disposed on the side of the game board 5. Therefore, the game balls are rubbed against each other in the ball path constituted by these to be charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities in the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are formed by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and are formed in the internal space of the cover body 1501. Further, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to the predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. In this case, a configuration is adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates to form a circuit ground. In the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. The structure which makes it the same ground (GND) by electrically connecting with the (GND) line was adopted.

  Accordingly, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Electromagnetic noise that has entered from the body 1502 is grounded via a metal shield plate 1540 as a circuit ground, and the ground (GND) and power supply of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 The ground (GND) of the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base The electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the body 1502 can be removed through the metal shield plate 1540 as a circuit ground called a circuit ground from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 near the game board 5, and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear unit 3000 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010), the special connector SCN1 and the peripheral data ROM board provided in the peripheral control board 1510 The board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided in 1520, and the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are disposed near the center of the ball tank 552. So that it can be placed away from the tank rail 553. You have me. As described above, the tank rail 553 can drop the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. By disposing the inter-connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the inter-board connector described above.

  Further, the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The inter-board connector is a state in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). As shown in FIG. 150, since the arrangement can be long in the vertical direction, the area to which dust, some metallic powder, etc. adhere can be minimized. In addition, when the above-mentioned board-to-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, some metallic powder, etc. adheres will be extremely increased. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is formed by a protruding wall called a cover flat plate 1501a. Even if plugs corresponding to CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The dust adhering to the surface, some metallic powder, etc. are covered with the cover side wall 1501. It is dropped from, so that it can be prevented from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. In this way, the direction in which the above-described inter-board connector is disposed, and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are disposed so that dust, powder having some metallicity, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electrical terminal, Is selected.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there is a gaming machine equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc., an effect control board mounted with a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images, and the like. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems inputted to the display device. For this reason, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify the production control board in accordance with the video signal input to the display device, and it is difficult to reduce the cost of the production control board. there were.

  Conventionally, a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc., an effect control board (effect control means) on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted, etc. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-116667 (FIG. 2)) is proposed. By the way, the game balls supplied to the gaming machine from the island equipment of the gaming hall are charged with static electricity by the game balls rubbing each other when circulating between the island equipment and the gaming machine of the gaming hall. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 can control a game operation (game progress). Peripheral control board 1510 is capable of controlling the progress of performance based on various commands from main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that can control the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that can control the release of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182. Yes.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the main control board 1310 that can control the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs such as a main control program for controlling gaming operations, various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various sensors Input main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, power failure at a predetermined voltage Or, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring the sign of instantaneous power failure and the main control MPU 1310a And a, a RAM clear switch 1310f for completely erasing information stored in has been has RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hardware”) that updates a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. "Random number circuit"). The main random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 to 65535 as a minimum value is set in advance as a minimum value), and generates an initial value. A predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit configuration is such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the hard random number circuit with built-in main control first sets a clock signal (main control) to the main control MPU 1310a with an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at a high speed on the basis of a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, and within a predetermined numerical range. Once all the values in are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value in the predetermined numerical range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining the big hit It is supposed to be set as.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the main control system reset, the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information is provided, and a main control output circuit without a reset function without a reset function without a reset terminal, It is composed of The main control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with a reset function is a signal based on the information by resetting the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that does not output at all from its various output terminals. In contrast, the main control output circuit without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without a reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is not reset. The circuit is configured to be output from the various output terminals.

  First start port sensor 3002 (first start port sensor main side 3002a and first start port sensor slave side 3002b described above) that detects game ball B received in first start port 2002, second start port 2004 A second start port sensor 2511 for detecting the game ball B received in the game, a general winning port sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, and a gate for detecting the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003. The sensor 2301, the first big prize opening sensor 2512 that detects the game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005, and the second big prize opening sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second big prize opening 2006. , And a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. Is input to the input terminal of a given input port of 10a.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, so that the main control solenoid with reset function outputs the main control solenoid. By outputting a control signal to the drive circuit 1310d, a drive signal is output to the start port solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid 2516, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal to the control output circuit, the status display of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display, the normal hold indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special hold from the main control output circuit with reset function Number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special reserved number indicator, De display, or outputs the drive signal to equal.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, so that the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with reset function. Main control output circuit with reset function by outputting various information about the game (game information) to the main, or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function To output a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002 (the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b), the second start port sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, and the first grand prize. The mouth sensor 2512 and the second large prize opening sensor 2513 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas the general prize opening sensor 3001 has a contact type ON / OFF operation type. A mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2511. And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, and the gate sensor 2301.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters. Further, the detection of the game ball B by the first big prize opening sensor 2512 and the second big prize opening sensor 2513 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches having high durability and long life are also used for the first grand prize opening sensor 2512 and the second big prize opening sensor 2513. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls B do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function, so that the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data. When the payout control board 633 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Also, the main control MPU 11310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the effect (main payout ACK signal). A signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with a reset function to the payout control board 633.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit having no reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without a reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.) BC0 (see FIG. 155, etc.) is provided. With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and triggered by this, is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. Yes. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without the reset function, and is output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without the reset function.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC + 12V and DC + 35V from the power supply board 630, and monitors these DC + 12V and DC + 35V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure of DC + 12V and DC + 35V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning, and the power failure warning signal is output from a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to the input terminal, the main control board 1310 (output via the main control output circuit 1310c), and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110 Is input. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Note that the power failure warning signal may be input to a board or the like on which the door frame 3 is mounted.

  In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case of monitoring the generated voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
In addition to the payout control of the game ball B, the payout control board 633 for performing the launch control and the ball transport control of the game ball B performs the discharge control by the payout control unit 633a for performing various controls relating to payout and the launch solenoid 542. , A launch control unit 633b that performs ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145, an error LED display 633c that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error that is displayed on the error LED display 633c An error release switch 633d.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 153, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, as well as the power-on process executed when the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 633aa which is a microprocessor incorporating various processing programs including a payout control program for controlling a payout operation of game media, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control input circuit 633ab to which a detection signal from the sensor is input, a payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 A payout motor drive circuit 633ad.

  The payout control MPU 633aa has its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), and its operation ( A watchdog timer for monitoring the system) (hereinafter referred to as “WDT with built-in payout control”) and a function for preventing fraud are also incorporated.

  The payout control input circuit 633ab does not have a reset function because a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to the various input terminals is not provided. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured so that the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

  The payout control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, a payout control output circuit without a reset function without a reset function without a reset terminal, and It is composed of The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit with a reset function is a signal based on information obtained by resetting the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the payout control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that does not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit without the reset function is such that the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is not reset. The circuit is configured to be output from the various output terminals.

  A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing detection of the dispensing device 580 A detection signal from the sensor 591 and a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The detection signal from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are a payout control input circuit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab.

  Various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received by the serial data method at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Further, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  When the payout control MPU 633aa completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit with a reset function.

  Also, the payout control MPU 633aa sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function as serial data, thereby providing a payout control output without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The payout control MPU 633aa is driven from the payout control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with a reset function. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, and the status of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display 633c. By outputting a drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the error LED display 633c.

  The error LED display 633d is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 633d include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 633 is notified, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570, and when the number “2” is displayed, it indicates that it is “ball gummy” (specifically Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the game ball B mesh with each other, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589, and the number “3” is displayed. When the "counting switch (Specifically, a failure has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number “5” is displayed, “retry” “Error” (specifically, that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” ( Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the game ball B in which the lower tray 202 is stored is informed that the game ball B is full), and when the number “7” is displayed, “CR” "Not connected" (indicating that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1), and the number "9" When displayed Informs that it is “in stock (award ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number) Yes.

  Also, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out as a prize ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with a reset function, thereby outputting the payout control with a reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls is output from the output circuit to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown).

  Also, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls B and various information (game information, error contents related to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1). The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 and the hall computer. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and can control the main control board 1310 that can advance the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, the payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 that can be controlled and the peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the production, so that malfunction or failure does not occur. The hall computer grasps the number of game balls B actually paid out by the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, so that the payout information of the game ball B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 (so-called so-called , Pitching information) and the player's game.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. . The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is sent from the payout control MPU 633aaa through a CR unit input / output circuit (not shown). The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the lending operation unit 220.

  Note that various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. As described above, the power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 has the capacitor BC0 (FIG. See). With this capacitor BC0, the payout control MPU 633aa can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Various types of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control input circuit when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab, and triggered by this, the payout control MPU 633aa is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b is based on a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and the clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing reference A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 and the player's will. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of effects based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I / Os. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which an interface and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b that stores in advance various programs and various schedule data that define the progress of production, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are stored. SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data), a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and a real And backup power source 1510e which can also supply power during power failure to the time clock IC, and includes a power supply generating circuit (not shown) to create various supply voltages, and peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the. Various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports, various parallel I / O ports, and the like.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 when the power is turned on (including when power is restored from a power failure). Control to transfer. Since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer rate of 2 Gbps as described above, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Transferred at high speed. As the control information (peripheral data), as described above, image data such as background images, character images, and design images for rendering various effect images on the effect display device 1600, the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Light emission data for defining light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, light extinction, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and games This is drive data for driving and controlling various movable effects provided in the board 5.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with processing or delete the information. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system, it reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred from the main control board 1310 to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands, and proceeds with the production. .

  Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads and reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands. In accordance with the schedule data, various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is read, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600. Various effects are advanced by performing control so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates drawing data for reading the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and drawing the image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, control to output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is performed. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state where it can accept screen data that defines the screen configuration, it outputs a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 or the like by reading out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and generating and outputting them based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow. When a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, Audio signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) are output to 464 and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass frame 4 By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and reads the read schedule data. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is read out from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and various serial I From the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2, game board side drive data for transmitting from the / O port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is provided. Read and play from various serial I / O ports Doors for transmitting drive signals and drive solenoids to each drive board, and for outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lift drive motor 367 provided on the door frame 3. Door-side drive light emission composed of side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted from the various serial I / O ports to the door frame 3 side.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting positions in the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, and the upper front movable production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control. The signals are received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the circuit. In addition, the detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the rendering operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 are input to the peripheral control. The signals are received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the circuit. Further, signals from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power generation circuit (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 includes a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC + 12V) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. Kinds are made and supplied.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether its own system is running away.

[8. Ground wire system]
As described above, the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 is capable of collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (earthing) the island facilities in the game hall. Here, a system of ground wires by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a configuration of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 154 (a) is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 154 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 154 (d) is a table showing the explanation of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground substrate 559. As shown in FIG. 154 (a), the frame ground substrate 559 has a mounting surface facing downward (that is, a state where the connector insertion ports of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are directed downward). It is housed and attached inside a substrate housing portion 551aa formed on the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (b), the frame ground substrate 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, ECN2 arranged in a line along the upper side from the right side to the left side, and the center of the left side. A lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. The earth terminals ECN1 to ECN5 will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 154 (d), the earth terminal ECN1 is an earth provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected via the ground connection terminal and the island facility ground wire in the island facility of the game hall as the island facility ground. The earth terminal ECN3 is illustrated as a sphere tank ground on the sphere tank 552 shown in FIG. 102B (specifically, on the outside of the side wall of the sphere tank 552 near the substrate housing portion 551aa). One end of the ball tank ground wire is attached by a metal screw that is not The other end of the ground wire is electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 serves as a body frame metal ground, which is a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. One end of the main body frame metal ground wire is attached to a metal screw (not shown) on the upper side of the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 (specifically, the other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected). The ground terminal ECN5 is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal provided on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG.

  In the circuit of the frame ground substrate 559, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 serves as a power source ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are each electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. In addition, the other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 as a power source ground, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

  The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire, and is removed. The electromagnetic wave noise that flows to the terminal ECN3 is guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 and island facility ground wire as the island facility ground and is removed, and then flows to the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground. The electromagnetic wave noise is guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire, and is removed. The electromagnetic noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power source ground is removed from the island facility. The game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the ground and the island equipment ground wire It is adapted to be removed is guided to the ground of the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island equipment of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are ground in the island facility of the game hall or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 to be charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game ball B can stay are attached.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the discharge unit 560 where static electricity is likely to accumulate, and the ball tank 552 which is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise as a result of the static electricity being easily accumulated. In the frame ground substrate 559, the ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground, and the body frame metal are disposed in the vicinity of the unit 560 and the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4. The earth terminal ECN4 as ground is gradually attenuated by passing electromagnetic noise through the resistors ER1 and ER2, respectively, to suppress high voltage instantaneous discharge, and the island equipment from the earth terminal ECN2 as island equipment ground It can be led to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground wire.In other words, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 or the dispensing unit 560 that is likely to accumulate static electricity from the frame ground substrate 559 via the ball tank 552 or the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 as a frame ground called a frame ground. By guiding to the ground of the island facility of the game hall, electromagnetic noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be removed by flowing to the ground of the island facility of the game hall.

  On the other hand, when electromagnetic noise enters the metal shield plate 1540 accommodated in the peripheral control board box 1505 shown in FIG. 148, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 Intrudes into the ground (GND) line, flows into the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630, and goes from the ground connection terminal of the power supply board 630 to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground on the frame ground board 559 through the power supply ground line. The earth terminal ECN2 serving as the island facility ground is led to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the island facility ground wire and removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base The electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the body 1502 is guided as a circuit ground called a circuit ground from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the metal shield plate 1540, thereby covering the peripheral control unit 1500. The electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from 1501 and the base body 1502 can be removed by flowing to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall.

  In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are regions that are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise as described above. The ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground is used for the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the frame ground board 559 as described above. Large grounding terminals are used because they are guided to the ground of the island facility and removed. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 adopting these large-sized ground terminals are squares having a cross-sectional shape of 1.14 mm on a side, rated current: 7 A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 18), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and has a height of 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height is 18.6 mm).

  On the other hand, electromagnetic noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is smaller than the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 described above, and the current is small. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are small-sized ground terminals. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 adopting this small-sized ground terminal are squares having a cross section of 0.64 mm on a side, rated current: 3 A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 22), rated voltage: 250V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and has a general specification of 7 mm as shown in FIG. 154 (a) (ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5) When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm).

  In the present embodiment, each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank ground wire, main body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Compared to each ground wire (interface ground wire, power ground wire), the current caused by electromagnetic noise is large, so each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 The thickness of the ground wire (main body frame ground wire) is larger than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1, ECN5. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559 is 1.6 mm as shown in FIG.

  As described above, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in each place is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall from the frame ground substrate 559, it can be removed. The substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination action.

  In addition, since the electromagnetic noise generated at various places is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall from the frame ground substrate 559, it can be removed. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 arranged on the upper side is routed to the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and electromagnetic noise is temporarily collected on the power supply board 630 to collect the island facilities of the game hall. Compared to the configuration in which the lead wire is guided to the ground and removed, the ground wire (wiring) can be routed extremely easily.

  Further, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 can be arranged in the substrate housing portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in a state of being close to each other, a plurality of electric wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 are provided. Terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, 10 external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side when the payout base unit 550 is viewed from the back) are provided. ) And a hall computer provided in the game hall, respectively, by wiring, an earth terminal ECN2 as an island equipment ground in the frame ground board 559, and an earth connection terminal provided in the island equipment of the game hall Can be performed as a series of operations by electrically connecting the island equipment ground wires (wiring). Because, it is possible to contribute to improvement in workability.

  In addition, since the frame ground substrate 559 can be disposed in the substrate accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 and the island facility of the game hall are provided. Various control boards (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game, and the effects) provided in the game board 5 with the island equipment earth wires (wiring) for electrically connecting the earth connection terminals provided. The peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the peripheral control board, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, etc. Adverse effects on electronic components (including connectors) and the like included in the device can be eliminated.

  In addition, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the main body frame 4 is close to the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly influenced by electromagnetic noise. The main body frame base unit 500 is made of a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530, and the frame ground substrate 559 has a ground terminal ECN3 as a sphere tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground. The length of the electrically connected ground wire (ball tank ground wire, body frame metal ground wire) is made extremely short, and electromagnetic wave noise is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. Can do.

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the ball tank 552 which tends to accumulate static electricity and the frame ground substrate 559 exhibiting a static eliminating action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is the length of the main body frame metal ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the frame ground substrate 559 exhibiting a static elimination action, and the power source. The length of the power supply ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits a discharging action, and the interface that electrically connects the interface substrate 635 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits a discharging action. It can be configured to be the shortest in comparison with the length of the ground wire (wiring).

  In addition, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the main body frame 4 is close to the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly influenced by electromagnetic noise. The main body frame base unit 500 includes a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530, and a frame ground substrate 559 includes a ground terminal ECN3 as a sphere tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground. Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground substrate 559, so that the operation of the power supply substrate 630 is not affected, and the island facility from the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 Lead to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the ground wire and remove it. Can.

  Incidentally, as disclosed in the prior art, each ground is once aggregated on the power supply board disposed on the CR unit side at the bottom of the main body frame so that the power supply AC24V of the CR unit can be easily supplied. A gaming machine that is connected to the ground of an island facility and grounded has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 84, FIG. 85)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often arranged below in gaming machines. Therefore, in order to consolidate the ground in the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank or the prize ball device or the like of the gaming machine toward the lower power supply board. By drawing the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic wave noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing on the way, which may have an unexpected effect. Also, since the ground wires are concentrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs in the power supply board, it may affect the ground, or conversely, current may flow through the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, when the grounding point of the island facility is above the gaming machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to connect the grounding wires gathered by the power supply board from the lower side to the upper side again.

[9. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 155 is a circuit diagram for explaining an outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 156 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 157 is a view taken along arrow B in FIG. 156, and FIG. FIG. 159 is a silk print of an electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (No. 2), and FIG. 160 is an electronic component for which production is discontinued. It is a perspective view explaining the outline | summary. Here, the circuit configuration of the power supply board will be described first, followed by a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape, fuse fusing confirmation, capacitor capacity, and measures for discontinuing manufacturing electronic components.

  As described above, the island facility of the game hall has a transformer (not shown), which reduces the AC 100V commercial power supply voltage to the AC 24V gaming machine power supply voltage. When a power cord plug (not shown) is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is a power supply voltage for gaming machines in an island facility of the game hall, AC24V is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power board 630 creates various power sources (various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc.) from the AC 24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies them from the power board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. doing.

[9-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 155, the circuit of the power supply board 630 includes a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

  AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). When AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm). (The support terminals at both ends are made of metal) and are input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a through the B-type fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. Specifically, the line 24 of AC24V (hereinafter referred to as “AC24V1” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “L side”)) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a. An AC 24V line 2 (hereinafter referred to as “AC24V2” (hereinafter also referred to as “N side”)) is input to the input side terminal 1 of 630a. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

  When a staff member such as a game hall clerk operates the power switch 630a to turn on, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically connected to each other, and AC24V1 is transferred to various circuits of the power supply board 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically conductive, and the supply of AC24V2 is started to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a game hall clerk operates the power switch 630a to turn OFF, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 become electrically non-conductive, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. While the supply is cut off, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically non-conductive, and the supply of AC24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. Thereby, the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by the OFF operation of the power switch 630a.

  In the state where the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is turned on, a staff member such as a game hall clerk operates the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. There are cases where the power is turned on all at once, and there are cases where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off simultaneously by turning off the breakers of the game hall.

[9-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against common mode noise, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against normal mode noise, and a choke coil L1, and is output from the power switch 630a. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

  The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC includes capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. Capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

  One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. Electrically connected. One end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is connected via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the earth connection terminal DCN5 as the frame ground FG2. The ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 154 via a power supply ground line (not shown).

  The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC includes a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in the AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

  One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. One end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a.

  The AC24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 through the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24VA. The AC24V2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 through the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC and also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24V. . The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise disturbance. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the CR unit that is not connected, and AC24VA and AC24V are supplied to the CR unit (not shown).

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[9-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q1 and Q2, and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and Zener diodes.

  The AC24V1 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, respectively.

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified to DC by switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2 2 and output respectively. The package types of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type, and are fixed to the radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 156). ing. The heat dissipating fins HS1 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  As described above, AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6 in addition to the rectifier circuit 630c, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. Are respectively input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  The rectified direct currents respectively output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d through the choke coil L2.

[9-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q3 and Q4 and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and inductors.

  The direct current from which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and directly to the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without going through the peripheral circuit 630da. Respectively. A gate signal for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit is input to the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

  The direct current from which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 is controlled by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to suppress the generation of higher harmonics, the power factor is improved, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. Are output respectively. Note that the package types of the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the package types of the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above). It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 156). The radiating fins HS2 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[9-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The plurality of electrolytic capacitors have their negative terminals grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, respectively, and their positive terminals are input with direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smooths) the pulsating current from the direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, and the fuse FUSE3 (this embodiment) In the form, it is the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, through a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals on both ends are made of metal), B-type fusing stipulated by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law) Then, DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. The power supply line supplied via the fuse FUSE3 becomes the + 35V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-5. Power generation circuit]
When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply generation circuit 630f generates direct current + 12V and direct current + 5V from the input direct current. The power generation circuit 630f outputs the generated DC + 12V from the + 12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board in the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the generated DC + 5V from the + 5V terminal to output the generated DC + 5V from the power supply board 630. 1 is supplied to each substrate inside. The power supply line supplied from the + 12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f becomes the + 12V power supply line of each board in the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is + 5V of each board in the pachinko machine 1. Power line.

  The power generation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da in the power factor correction circuit 630d by performing control to output the power factor correction gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. To suppress the generation of harmonics.

  In the power generation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via the diodes D5 and D6. The power generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal and determines whether or not to output a power destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power destruction circuit 630g.

  The power cord plug (not shown) is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall, and accidentally plugged into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V, the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than DC + 35V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  The power generation circuit 630f has a predetermined value (threshold value: this embodiment) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. In this case, the power supply breakdown circuit gate signal can be output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g.

  When the power generation circuit 630f outputs a power destruction circuit gate signal to the power destruction circuit 630g, the power destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters a short mode. When the power supply breakdown circuit 630g is in the short mode, when the power switch 630a is in the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply breakdown circuit 630g. By flowing into the CGND terminal of the creating circuit 630f all at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

  The GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 to which the GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is grounded becomes the ground (GND) line of each substrate in the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-6. Power destruction circuit]
The power supply breakdown circuit 630g includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as “FET”) Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 that is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal.

  When the power destruction circuit gate signal is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 is activated and the source terminal is connected to the source terminal of the FET Q5. When a large current flows toward (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become an overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, thereby maintaining a short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive. Is done. The FET Q5 is the same package type (TO-220F described above) as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. , Q2, Q3, Q4, unlike Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, they are arranged at positions where they are not in contact with the radiation fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is disposed while the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 are disposed, and is not fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 156 and 157). The purpose of this is to absorb and cool the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 through heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2 so that they are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, the FET Q5 is short due to heat generation when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent). This is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

  In other words, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24 V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24 V, the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. When inserted, the power supply generation circuit 630f has a predetermined value (threshold value) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. : In this embodiment, it is set to about 50 V.), the power supply breakdown circuit gate signal is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g to control the FET Q5 to self-destruct. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conducted is maintained, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. In the ON operation state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FET Q5 which is in the short mode state in the power supply breakdown circuit 630g. By flowing into the CGND terminal all at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted, so that only the power supply board 630 is destroyed and the plug of the power supply cord is commercial. A which is power supply voltage Even inserted incorrectly into a power outlet of 100 V, so that the can be reliably prevented that the pachinko machine 1 within each substrate except the power substrate 630 is broken.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall, and is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. In the state where the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is destroyed, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are replaced with ones that are not blown, and the power cord plug is AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the game hall island facility. Even if it is inserted into the power outlet, the FET Q5 of the power destruction circuit 630g is already destroyed and the short mode is maintained, so that the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c And power supply destruction circuit 630g When a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f through the FET Q5 in the short mode state, a large current flows through the replaced fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 or Both will melt again. In other words, if the power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is not replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has not been destroyed, the plug of the power supply cord is connected to the island facility in the game hall. Even if it is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines, the game cannot be started.

[9-1-7. Backup power circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes a Schottky barrier diode D20 and a capacitor BC0. The Schottky barrier diode D20 has a low forward voltage drop and a high switching speed. The anode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is connected to the capacitor BC0. It is electrically connected to the plus (+) terminal. The minus (−) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). A main power supply line serving as a backup power supply line from the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0 to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. This is a circuit in which a wiring pattern for taking out VBB and a payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 153 is formed. Yes.

  That is, the minus (−) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). Main VBB that serves as a backup power supply line to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 from between the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the payout control The payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the substrate 633 has a circuit divided into two systems: a payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the + 5V power line) is a Schottky barrier diode D20. To the capacitor BC0 to charge the capacitor BC0, and supply the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310 as the main VBB to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM. The payout control board 633a of the payout control board 633 provides the payout control MPU 633aa with the payout control built-in RAM and stores various information stored in the payout control internal RAM.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (including when the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off all at once by turning off the breakers in the game hall), or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Then, the direct current + 5V from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. In response, capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, while the Schottky barrier diode D20 prevents the supply to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM by being supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is held, and supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as payout VBB. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held.

  In other words, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off all at once by turning off the breakers of the game hall), or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Then, even if the direct current + 5V from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0, the capacitor BC0 discharges to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided is held and stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as payout VBB. Various information is stored.

[9-2. Method for identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 include the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETs Q3 and Q4 of the power factor correction circuit 630d and the Schottky. The barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FETQ5 of the power supply breakdown circuit 630g have the same package type (TO-220F), and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 have the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, long Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal).

  FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different types of electronic components, but FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic components that are not destroyed, and the FETQ5 is the only electronic component that is destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the only electronic components among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 that are mounted on the power supply substrate 630 and have the same shape. In order to make it easy to identify the components, the silk print printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has a different characteristic from the others.

  Specifically, for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, which are electronic components that are not destroyed, as shown in FIG. Lines and white thick lines indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged are printed as silk prints on the silk print TSLK1 to 4 on the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10, and on the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4. TSLK5-8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The white thick line is the side fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 156, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 need to be disposed adjacent to each other in order to fix them to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. It is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so that the white outline silk print on which the HS2 is arranged and the white thick line portions of the silk prints TSLK1 to 8 are connected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), for the FETQ5 which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, a white outline and a plurality of white oblique lines arranged at equal intervals in the outline are shown. Silk printing TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630, with ad1 and a white thick line indicating the direction in which the electronic component is arranged as silk printing. That is, the white diagonal line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 have the same shape, the silk print printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 By visually observing the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern among TSLK1 to 9, which electronic component among different types of electronic components having the same shape is compared with other electronic components. The electronic component can be identified. Thereby, it is possible to very easily identify which electronic component is the only electronic component that is destroyed among different types of electronic components having the same shape.

  In addition, when a person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the FETQ5 to a staff such as a game hall clerk by telephone, the silk-printed TSLK9 having the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern is displayed. By instructing to search, the staff of the game hall clerk and the like can accurately grasp the position of the FETQ5, so that the person in charge of the service center and the staff of the game hall clerk and the like can easily communicate with each other. Become.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the FETQ5 to the staff such as the game hall clerk by telephone, In addition, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630, it is possible to identify the FET Q5 to be noted. Therefore, the notable FET Q5 among the plurality of electronic components can be identified from the other electronic components FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different electronic components as described above, whereas the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a kind of electronic component, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage is AC 100V higher than the AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. Is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of the power supply, as described above, the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed and the short mode is maintained, and a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 Blows out. In other words, as a trace that the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, one or both of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are destroyed. Yes. Therefore, in this embodiment, printing is performed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so that the electronic components to be destroyed among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 can be easily identified as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630. The silk printing that has different characteristics from others is adopted.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not destroyed even if the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, is white. Are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing.

  On the other hand, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are destroyed as traces when the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, are shown in FIG. 159 (b). In this way, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solid white are printed as silk, and the silk prints FSLK2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. That is, the white area solid ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are soldered to a power supply board 630, a support fitting (not shown) is soldered to the power supply board 630. The area ad2 can be visually observed, and the area ad2 which is a solid white area corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is transparent inside the white outline. It can be surely seen through a transparent glass tube.

  As described above, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, the white color expressed as a characteristic pattern among the silk prints FSLK1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. By visually observing the solid-coated area ad2, it is possible to identify which electronic component of the same type of electronic component having the same shape is an electronic component to be watched as compared with other electronic components. It has become. As a result, among the same types of electronic components having the same shape, it is very easy to determine which electronic component is an electronic component that shows a trace that the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage. Can be specified.

  In addition, when the person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 points the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 over the phone to a staff member of a game hall clerk or the like, a solid white area shown as a characteristic pattern By instructing to search for silk-printed FSLK2,3 with ad2, the staff of the game hall can accurately grasp the position of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, so the person in charge at the service center and the game hall This makes it easier to communicate with staff such as store staff.

  As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 points the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 over the telephone to the staff of the game hall, etc., the staff of the game hall, for example, As described above, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to be noted can be specified. Therefore, of the plurality of electronic components, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to be noted can be identified from the fuse FUSE3 which is another electronic component.

[9-3. Fuse blow check]
Next, fusing confirmation of the same type of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals at both ends are made of metal). When the fuses are blown, the fuse wires accommodated in the transparent glass tubes are disconnected, and the transparent glass tubes Soot adheres to the inside. Among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, as described above, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show the trace that the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage. If the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, it will melt. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the silk prints FSLK 2 and 3 described above are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk prints for the fuses FUSE 1 and FUSE 2 so that the state of the fused fuse line can be easily confirmed. As described above, the silk-printed FSLK2, 3 corresponds to a transparent glass tube except for both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, because the white area solidly ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. The presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse wires accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be easily confirmed by visually observing the solid white area ad2 through the transparent glass tube.

  Thereby, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall or an operator who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) plugs the power cord for supplying the power voltage to the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply voltage for the game machine is AC24V. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630 by mistakenly inserting it into an AC100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, instead of the power outlet of the power supply, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 Among them, the fuse wire accommodated in one or both of the transparent glass tubes breaks, and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Even if the plug is inserted into a power outlet, it cannot be turned on, so it may be an initial failure. Wiring errors), it is so that it can not (can not excuse) to cheat.

  On the other hand, as described above, silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing for the fuse FUSE3. In the present embodiment, green is used as the resist for the power supply substrate 630. In the present embodiment, a green resist is solidly applied to the region of the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the silk print FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. In the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, no wiring pattern is laid out (that is, the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid this area, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is because the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is visually observed through the transparent glass tube, so that the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3. The visibility of this state can be improved and the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse wire can be confirmed.

  As described above, the power line connector DCN2 of the power board 630 is connected to the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1 and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 has a function as a means for supplying power to a CR unit (not shown) in addition to a function as a means for relaying various signals. The interface board 635 has a fuse FUSE (not shown) (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), B-type fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). The silk printing shown in FIG. 159 (a) for the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 is printed on the mounting surface. The area of the mounting surface of the interface board 635 corresponding to silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solidly coated with green resist. In the region of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), no wiring pattern is laid out (that is, the solid coating corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green resist region, no wiring pattern is formed in this region). This is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually observing the solid green resist region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) through the transparent glass tube. The visibility of the state of the fuse wire is improved, and it can be confirmed whether or not the fuse wire is broken. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 can be provided on one of the AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630, or can be provided on both. You can also.

[9-4. Capacitor capacity]
Next, the capacitance of the capacitor BC0 will be described. As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with a power line (that is, a + 5V power supply) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. Line), DC + 5V is supplied to capacitor BC0 via Schottky barrier diode D20, so that charging can be performed, while pachinko machine 1 is powered off (breaker of game hall) Including turning off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall all at once.) When a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f In response to the fact that + 5V DC is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. To start.

  Due to the discharge of the capacitor BC0, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off all at once by turning off the breakers of the game hall), a power failure or the like. In a state where a momentary power failure has occurred, the backup power is supplied as the main VBB to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310 so that various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is retained. In addition, as the payout VBB, the backup power supply is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, thereby holding various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is like that.

  When the game hall is closed, a staff member such as a store clerk at the game hall turns off the breakers of the game hall to simultaneously shut off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall. When the next business operation is started (usually, the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is kept in the ON state), a staff member such as a game hall clerk will be in charge of the game hall breaker. By turning on the power, the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned on all at once. At this time, if the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is small, the discharge of the capacitor BC0 is completed during the period from the end of the business operation of the game hall to the start of the next business operation. Various information in the main control built-in RAM of the control MPU 1310a and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 cannot be held. As a result, when starting sales, a staff member such as a game hall clerk turns on the game hall breaker to turn on the pachinko machines installed in the game hall all at once, and the RAM clear switch Regardless of whether or not it has been operated, the main control MPU provided on the main control board determines the checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM in the power-on process and completely erases the contents of the main control built-in RAM ( Since all the pachinko machines simultaneously execute the RAM clear notification to notify that the game has been cleared, the RAM clear notification sound flowing from the speakers of all the pachinko machines will sound in the game hall. In this case, in all pachinko machines, the payout control MPU provided on the payout control board determines the checksum (sum value) error of the payout control built-in RAM during the power-on process, and the contents of the payout control built-in RAM are completely displayed. Erase (clear).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is selected so that the RAM clear notification is not executed even when the business of the game hall is ended and the next business is started. Specifically, as the capacity of the capacitor BC0, to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB for about three days (about 72 hours) after the game hall is closed. Various information that is supplied and stored in the main control built-in RAM can be held, and is also supplied as a payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. A capacity capable of holding various information stored in the RAM is selected. The selection of this capacity is based on the fact that the power consumption of the main VBB supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control section 633a of the payout control board 633. In comparison with the power consumption of the payment VBB supplied to the power supply, there is a case where the power consumption may be about 10 times larger. The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Compared to the power consumption.

[9-5. Discontinued electronic component measures]
Next, countermeasures for discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for a board to be treated as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, and a payout control board, a lead-type electronic component is mounted on the mounting surface, which is the front side, It is necessary to solder with the soldering surface which is the side. However, while lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of pachinko machines, slots, fusion gaming machines, and other gaming machines, other general electrical equipment manufacturers are able to reduce the size of the surface-mount type ( The so-called SMD type) is used. For this reason, the production of the lead-type electronic components may be reduced and the production may be stopped. If a lead-type electronic component obtained from one electronic component manufacturer is discontinued, and there is a high probability that other electronic component manufacturers will also discontinue manufacturing. The lead-type electronic component is used with a time limit, and it becomes difficult to mount the lead-type electronic component on the substrate treated as the main substrate.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a lead-type electronic component capable of configuring an SMD-type electronic component as a lead-type electronic component can be mounted on a mounting surface of a substrate treated as a main substrate. . Here, the Schottky barrier diode D20 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (a), the Schottky barrier diode D20 has positions on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a corresponding to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb that are terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are formed, and lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb are formed at positions where one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb corresponding to the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are arranged, and the SMD land pattern D20da is formed. , D20db and lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb are formed as wiring patterns D20ga, D20gb.

  The SMD land patterns D20da and D20db formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a are disposed and soldered so as to correspond to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb which are terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. The anode side D20ca, the cathode side D20cb and the SMD land patterns D20da, D20db are soldered, and one ends of the leads D20ea, D20eb are soldered to the lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb, respectively. Then, the entire surface (mounting surface) and back surface of the substrate D20a are molded by wrapping with epoxy resin to form an electronic component body D20h that covers one end of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b and leads D20ea and D20eb, The Schottky barrier diode D20 can be configured as a lead-type electronic component in which two leads D20ea and D20eb protrude from the electronic component body D20h. A symbol D20ha indicating the forward direction of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is printed on the front surface and / or back surface of the electronic component body D20h, as shown in FIG. 160 (b). Further, although not shown, the name of the manufacturer of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h.

  As described above, since the SMD type electronic component can be configured as a lead type electronic component, even if it becomes difficult to obtain because the production number of the lead type electronic component is reduced and the production is discontinued. This can be dealt with by using SMD type electronic components used by electrical manufacturers.

  In the above-described embodiment, the Schottky barrier diode D20 has been described. However, the present invention can also be applied to an SMD type capacitor, an SMD type resistor, an SMD type coil, and the like. Alternatively, a plurality of identical SMD type electronic components can be arranged in an array to form a lead-type electronic component.

  Next, commercial power supply voltage countermeasures are taken when the plug of the power cord for supplying AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as “commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 shows a configuration of a commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 161, members having the same functions as those in the embodiment shown in FIG. 155 (hereinafter referred to as “composition of commercial power supply voltage countermeasures according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Contrast between the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the power destruction circuit 630g is composed of the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and the power destruction from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 is activated and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are excessively connected). As a result, the FET Q5 is destroyed, so that a short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive is maintained.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a common mode noise countermeasure circuit, and a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit. The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC and the choke coil L1 are configured. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. Yes.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, in addition to the diode D5. The signal is input to the anode terminal of D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, when AC24V from the game hall island facility is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via the power cord (not shown), the fuse FUSE1. , FUSE2 to input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a. For the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK2 and 3 are mounted on the power supply board 630. It is printed on the surface. That is, the white area solid ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are soldered to the power supply board 630, respectively. However, in the region between the white outline inside and the periphery of the support bracket, white is provided. The solid area ad2 can be visually observed, and is an area inside the white outline, which is a solid white area corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. ad2 can be reliably visually observed through a transparent glass tube.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161, AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 through a power cord (not shown). Then, the L side (AC24V1) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a through the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (AC24V2) is input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a as it is. Is done. For the fuse FUSE1, as described above, the white outline and the region ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are printed as silk, and the silk print FSLK2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. ing. That is, the white area solid ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, both ends of the fuse FUSE1 are soldered to the power supply board 630. However, the white region is filled with white in the region between the inner side of the white outline and the periphery of the support bracket. The region ad2 that has been solid-colored in white corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuse FUSE1 is transparent. It can be surely seen through the glass tube.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC 24V from the island facility in the game hall omits the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Briefly describing this, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is connected to both the power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side (fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2). This is because no problem occurred even if one side (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted in the test conducted by the applicant. Thereby, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161, one side of AC24V (N side (AC24V2)) from the island facility of the game hall is connected to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. The cost is reduced by inputting the data as it is.

  Further, the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment employs the same power switch 630a as the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment. This will be briefly described because the power switch 630a needs to be surely disconnected / connected on both the L side and the N side of the AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall. As a result, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment is similar to the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Both L side and N side can be disconnected / connected simultaneously.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161, the N side (AC24V2) of AC24V from the island facility of the game hall and the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a In between, it is electrically connected to one of the microgap type arresters AL1. The other of the microgap arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The microgap type arrester AL1 surges when a high voltage (referred to as “surge voltage”) enters the AC 24V from the island equipment in the game hall due to lightning, and surges the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing it as a current so that no surge voltage is applied to the power switch 630a, or a high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning the power switch 630a ON / OFF is applied to the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing the frame ground FG2 as a surge current so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a. In addition, the microgap type arrester AL1 is used by an operator when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, and the ground terminal ECN2 (island equipment ground) of the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. And the ground connection terminal in the island facility of the game hall are electrically connected to the ground connection terminal via the island facility ground wire, as a security, electromagnetic noise is transmitted from the island facility of the game hall to the N side of AC24V (AC24V2 ), The noise resistance can be increased.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC that is a circuit for countermeasure against common mode noise, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC that is a circuit for countermeasure against normal mode noise, and a choke coil In addition to L1, a surge absorber SA1 that constitutes a power destruction circuit 630g ′, the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, power destruction circuit 630g ′ and input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power destruction circuit 630g ′ has a faster reaction speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1). One end of which is electrically connected to the L side of AC24V (AC24V1) via the power switch 630a, and the other end is connected to the N side (24V AC24 via the power switch 630a). When a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and is destroyed, and a short circuit is established.

  A varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, but here, a silicon surge absorber (also referred to as a semiconductor varistor, VRD, or the like) is used. The silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage having a sharp rise compared to a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a silicon pn junction. This silicon surge absorber has features such that the response to a surge is very fast, the control voltage characteristics are very good, and the leakage current is very small. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type is used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47V, which is about twice the input voltage, may be selected.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is electrically connected to the second (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. The thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to one end. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1, and is also electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor correction circuit 630d. The four terminals of the relay RL1 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay drive circuit 630i described later. Thereby, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1. The thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. As its characteristics, when the vertical axis indicates the allowable capacitor capacity and the horizontal axis indicates the AC voltage, the value of the AC voltage increases. Thus, a capacitor that has a curve in which the value of the allowable capacitor capacity becomes small and is not destroyed even when AC 100 V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, is applied is selected.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, input to the power supply generation circuit 630f, and input to the relay drive circuit 630i. When the direct current from smoothing circuit 630e is input, relay drive circuit 630 creates an operating voltage (+ 24V) that can operate the coil of relay RL1, and supplies it to the first terminal of relay RL1.

  The rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is caused by a shortage of power from the relay drive circuit 630i when the power switch 630a is turned on (relay drive circuit 630i). Relay RL1 cannot be turned on because the coil of relay RL1 is not operating due to insufficient power supply from + 630V from 630i (that is, relay RL1 remains off). The relay RL1 is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1 while the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are in a non-conductive state. The As a result, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c flows toward only the thermistor TH1, and at the time when the direct current begins to flow to the thermistor TH1, the resistance value However, when the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually increases due to the current flowing through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly, and the subsequent value of the thermistor TH1 is reduced. Apply a strong current to the load.

  On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned ON and the coil of the relay RL1 is switched from the non-operating state to the operating state by the electric power from the relay driving circuit 630i (by the power supply by + 24V from the relay driving circuit 630i), the relay RL1 Is turned on, the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are brought into conduction, and the rectified direct currents output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are respectively supplied. In addition to the thermistor TH1, the current is diverted between the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal (that is, between the contacts) of the relay RL1 and passes to the power factor improving circuit 630d via the choke coil L2. Is done. As a result, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is between the terminals of the second (COM) and third terminals of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). ), The current to the thermistor TH1 decreases and the temperature of the thermistor TH1 decreases, and the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, and the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 The current passing between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) increases.

  As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is the thermistor. When flowing through TH1, the current to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1 increases as the temperature of the thermistor TH1 increases and the resistance value decreases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. If this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island facilities of the game hall, and the power supply of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. If the thermistor TH1 rises in temperature when it is mistakenly inserted into the outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 will greatly exceed the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) and surge will occur due to a large current flowing through the surge absorber SA1. The absorber SA1 is destroyed and the short mode can be set.

  In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned on, a large current flows to the fuse FUSE1 via the surge absorber SA1 in the short circuit mode in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is turned on. Fusing will occur. In addition, when the fuse FUSE1 is melted while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, the surge absorber SA1 is scattered and the surge absorber SA1 does not continue to flow a large current through the surge absorber SA1. It can be prevented from being destroyed in the open mode. As a result, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and even if the plug of the power supply cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V that is a commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power supply board 630 is destroyed. This can be surely prevented.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Since it is not necessary to provide a FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting a gate signal for power supply destruction circuit and a CGND terminal for flowing a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the circuit configuration is not complicated.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall, and is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. When the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power destruction circuit 630g ′ is destroyed, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced with an unfused one, and the power cord plug is replaced with the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall Since the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power destruction circuit 630g ′ has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained even if it is plugged into the AC 24V power outlet, the fuse replaced via the surge absorber SA1 A large current flows through FUSE1 and the fuse FUSE1 is restored. So that the blown. That is, unless the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g ′ is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g ′ is not destroyed, Even if the plug of the power cord is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is a power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island facilities of the gaming hall, the game cannot be started.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine having power supply means capable of creating various power sources necessary for a gaming device based on an external power source supplied from outside the gaming machine has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2014-008221). When the person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the gaming machine indicates a specific part of the power supply means over the phone to a person in charge of the shop clerk or the like of the game hall, according to the instruction from the person in charge at the service center. In addition, there is a problem that it is difficult to identify a notable component among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply means.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine including power supply means for generating various power supplies based on the power supply from the amusement island equipment and supplying them to the board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083337 (paragraph [0038]). )). The amusement island facility converts commercial AC power (AC 100 V) to gaming AC power (AC 24 V) that has been stepped down. However, when the power cord for supplying power from the island facility to the gaming machine is plugged into the commercial AC power outlet instead of the gaming AC power outlet, the commercial AC power is supplied from the gaming AC power outlet. Since it has a high voltage, an abnormal power supply is output from the power supply means, and various boards inside the gaming machine may be destroyed.

[10. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 153 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 163. 162 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 163 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control board, and FIG. 164 is a perspective view explaining an outline of wiring to the board treated as the main board. FIG. First, the power supply and input signal in the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and the power supply and input signal in the circuit of the payout control board 633 and wiring to the board treated as the main board will be described.

[10-1. Power supply and input signal in main control board circuit]
Among the power sources in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power source of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with DC + 5V from the power source generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power source board 630 and is also supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The supplied backup power is supplied as the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

  As shown in FIG. 162, DC + 5V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, DC + 5V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ′) of the power supply board 630 is applied to the first terminal, and the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND). DC + 5V from which noise components are removed from the terminal is output. DC + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC0, which is grounded, so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed first. Has been smoothed.

  The DC +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By being connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed direct current + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the game hall is interrupted, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 It is applied as DC +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, which is grounded (GND) and grounded. The backup power supply circuit 630h of the substrate 630 is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0. Thereby, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, via the resistor MR0.

  Of the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2301, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, and a second start port sensor 2511. Detection signal, detection signal from the first big prize opening sensor 2512, detection signal from the second big prize opening sensor 2513, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, etc. Are respectively input to the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Detection signal from the gate sensor 2301, detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2511, detection from the first big winning opening sensor 2512 The signal, the detection signal from the second big prize opening sensor 2513, and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. ing. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. The input terminal PA7 which is an empty terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

  In the present embodiment, there are four general winning ports 2001 as described above, and a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in one general winning port 2001 included in the start port unit 2100. The detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001a that constitutes is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is received by the two general prize opening 2001 in the side unit 2200 The detection signals from the general prize opening sensors 3001b and 3001c constituting the general prize opening sensor 3001 for detecting the received game balls B are respectively input via the main control input circuit 1310b to the input terminal PB5 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. , PB6, respectively, in front of the game area 5a. A detection signal from a general winning port sensor 3001d that constitutes a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in one general winning port 2001 attached to a main control MPU 1310a via a main control input circuit 1310b. The signal is input to the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the first start port sensor 3002 includes two sensors (double sensors), that is, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. Yes. The detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected electrically), whereas the first start port sensor The detection signal from the slave side 3002b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown) (that is, indirectly connected electrically). The detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the first start port sensor sub side 3002b. Is input to the input terminal PB2 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  An operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input port PB is composed of 8 bits, like the input port PA. Further, although a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is not shown, it is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB, and detection signals from other sensors are respectively input to the input port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input terminals that are respectively input to the predetermined input terminals and become empty terminals are grounded to the ground (GND) as the empty terminal processing, like the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

[10-2. Power supply and input signal in payout control board circuit]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with + 5V direct current from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630, and is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa. The supplied backup power is supplied as a payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

  As shown in FIG. 163, DC + 5V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, DC 1 + 5V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ′) of the power supply board 630 is applied to the first terminal, and the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND). DC + 5V from which noise components are removed from the terminal is output. The DC + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND), thereby removing ripples (AC components convoluted with voltage) first. Has been smoothed.

  The DC +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By being connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed direct current + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, when an instantaneous interruption occurs and the power from the game hall is cut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is changed after the instantaneous interruption occurs. It is applied as DC +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Therefore, the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) is the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633. In the embodiment, the larger one is selected as compared with the capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF). As a result, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when an instantaneous interruption occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off. Each charged electric charge is applied as +5 V DC for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4, one end of which is grounded and connected to the ground (GND). The backup power supply circuit 630h of the substrate 630 is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, via the resistor PR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 194, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591. The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are respectively input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 194, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are: These are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. The input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are vacant terminals. These unused input terminals PA6 and PA7 are grounded to the ground (GND) as a free terminal process.

  The power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB (not shown) via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and detection signals from other sensors are also received. The input terminals that are respectively input to the predetermined input terminals of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab and become empty terminals are grounded as empty terminal processing as in the case of the input terminals PA6 and PA7 of the input port PA. GND).

[10-3. Wiring to the board treated as the main board]
Examples of the substrate handled as the main substrate include a power supply substrate 630, a main control substrate 1310, a payout control substrate 633, and the like. If a fraudulent act that illegally alters the wiring to the board treated as the main board is performed, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls, anxious about the operation of the board treated as the main board, and illegal game balls are illegal Since there is a possibility of being obtained by an actor, when the wiring to each of these boards is illegally modified, it is necessary to discover the modified wiring at an early stage.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), the wiring to the power supply board 630 has a connector SHG (not shown, but the connector SHG has a manufacturer name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog). The name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as illegal identifiers on the covering portion of each wiring connected to ()). Specifically, for example, the connector SHG is a connector having a total of 22 pins from the first pin to the 22nd pin, and the first pin has a manufacturing company name: XXX as an unauthorized identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1. And product number: ABC123 (number printed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has a manufacturing company name: XXX as an illegal identifier SLAB on the coating portion of the wiring SCBL2, and product number: ABC123 (number printed in the catalog) Is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the power supply substrate 630 is at least the covering portion of the wiring so that the manufacturer name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an unauthorized identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring. The illegal identifier SLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1 connected to the first pin is white and has a color (e.g., black) that is easy to visually recognize the color of the covering portion, and the manufacturer name: XXX, and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings SCBL2 to SCBL22 connected to other pins may be other colors different from white (for example, red or gray), or a plurality (For example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or a color that is easy to see with respect to the color of the covering (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) ), The manufacturer name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the unauthorized identifier SLAB.

  As to the wiring to the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 164 (b), it is connected to a connector MHG (not shown, but the connector MHG has a manufacturer name and product number (a number listed in the catalog)). On the covering portion of each wiring, the name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as illegal identifiers. Specifically, for example, the connector MHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the first pin to the 30th pin, and the first pin has a manufacturing company name: YYYYY as an unauthorized identifier MLAB on the covering portion of the wiring MCBL1. And product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has a manufacturing company name: YYYYY and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (published in the catalog) as an illegal identifier MLAB on the covering portion of the wiring MCBL2. Number) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the main control board 1310 is at least wiring so that the manufacturer's name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an unauthorized identifier MLAB in the coating portion of the wiring. The illegal identifier MLAB has a length that is repeatedly printed twice.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring MCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, black) as an unauthorized identifier MLAB, manufacturing company name: YYYYY, and product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the coating portions of the wirings MCBL2 to MCBL30 connected to other pins may be other colors (for example, red or gray) different from white, Alternatively, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and colors that are easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) The manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the unauthorized identifier MLAB.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (b), the wiring to the payout control board 633 is connected to a connector HHG (not shown, but the connector HHG has a manufacturer name and a product number (a number listed in the catalog)). On the covering portion of each wiring, the name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as illegal identifiers. Specifically, for example, the connector HHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the first pin to the 30th pin, and the first pin has a manufacturer name: YYYYY as an illegal identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring HCBL1. And product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has a manufacturing company name: YYYYY and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (published in the catalog) as an illegal identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring HCBL2. Number) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the payout control board 633 is at least wiring so that the manufacturer's name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an unauthorized identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring. The illegal identifier HLAB is repeatedly printed twice on the covering portion.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and is easily visible (for example, black) with respect to the color of the covering portion as an illegal identifier HLAB, manufacturing company name: YYYYY, and product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the coating portions of the wirings HCBL2 to HCBL30 connected to other pins may be other colors different from white (for example, red or gray) Alternatively, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and colors that are easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) The manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the illegal identifier HLAB.

  In this way, even if the wiring to the board treated as the main board is tampered with, the name of the manufacturer and the product number (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the connector and the wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to early detection of a modified wiring. Note that wiring that is difficult to obtain is preferable even if it is listed in the catalog as wiring to the substrate treated as the main substrate.

  In the present embodiment, two of the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 are provided. The wiring and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2511 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 provided in the game board 5 are respectively connected to the main control board via a connector (not shown). Direct electrical connection to 1310. On the other hand, the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 is provided in the game board 5. A gate sensor 2301 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a first big prize port sensor 2512 that detects the game ball B received in the first big prize port 2005 provided in the game board 5, and the game board 5 A second prize port sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second prize port 2006 provided, and a general prize port sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the general prize port 2001 provided in the game board 5. 3001, two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first start opening 2002 provided in the game board 5 are connected to each connector. While being aggregated are electrically connected in the relay board (not shown) through, via one connector, it is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  For this reason, the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2511 are erroneously connected to the main control board 1310. There is a risk of electrical connection. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the colors of the covering portions of the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002, one is yellow and the other is pink, and the covering portions of each wire are wired as illegal identifiers. The manufacturer's name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed. As the colors of the covering portions of the two wirings from the second start sensor 2511, one is white and the other is black, and the covering portion of each wiring has a wiring manufacturer name and product number (catalog) as an illegal identifier. Number printed on each page) is printed repeatedly. As a result, the manufacturer can identify the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2511 at the manufacturer. In addition, in the game hall, a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall distinguishes between the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2511. Can be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. Is selected, and a connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2511 to the main control board 1310. As a result, the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2511 correspond to themselves. Since it can be a physical structure that can be electrically connected, in the manufacturer, the operator of the line is the first start port sensor main side constituting the first start port sensor 3002 in the manufacturing process. In the game hall, it is possible to surely prevent an operation mistake (wiring mistake called incorrect insertion) of two wirings from 3002a and two wirings from the second start port sensor 2511. In the case of checking the presence or absence of fraud, a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall, when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original position, the first start port sensor 3002 The work mistake (wiring mistake called insertion mistake) of incorrect wiring between the two wirings from the first start opening sensor main side 3002a and the two wirings from the second start opening sensor 2511 to be configured is surely prevented. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the first big prize opening sensor 2512 that detects the game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005 provided in the game board 5 and the second big prize opening 2006 provided in the game board 5 are used. As described above, the two wires from the second grand prize opening sensor 2513 that detects the received game ball B are electrically connected and integrated on the relay board (not shown) via the respective connectors. However, in order to surely prevent a mistake in operation called incorrect wiring (wiring error called incorrect insertion), the connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first big prize opening sensor 2512 to the main control board 1310 is described in the following. A connector having a pitch of 5 mm is selected and 2.0 m as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second grand prize opening sensor 2513 to the main control board 1310. Having a pitch is selected.

  On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001a constituting the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in one general winning opening 2001 included in the start opening unit 2100 and the two general winnings included in the side unit 2200. The general winning opening sensors 3001b and 3001c constituting the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game balls B received in the opening 2001, respectively, and one general winning opening 2001 attached to the general center of the game area 5a in front view. As the connectors for electrically connecting the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 3001d constituting the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B to the main control board 1310, those having the same shape are selected. In this embodiment, although there are four general winning ports 2001, no matter which general winning port 2001 a game ball enters, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a winning ball. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change in performance.

[11. Each decorative board for the door frame]
Next, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 165 to 169. FIG. 165 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical connection of each decorative board provided in the door frame, FIG. 166 is a block diagram showing an example of the decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. FIG. 168 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate having two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 168 is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 169 is a view from the LED non-mounting surface in D part of FIG. FIG. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decorative board provided with the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current A method for arranging the drive circuits will be described.

  First, as described above, the door frame 3 surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a so that the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, A side window decoration part 410b of the window decoration member 412, a door frame right side decoration body 419, and a door frame top decoration body 453 are disposed, and the dish upper left decoration body 271, dish upper right decoration body 276, and dish A dish lower left decorative body 281, a dish lower right decorative body 286, and a dish center lower decorative body 312 b are arranged below the center upper decorative body 312 a.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 is provided with a dish upper left decorative board 273 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper left decorative body 271, and a plurality of dish upper left decorative boards 271 are mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273. Are illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). The dish upper right decorative body 276 is provided with a dish upper right decorative board 278 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a plurality of the dish upper right decorative body 276 are mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278. Are illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). The dish center upper decorative body 312a has a dish center upper decorative board 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 are decorated for light emission.

  The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed at the rear thereof in the shape of an elongated strip extending up and down along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A full-color LED (in this embodiment, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. 5 and 10 on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). The side window decoration portions 410b are arranged in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window decoration members 412 and are formed on the rear side in the form of elongated strips extending vertically along the side window decoration members 412. The interior decoration part decoration board 413 in a window is arrange | positioned and light emission decoration is carried out by full color LED (this embodiment 12 pieces) mounted in the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413. FIG. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed at the rear thereof in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A full-color LED (in this embodiment, the right side upper decorative substrate 418a is mounted on the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. 4 and 10 on the right side lower decorative board 418b).

  The door frame top decorative body 453 has a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right so as to follow the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is disposed, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. Further, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip is disposed and mounted on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, respectively. Light-emitting decoration by full-color LEDs (11 in the present embodiment, 11 on the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, 7 on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457) It is.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 is provided with a dish lower left decorative board 283 formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left and right directions along the dish lower left decorative body 281, and a plurality of dishes are mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283. Are illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). The dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided with a dish lower right decorative board 288 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. A plurality of full color LEDs (six in this embodiment) are mounted on the light. The dish center lower decorative body 312b has a dish center lower decorative board 316 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b behind the dish center lower decorative body 312b. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 316 are decorated for light emission.

  In addition, the production operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided in the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes the production operation ring decoration board 352 formed in a form in which a ring is divided into front and rear, as described above. The production operation ring decoration board 352 includes a front decoration board 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a front semicircular arc shape, and a rear decoration board 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a rear semicircular arc shape. , Is composed of. The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the front decorative board 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear decorative board 352b ( In this embodiment, the light emission is decorated by 9).

  In this way, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed in an elongated strip shape. Thereby, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distance dimensions of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, and the like can also be provided.

[11-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub-relay board]
The dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the left side upper decorative board 402a, the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the side, which are arranged in various decorative bodies and decorative parts provided in the door frame 3. Window interior decoration part decoration board 413, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, dish left bottom decoration board 283, a dish lower right decorative board 288, a dish center lower decorative board 316, a front decorative board 352a, a rear decorative board 352b, and other door frame side decorative boards, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105 is briefly described with reference to FIG.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is connected to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 148 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are serially output from the door frame side, and the light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2 which are the door frame side second serial system are respectively input independently. Yes. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power line of the power board 630 shown in FIG. 155 through the interface board 635 and DC +12 V is inputted, and the ground ( (GND) line is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

[11-1-1. Door frame side first serial system]
The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are relayed to the dish unit 200 shown in FIG. In addition to being input to the substrate 214, it is input to the handle decoration substrate 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish unit relay board 214 are a dish lower left decorative board 283, a dish lower right decorative board 288, And it is each input to the operation part relay board | substrate 392 of the production | presentation operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the dish lower left decorative board 283, are input to the dish upper left decorative board 273, respectively. That is, the dish lower left decorative board 283 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper left decorative board 273. The decorative board 283 and the dish upper left decorative board 273 are in a state where they are electrically connected to each other. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input to the dish lower left decorative board 283 serving as a bridge board, respectively. Input connector is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the dish upper left decorative board 273, respectively (not shown) An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left decorative board 273 is electrically connected to the lower left decorative board 283 (that is, the latter left stage and the final stage of the lower left decorative board 283). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are respectively input is output. .

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish lower right decorative board 288 are input to the dish upper right decorative board 278, respectively. That is, the dish lower right decorative board 288 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decorative board 278. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the dish upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a rosary manner. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input to the dish lower right decorative board 288 serving as a bridge board, respectively. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the dish upper right decorative board 278, respectively. An output connector is provided. In contrast, the dish upper right decorative board 278 electrically connected to the dish lower right decorative board 288 (that is, the latter stage and the last stage of the dish lower right decorative board 288) includes a dish lower right decorative board. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are respectively output from the output connector (not shown) 288 is provided. ing.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the production operation unit 300 are the upper decorative board 314 in the dish center, the dish They are respectively input to the lower central decorative board 316 and the front decorative board 352a of the effect operation ring decorative board 352.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decorative board 352a are respectively input to the rear decorative board 352b. That is, the front decorative board 352a serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decorative board 352b. And the back decoration board 352b are electrically connected in a daisy chain. The front decorative board 352a serving as a bridging board includes a door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay board 392 of the rendering operation unit 300, respectively. An input connector (not shown) to be input is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decorative board 352b, respectively. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, an output connector (not shown) of the front decoration board 352a is connected to the front decoration board 352a electrically connected to the front decoration board 352a (that is, a rear stage and the last stage of the front decoration board 352a). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are respectively input is provided.

  Here, for example, the dish frame lower left decorative board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the dish unit relay board 214 will be briefly described. Then, the dish lower left decoration board 283 is provided with LED constant current drive circuit 283a, heat distribution circuit 283c, and sdLED1-sdLED6 which are six full color LEDs. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x that can flow a constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting that can set the maximum current that flows to sdLED1 to sdLED6. Circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x performs control to flow a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay board 214. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x is handled by the heat distribution circuit 283c, so that the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x can be distributed.

  Further, for example, a description will be briefly given of the upper left decorative board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the lower left decorative board 283. The upper left decorative board 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current driving circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283, and is a sink (suction) type constant current driving circuit 273x capable of flowing a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6. , And a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting a maximum current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x performs control to flow a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the dish lower left decorative board 283. Since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x is handled by the heat distribution circuit 273c so that the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x can be distributed.

[11-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the lower left side decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402. In addition to the input to the substrate 402b, the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the right side lower decoration substrate 418b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Are entered respectively.

  DC + 12V and ground (GND) input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decorative board. 457.

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top central decorative board 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative board 457 becomes a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative board 455. Thus, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are electrically connected in a rosary manner. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridge board includes a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC + 12V, and ground. An input connector (not shown) for inputting (GND) is provided, and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are arranged at the center of the door frame top. An output connector (not shown) for outputting to the decorative substrate 455 is provided. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457). There are provided input connectors (not shown) to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are respectively input, which are respectively output from the output connectors that are not connected. In addition, an output connector (not shown) is provided for outputting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. .

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top center decorative board 455 are input to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 becomes a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. Thus, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are electrically connected in a rosary manner. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455) includes a door. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors (not shown) of the frame top center decorative board 455, are respectively input. Only a connector is provided.

  Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is input. The left side lower decorative board 402b will be briefly described. The left side lower decorative board 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

  The LED constant current driving circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283 and the LED constant current driving circuit 273a of the dish left upper decorative board 273, and allows a constant current to flow through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Take control.

  The LED constant current driving circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the LED constant current driving circuit 273a of the dish upper left decorative board 273, and the hdLED 9, A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx that can flow a constant current to the hdLED 10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the left It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 402bby that can set the maximum current to be supplied to the huLED1 to huLED5 of the side upper decorative substrate 402a. Based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted on the board (left side lower decorative board 402b) on which it is mounted. Control is performed so that a constant current flows through the hdLED 9, the hdLED 10, and the huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper left side decorative board 402a.

  Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is handled by the heat distribution circuit 402bc, so that the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be distributed. Further, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be distributed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left side decoration board 402a. ing.

  In this way, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be distributed only by the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board (left side lower decorative board 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent substrate in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted (the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Heat generation from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left side decorative board 402a.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current to the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a that is the subsequent board across the board (left side lower decorative board 402b) on which it is mounted. Has been. For this reason, the operation | work which electrically connects between the board | substrate of the left side lower decoration board | substrate 402b and the left side upper decoration board | substrate 402a is necessarily accompanied. The worker who performs this work is the finger of the connector of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the connector of the left side upper decorative board 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b, or the heat of the left side upper decorative board 402a. In order to touch the dispersion circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a have the function of distributing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to.

  In addition, as described above, the upper left side decorative board 402a receives the + 12V DC and the ground (GND) from the lower left side decorative board 402b, and is fixed to five full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. Each line through which current flows is input. As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a includes a heat distribution circuit 402ac in addition to the huLED1 to huLED5 which are five full-color LEDs. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity in addition to the function of distributing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

[11-1-3. Flash data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for designating the light emission mode. Key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits included in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is designated from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

[11-2. Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, since the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decoration board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit, here, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the dish lower left decoration board 283 will be described. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x that can flow a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current that flows to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. The maximum current setting circuit 283y capable of generating

[11-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, the output channel LR is configured for an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B). , LG, and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 with respect to a maximum of eight full color LEDs with one constant current driving circuit. Can be done.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[11-2-1a. Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of generating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V in this embodiment) to be used in the constant current drive circuit 283x when DC + 12V from the + 12V power supply line is input. The internal power supply Vreg created by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit. The internal power supply Verg supplies the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi. Is able to work.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 155. Yes. This is because if the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 is used, the + 5V power supply line is used by routing the electrical wiring, so that the length of the + 5V power supply line for supplying DC + 5V becomes longer and noise is generated. It becomes easy to penetrate. Then, when external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and + 5V DC is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED flickers due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, by eliminating the need for the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the noise resistance is extremely high compared to the + 5V power supply line, and the + 12V power supply line has a constant current drive circuit 283x. The linear power supply 283xa employs a configuration in which DC +5 V is uniquely created as the internal power supply Vreg.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the internal power supply Vreg only from the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. Thereby, stabilization of internal power supply Vreg can contribute to prevention of flickering of sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs due to external noise. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. In addition, the input electrical wiring and the external transmission electrical wiring for the + 5V power supply line are not necessary, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[11-2-1b. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs the internal reset signal RST to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. A so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are started.

  For example, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 148, and independently creates the reset signal as the internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. Yes. For example, when a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as a “reset signal transmission line”) is used, the reset signal transmission line is used by routing electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x is reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be turned off. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the reset signal transmission line is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently creates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate, and only in the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using it, external noise can be made difficult to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, This can contribute to prevention of unexpected turn-off and flickering of LED elements constituting full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. Further, the input electrical wiring and the external transmission electrical wiring for the reset signal transmission line are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[11-2-1c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc transmits serial data (herein, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter referred to as “data line”). Is a circuit that can shape the waveform of a signal that transmits serial data and output the serial data to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line for transmitting a clock signal from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) (hereinafter referred to as “clock line”). Is a circuit that can shape the clock signal and output it to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

  As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. For this reason, the lengths of the data line and the clock line are both increased, and noise easily enters. Therefore, in this embodiment, the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd are provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the noise that has entered the data line or the clock line just before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x. The logic line is shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when both the data line and the clock line are long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise. Thereby, signal transmission resistant to noise can be realized. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise.

[11-2-1d. Address setting section]
Based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, the address setting unit 283xe sets 64 addresses as IDs (IDs that can identify the individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistors (not shown). Be able to.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID that can identify the individual constant current drive circuit 283x is set in advance by the address setting unit 283xe according to the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). However, it is not set appropriately by receiving data by software.

[11-2-1e. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg includes serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. In some cases, the gradation information is fetched from the serial data, and the gradation level in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to become the fetched gradation information. On the other hand, if the ID information of the serial data (the light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not captured and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents.

[11-2-1f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can perform gradation control of the brightness (gradation degree) of the LED in each output channel in a total of 128 steps from gradation zero (zero) to gradation degree 127 from turning off to lighting (maximum luminance). Therefore, gradation control is performed for one output channel by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown). That is, the PWM unit 283xh includes the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When these gradation levels are set, the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 control the constant current driving unit 283xi so as to flow a current having the set gradation level.

[11-2-1g. Constant current drive unit]
The constant current drive unit 283xi includes one constant (not shown) for one output channel so as to have the gradation set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 included in the PWM unit 283xh. A constant current is passed through the LED elements constituting the full color LED by a current driver. That is, the constant current driving unit 283xi includes the constant current drivers 1 to constant current drivers 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control units 1 to PWM gradation control unit 24.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 have one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current that flows through the LED element that emits red (R) that constitutes the full color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LR1 to LR8. The resistor Rr is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 has one end of a resistor Rg that sets the maximum current that flows through the green (G) LED element that constitutes the full color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LG1 to LG8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 has one end of a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current that flows to the blue (B) LED element that constitutes the full color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LB1 to LB8. The resistor Rb is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The red (R) LED element anode terminal, the green (G) LED element anode terminal, and the blue (B) LED element constituting full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24. The anode terminal is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and receives DC + 12V.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat distribution resistors. 1 to the constant current driver 8) are electrically connected to each other so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 side, respectively. It has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current driver via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors). 9 to the constant current driver 16), and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat distribution resistors. 17 to the constant current driver 24), and the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. ing.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the red (R) LED elements constituting the individually set full color LEDs, thereby red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the green (G) LED elements constituting the individually set full color LED, and thereby the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 suck the constant currents flowing in the blue (B) LED elements constituting the individually set full color LEDs, respectively, thereby the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED. Can emit light.

  In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting light with 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with individually set constant currents. Thus, it is possible to turn off, turn on with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[11-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the resistor Rr that sets the maximum current that flows through the LED element that emits red (R) in the eight color output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. A resistor Rg for setting the maximum current to flow through the green (G) LED element constituting the full color LED in the eight output channels up to LG8, and a full color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LB1 to LB8 And a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current that flows through the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

  As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 included in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). Yes. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 included in the constant current driving unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). Yes. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 included in the constant current driving unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). Yes.

[11-3. Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative substrate including an LED constant current driving circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. Here, a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit mentioned above provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. For this reason, in FIG. 166 and FIG. 167, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals for convenience of explanation.

[11-3-1. Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative board having one LED constant current driving circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 166, a dish lower left decorative board 283 includes an LED constant current driving circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, A distribution circuit 283c is provided.

  As described above, the door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1, which are the first serial system on the door frame side, are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 so that + 12V DC is input, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( (GND) line is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the dish lower left decorative board 283 has the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, DC + 12V, and ground (GND) of the dish unit 200. This is input via the dish unit relay board 214. The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full color LEDs, Each is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat distribution resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. The driver 1 to the constant current driver 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full-color LEDs are respectively connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat distribution resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6. The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs are respectively connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat distribution resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6 (the constant current described above). The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. Note that the output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current driving circuit 283a are not connected.

  Based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 283a uses the light emission data SDAT1 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID. Gradation information is taken in, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled to be dimmed so as to become the fetched gradation information.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (specifically, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the heat distribution resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6 that constitute the heat distribution circuit 283c. Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the upper left of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the constant current drive circuit 283x described above). In addition to being input to the substrate 273, DC +12 V and ground (GND) are input to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 via the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. As a result, noise that has entered the data line or the clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the constant current drive circuit 283x described above) is not transmitted to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273, which is a subsequent substrate. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a can shape the waveform (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd included in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above).

  The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and the red (R) LED element anode terminal, the green (G) LED anode terminal constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full color LEDs, and Each is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat distribution resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. The driver 1 to the constant current driver 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat distribution resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat distribution resistors suRb1 to suRb6 (the constant current described above). The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

  Based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts from the light emission data SDAT1 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID. Gradation information is captured, and the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled so that the captured gradation information is obtained.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the heat distribution resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6 constituting the heat distribution circuit 273c. Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) can be dispersed.

  In addition to the dish lower left decorative board 283 and the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish lower right decorative board 288, the dish upper right decorative board 278, and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are used as a decorative board having one LED constant current driving circuit. , And a door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[11-3-2. Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative board having two LED constant current driving circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the lower left side decorative board 402b is an LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, 402bb, ten full-color LEDs hdLED1. -HdLED10 and heat dispersion circuit 402bc are provided.

  As described above, the door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4. The light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 so that + 12V DC is input, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( (GND) line is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Yes. The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the green (G) LED elements constituting the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. , And blue (B) LED elements are also input to the anode terminal.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 with respect to a maximum of eight full-color LEDs with one constant current driving circuit. It can be controlled. For this reason, among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the eight constant-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the remaining two With respect to hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, the light emission mode is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a which is a subsequent board across the board on which the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative board 402b). The light emission mode of the huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

  Among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the red (R) LED element cathode terminals constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 with respect to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are respectively Through the heat distribution resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, the output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are electrically connected, and the hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full color LEDs, are connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 described above) via the heat distribution resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. And electricity The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. The above-described constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24) are electrically connected.

  Among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are the red (R) LED element cathode terminals constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10, respectively. Through the heat distribution resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10, the output channels LR1 and LR2 (the constant current driver 1 and the constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb are electrically connected, and the hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are connected. The cathode terminal of the green (G) LED element is connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 (the constant current driver 9 and the constant current driver 1 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb through the heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. ) And the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are output channels of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. They are electrically connected to LB1 and LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above).

  Further, for the huLED1 to huLED5 which are the five full color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is the substrate subsequent to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the red color (huLED1 to huLED5 which is a full color LED) The cathode terminals of the LED elements R) are respectively connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat distribution resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the heat distribution resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (the constant current driver 3 to the constant current driver 7 described above) and constitute the full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively, Upper left side decoration Through the heat distribution resistors huRg1b to huRg5b in the plate 402a and the heat distribution resistors huRg1a to huRg5a in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current drivers 11 to constant current described above). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the driver 15) and constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are the heat distribution resistors huRb1b to huRb5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, and left Electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (the constant current driver 19 to the constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat distribution resistors huRb1a to huRb5a on the side lower decorative substrate 402b. To have. Note that the output channels LR8, LG8, and LB8 of the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb are not connected.

  Based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba starts from the light emission data SDAT2 when its ID is included in the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2. Gradation information is taken in, and among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled to be dimmed so as to become the fetched gradation information. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emission data) input via the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. On the basis of SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, the gradation information is fetched from the light emission data SDAT2, and the obtained gradation information becomes 10 Of the two full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled and dimly lit, and the left side serving as the substrate subsequent to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b Upper decorative board 40 Is the five independent control huLED1~huLED5 a full-color LED of and turned dimming implemented in a.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking constant currents flowing through the eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the heat distribution resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, and hdRb1 to hdRb8 constituting the heat distribution circuit 402bc. Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type as described above, the constant current flowing through the two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is sucked to the left. Heat is generated by sucking constant currents flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Five heat resistances hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, and hdRb10 constituting the heat distribution circuit 402bc, and five mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a that is the board following the left side lower decorative board 402b. For the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full color LEDs, the heat distribution resistors huRr1a to huRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, and huRb1a to huRb5a constituting the heat distribution circuit 402bc on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is configured by the heat distribution resistors huRr1b to huRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b that constitute the heat distribution circuit 402ac on the decorative substrate 402a. The heat generation can be dispersed.

  Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dissipating the heat generated, it also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  In addition to the left side lower decorative board 402b, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the dish central lower decorative board 316, the side window decorative part decorative board 413, the right side as a decorative board including two LED constant current drive circuits. There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

  In addition to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, there is a right side upper decorative substrate 418a as a decorative substrate that does not include any LED constant current drive circuit.

[11-4. Arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a method for arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 168 and 169. In this embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, the constant current drive circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit will be described as an electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip. As a type of the IC package of the constant current driving circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) is used. And so-called VQFN. Of the four edges of the constant current drive circuit, one edge is the input side, and the remaining three edges are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. Note that in FIG. 169, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for easy viewing of the drawing.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the LED constant current drive circuit is arranged in substantially the same manner on each decorative board of the door frame 3, the left side formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically is provided here with two LED constant current drive circuits. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the upper middle decorative plate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape will be described.

[11-4-1. Left side lower decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the left side lower decorative board 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b that is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are It is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting the left side upper decorative board 402a and the electrical wiring is mounted on the upper side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the LED of the left side lower decorative board 402b is not mounted. A connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 and the electrical wiring is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

  A white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the present embodiment, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is applied by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Can be increased.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs and the area indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. In addition, the board management number of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a blank character with a white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is reduced by the region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs are arranged and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b from being lowered due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs.

  Also, the door frame left side decorative body 404 shown in FIG. 91 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in translucent milky white as described above, but is a game seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). In the first place, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs and the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged. The full color LE has no relation to the game for the player because the area indicating the position is not printed at all as silk printing. Corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED are prevented from being viewed by the player and. Accordingly, the numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and the auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, full-color LEDs) It is possible to make it difficult for a player to visually recognize a region indicating a position where certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, which has no relation to the game for the player.

  Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). Mounted are hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). Thus, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Also, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a board management number of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a foil-extracted character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) A letter is formed by making a letter with a pattern and removing the surrounding copper foil), and the letter without the foil is formed by a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b. Covered. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-extracted character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is not the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, but the foil removal character (that is, the wiring pattern) on the non-LED mounting face 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. In the layer (copper plane) in which the character is formed, a character is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed, and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed. Foil-free characters (that is, a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Each of them may be formed as a cut character formed by removing the copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid ground as will be described later. For this reason, the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is a letter without a foil (that is, a letter is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed. Without being formed as a blank character), and the solid surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx and the solid surface of the non-LED mounting surface 402by are formed as a blank character with characters removed on one or both surfaces. It may be.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, and various dispersions. Areas indicating the positions where electronic parts such as resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silk prints near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black). Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 169 (a)) as silk printing, and the lower left side decorative board IC1 (see FIG. 169 (a)), which is printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of 402b and is a part number corresponding to the constant current driving circuit 402bax in the vicinity of the area LSLKa, is silk-printed. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. A region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 169 (a)) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd, and to the right, the resistances Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2 and R3 (see FIG. 169 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in yellow (or black) as silk printing, respectively. Yes.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are yellow lines as silk printing. (Or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 169 (a), only hdLED4 and hdLED5 corresponding to full-color LEDs are respectively represented by chain lines LSLK4 and LSLK5), and these areas are respectively printed. Part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of LSLK1 to LSLK10 above or below (FIG. 169 (a) shows LED4 and LED4 that are part numbers corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 that are full-color LEDs). Only expressed respectively.) Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a yellow chain line (not shown) indicating a position where the connector LDLCN to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is arranged as silk printing (Or a black chain line), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity of this region.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN has a housing made of a resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. In this way, resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Has been implemented.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a lighting inspection is individually performed on the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, This is performed for each LED element, which constitutes one full-color LED, with respect to the LED element emitting red (R), the LED element emitting green (G), and the LED element emitting blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) that can be formed are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  In the embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and reflectance that decreases in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are LEDs that emit light of the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but the LED mounting surface is a region corresponding to the member disposed in the front among the LED mounting surfaces due to light emission of the full color LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) (not shown) as silk print, and an electron is located in the vicinity of this region. A part number corresponding to a part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as so-called solid earths that ground an area excluding land patterns and wiring patterns such as electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). Yes.

  As described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, so that the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The width dimension from the left end side 402 beg 1 to the right end side 402 beg 2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402 bax and 402 bbx. For this reason, if the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the land of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx Since the distance between the pattern edge and the left edge 402beg1 or right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, the wiring pattern should be drawn from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the minimum distance dimension is limited in the width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns, it is difficult to draw out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Adopted the configuration.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the right lower end side of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is input as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The terminal on the input side is the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. 167 by being arranged near the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative board 402b so as to become the terminal on the side. ), DC + 12V, ground (GND), and resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left side, the upper left side, and the upper right side are mainly terminals on the output side 1 to the output side 3 and the output side 1 terminal to the output side 3 terminal are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 shown in FIG. LG8, LB1~LB8, and door frame side second serial line (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) to output the like. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which a ground (GND) is input. Yes.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being arranged as a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged as being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402 beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is limited from the respective lead pads of the land pattern arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent interval between the wiring patterns. Even all the wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically.

  Moreover, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, the group 1 is composed of four full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be disposed between the group 2 composed of the hdLED5 to the hdLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, The thickness can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern leading to the group 1 and the group 2 from being unduly lengthened or shortened to either one of the group 1 or the group 2. It is possible to increase the efficiency of wiring pattern placement and routing in the work.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current driving circuit 402bax is connected to the center portion in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b (the hdLED6 which is a full-color LED in FIG. 168 (a)). The constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be disposed closer to the lower side than the disposed portion), and the constant current driving circuit 402bbx is arranged at the center portion in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 168 (a)). It can be arranged above the hdLED 8, which is a full-color LED that is configured in the group 2 that is controlled to emit light by the constant current drive circuit 402 bax. . As a result, an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current driving circuit 402bax to the eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 can be secured on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and from the constant current driving circuit 402bbx. Two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 and the five left-side upper decorative boards 402a shown in FIG. 167 are provided with wiring pattern routing areas to the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. 402b can be secured.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and a capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) whose rectangular shape is a rectangular shape, and is 0805 in a so-called EIA format (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length) S: 1.25 mm). That is, the size of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) is larger than the size of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Very small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb have one end side in the longitudinal direction on the left end side of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The capacitor (not shown) is disposed so as to be parallel to 402 beg 1 and the right end side 402 beg 2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is perpendicular to the left end side 402 beg 1 and the right end side 402 beg 2 of the left side lower decorative board 402 b. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each end side of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx arranged such that the end side of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistance Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b so as to be non-parallel.

  In addition, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit is arranged on each decorative board of the door frame 3 so that the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is 45 with respect to the left and right edges of the decorative board. The door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are arranged in a tilted state. Unlike the other decorative boards of the frame 3, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453. Since the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side is large, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit is arranged on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper side and lower side of the right decorative substrate 457. That is, in this embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit is not parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. Is mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top central decorative board 455 includes, in addition to 11 full-color LEDs provided therein, another central decorative board on which five full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. LED constant current drive circuit (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, The second maximum current setting circuit)) is illustrated by one LED constant current drive circuit (here, the second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)). Not through two heat distribution circuits (the first constant current circuit is the first heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance), the second constant current circuit is the second heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance)) Direct light emission control, door frame top left decoration The board 456 has one LED constant current driving circuit (constant current driving) provided on itself (not shown) with another left decorative board on which one full color LED (not shown) is mounted in addition to the seven full color LEDs provided on itself. The circuit and the maximum current setting circuit) directly control light emission through one heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance) provided for itself (not shown), and the door frame top right decorative board 457 includes six full-color LEDs provided for itself. Thus, another right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted is provided on itself (not shown) by one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided on itself (not shown). Light emission is controlled directly through two heat distribution circuits (heat distribution resistors). The other central decorative board is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right so as to follow the central part of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative board is a left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decorative board is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other central decorative board, the other left decorative board, and the other right decorative board need to be provided with heat distribution circuits (heat distribution resistors), respectively. As described above, the heat distribution circuit (here, the second heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance)) provided on the door frame top central decorative board 455 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other central decorative board are the door frame top. In addition to the function of distributing the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative board 455 itself, it prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has functions that can be done. In addition, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other left decorative board include an LED constant current driving circuit (accurately provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself). Has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity in addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit). Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other right decorative substrate include an LED constant current driving circuit (accurately provided in the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 itself). Has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity in addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit).

  Further, the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so that the end sides of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and 10 full-color LEDs are provided. When the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, they are close to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. L on lower left side decorative board 402b Adopting a configuration of placing the D non-mounting surface 402By. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of a sink (suction) type, and generate heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. For this reason, even in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx from the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, Heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be hardly affected by the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full-color LEDs.

  Further, the constant current drive circuit 402bax, 402bbx has land patterns whose end sides are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative board 402b, thereby providing a constant current drive circuit. Arranged so that the edges of the land patterns 402bax and 402bbx are parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate is one in which the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right end sides of the decorative substrate. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side can be made shorter. Thereby, it can contribute to enlarging the distance dimension of the left-right direction of the game board 5. FIG.

[11-4-2. Plate on the upper center of the dish]
As shown in FIG. 168 (b), the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 on the upward direction of the effect operation unit 300, whereas the LED constant current driving circuit 314a. , 314 b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper central decorative plate 314 on the side of the rendering operation unit 300 facing upward. When the dish center upper decorative board 314 shown in FIG. 168 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (ie, the dish center upper decorative board 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a. The connector HCN for connecting the operation unit relay board 392 and the electric wiring is mounted on the right side along the upper end side 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314x on the dish center.

  A white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. In the present embodiment, the white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish moves forward by the light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300). The reflectance of can be increased.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative board 314, the part number corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full color LED and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 which is the full color LED are arranged are printed as silk printing at all. It has not been. Further, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is not formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 as a blank letter with white resist.

  This is because the reflectivity on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is reduced by the light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, due to the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance at the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative plate 314x of the dish center due to the light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, from decreasing.

  Moreover, although the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in translucent milky white as described above, the front of the pachinko machine 1 When the player sitting on the head moves the head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and the LED on the dish center upper decorative board 314 provided in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 is temporarily assumed. Even if the player can visually recognize the mounting surface 314x, in the first place, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full color LED, and a full color LED. Since the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing, it is completely related to the game for the player It has not full LED with the corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED is prevented from being viewed by the player. Therefore, the numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10) and the auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, full-color LEDs) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the area where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged.

  Note that the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has no part number corresponding to the connector HCN and a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged printed as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector HCN that has nothing to do with the game for the player, and the region indicating the position where the connector HCN is disposed.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color that is recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector HCN having a housing of the same color as the white resist that is covered (solid-coated) (color that is recognized as the same color) are mounted. As described above, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is a foil-extracted character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). A letter is formed by making a letter with a pattern and removing the surrounding copper foil), and the foil-drawn letter is formed by a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the dish center. Covered. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-extracted character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is not the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, but the foil removal character (that is, the wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In the layer (copper plane) in which the character is formed, the character may be formed as a character formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil and the surrounding copper foil is removed, or the decorative plate 314 at the upper center of the dish Foil-free characters (that is, a wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. Each of them may be formed as a cut character formed by removing the copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 are formed as a solid ground as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the decorative board 314 on the center of the dish is a foil-cut character (that is, a character is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed. Without being formed as a blank character), and is formed as a blank character with characters removed on one or both of the solid ground of the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 314y. It may be.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish has constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersions. Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silk marks near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown).

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314, yellow areas (not shown as silk printing) corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are shown. Are printed in the chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, and in the vicinity of these regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are not illustrated as silk printing yellow (or , Black).

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a yellow chain line (not shown as silk printing) is an area indicating a position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is arranged. (Or a black chain line), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity of this region.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the plate have no white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is not The package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

  Further, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is individually subjected to a lighting test for hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, This is performed for each LED element, which constitutes one full-color LED, with respect to the LED element emitting red (R), the LED element emitting green (G), and the LED element emitting blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) that can be formed are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 are formed as a so-called solid ground that grounds an area excluding land patterns and wiring patterns such as electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 and the solid ground formed on the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). Yes.

  In the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and reflectance that decreases in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are due to light emission of the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface, but the area corresponding to the member disposed in the front of the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED is LED mounted. When it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) (not shown) as silk print, and an electron is located in the vicinity of this region. A part number corresponding to a part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  Since the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape as described above, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. 168 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left. When viewed (that is, a state where the dish center upper decorative board 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a), the upper end side 314eg1 to the lower end side 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are shown. The width dimension extending up to about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx. For this reason, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper decorative substrate 314, the land of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is arranged. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper decorative board 314 in the dish center is extremely short, the wiring pattern should be drawn from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the minimum distance dimension is limited in the width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns, it is difficult to draw out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Adopted the configuration.

  In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the left lower end side of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is input as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. The terminal on the input side is arranged on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) as shown in FIG. ), DC + 12V, ground (GND), and resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left side, the upper right side, and the lower right side are mainly terminals on the output side 1 to the output side. The output side 1 terminal to the output side 3 terminal are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and The door frame side first serial line (emission data SDAT1, clock signals SCLK1) to output the like. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which a ground (GND) is input. Yes.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two end sides of the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish upper central decorative board 314. While being able to arrange | position as a state, the remaining 2 edge sides can be arrange | positioned as the state which inclined 45 degree | times with respect to the lower end edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative board 314. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is limited from the respective lead pads of the land pattern arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent interval of the wiring pattern. Even all the wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region from which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx in the dish central decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, the group 1 is composed of four full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4, and four full color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of the hLED5 to the hLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, its length The thickness can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern leading to the group 1 and the group 2 from being unduly lengthened or shortened to either one of the group 1 or the group 2. It is possible to increase the efficiency of wiring pattern placement and routing in the work.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, when the dish center upper decorative board 314 shown in FIG. 168 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the dish center upper decorative board 314 is located on the dish center upper). The constant current drive circuit 314ax is a semi-circular arc central portion (FIG. 168 (b) full-color LED) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish upper central decorative substrate 314. The hLED 6 can be disposed closer to the right side than the portion where the LED 6 is disposed, and the constant current driving circuit 314bx is arranged in the semicircular arc-shaped central portion (FIG. 168 (b) in FIG. ) In the left side compared with the portion where the hdLED 6, which is a full color LED, is disposed, and the light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314 ax. It can be arranged on the left of hLED8 a full-color LED configured to 2. Thereby, the area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and from the constant current drive circuit 314bx An area for routing the wiring pattern to the hLED9 and hLED10, which are two full-color LEDs, can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. Resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and a capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) whose rectangular shape is a rectangular shape, and is 0805 in a so-called EIA format (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length) S: 1.25 mm). That is, the size of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) is larger than the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Very small. For this reason, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one end side in the longitudinal direction at the upper end side of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The capacitor (not shown) is arranged so as to be parallel to 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is perpendicular to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each end of the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged such that the end of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end 314eg1 and the lower end 314eg2 of the upper central decorative board 314, and the resistance Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 so as to be non-parallel.

  In addition, the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so that the end sides of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 and ten full-color LEDs. HLED1 to hLED10 as viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, and closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative board 314, and in a semicircular arc shape of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are closer to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative board 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. A configuration is adopted in which the plate is arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink (suction) type, as described above, like the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. Fever. For this reason, even in the upper central decorative board 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape, by separating the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx from the 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, Heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be hardly affected by the hLED1 to hLED10 which are ten full color LEDs.

  Further, the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so that the end sides of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper central decorative board 314. 314ax, 314bx land pattern end edges are arranged in parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the one in which the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right end sides of the decorative substrate is the decorative substrate. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side can be made shorter. Thereby, since it can contribute to enlarging the distance dimension of the left-right direction of the production | presentation operation unit 300 and the distance dimension of the front-back direction, while being able to equip the door frame 3 with the large-scale production operation unit 300, the production operation unit The light emission effect by 300 can be performed.

[11-4-3. Genus pad on the bottom of IC package of constant current drive circuit]
As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are flat as described above. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, an IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

  A metal pad FP is exposed at a central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current driving circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter referred to as “EPad”) is formed. This IC package can be improved in heat dissipation and bondability by being soldered to a substrate.

  The land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with an EPad land pattern EP having a square shape in addition to each lead pad. The EPad land pattern EP is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a grid pattern. By these thermal vias TV, the EPad land pattern EP and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected. For this reason, it is impossible to draw out a wiring pattern from each lead pad in the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink (suction) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b via the EPad land pattern EP. By diffusing, heat can be radiated from the entire left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  The relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly described. The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP is constant current. The number of thermal vias TV and the size of the diameter are selected so as to be 50% or more with respect to the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. As a result, the bonding area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current driving circuit and the EPad land pattern EP are soldered is prevented from being excessively increased, and the generation of voids is prevented. The joining strength can be obtained. Note that the EPad land pattern EP can also be formed in a grid pattern, but in this case as well, in order to prevent the generation of voids and obtain a stable bonding strength, as described above, the constant current drive circuit The EPad (metal pad FP) must be bonded to the EPad land pattern EP by 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In this embodiment, as described above, as described above, for example, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically is provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, and a semicircle The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape, respectively, and the LED by light emission of the full color LED by the region indicating the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the position where the full color LED is arranged The part number corresponding to the full-color LED that can prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from being lowered and has nothing to do with the game for the player. And a region indicating where to place a full-color LED has been described in detail that it is taken measures such reflectance decrease that can be prevented from being viewed by the player. Here, FIG. 170 thru | or about another structure (henceforth "the structure of countermeasures, such as a reflectance fall concerning 2nd thru | or 4th embodiment") of this invention by which measures, such as a reflectance fall, are taken. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 170 shows a configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, FIG. 171 shows a configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 172 shows a portion D ′ in FIG. FIG. 171 is an enlarged view of the portion D ″ of FIG. 171 as viewed from the non-LED mounting surface, FIG. 173 is a configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. It is the enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in a part. In FIGS. 170 to 174, those having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 168 and 169 (hereinafter referred to as a configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment). Are denoted by the same reference numerals. Further, in FIG. 172, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for easy viewing of the drawing. In FIG. 174, various electronic components are omitted for the sake of easy viewing.

[Contrast between the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment and the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has the constant current driving circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silks near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, regions corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as prints, and part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk prints in the vicinity of these regions, respectively. Has been.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central dish 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are located in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, regions corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown as prints, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are silk printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  In contrast, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has hdLED1 that is a full color LED. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the region indicating the position where the hdLED 1 to the hdLED 10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are respectively printed as silk printing. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are printed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with yellow solid lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 as silk prints. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs on the left or above in the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, are yellow as silk printing on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b Each is printed.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed as a silk print with a yellow solid line (not shown) and corresponds to the connector LDLCN in the vicinity of this region. The part number to be printed is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). Mounted are hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). In this way, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspections of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are individually performed (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is yellow not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, as shown in FIG. 172, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 172 (a)) as silk printing, and the lower left side decorative board IC1 (see FIG. 172 (a)), which is printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of 402b, and is the part number corresponding to the constant current driving circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa, is silk-printed. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. And the area | region which shows the position which arrange | positions resistance Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum electric current setting circuit 402bay is yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (refer FIG. 172 (a)) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd, and to the right, the resistances Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 172 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, respectively. Yes.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN has a housing made of a resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. In this way, resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is increased by the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Be able to.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. Corresponding part numbers and regions indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are respectively printed as silk printing. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative plate 314 of the dish center with yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 as silk prints. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs on the right side in the vicinity of the regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, are printed in yellow as silk prints on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314, respectively. Has been.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative board 314 in the dish center, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed as a silk line with a solid yellow line (not shown), and the area near the area corresponds to the connector HCN. The part number to be printed is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color that is recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector HCN having a housing of the same color as the white resist that is covered (solid-coated) (color that is recognized as the same color) are mounted. Thus, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is individually subjected to a lighting test on the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is yellow not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the plate has a constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, and the like. The area indicating the position where the electronic component is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a yellow solid line (or black solid line) not shown, and the part number corresponding to the electronic component is shown as a silk print near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black).

  In the second embodiment, the resistors, capacitors, and the like mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 314ax ( In 314bx), the package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is reflected forward by the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs (that is, toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color LED. The regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is a component corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs. The number and the region indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, but in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b -The parts number (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are LEDs and the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, there are part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. An area (yellow solid line) indicating a position to be arranged is different from that in that each area is printed as silk printing.

  The white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. It is like that. In addition, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has a reflectance to the front (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300) due to light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs. Can be increased. For this reason, in the case where the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED is printed by black printing. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, and there arises a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in milky white with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the player. Then, there is a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Accordingly, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full color LED that has no relation to the game at all for the player, and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are set as silk printing. Unlike black, by printing in light yellow, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface (that is, the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) ) Or a number identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED) can be difficult to find.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed, which is different from black and yellow. By printing with, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to light emission of the full color LED.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the same operational effects as the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number that identifies the full color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) and the auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, the region that indicates the position where the full color LED is disposed). In addition, the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED can be prevented from being lowered.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, unlike black, and light color. When printing in yellow), the polarity mark of the full color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full color LED.

  Further, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, which have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are emitted from the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. However, among the LED mounting surfaces due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member disposed in front is the LED. When it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or connector is arranged is printed with a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk print, and a part number corresponding to the electronic component or connector is adjacent to this area. Is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

[Contrast between the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment and the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has the constant current driving circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silks near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, regions corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as prints, and part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk prints in the vicinity of these regions, respectively. Has been.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central dish 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are located in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, regions corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown as prints, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are silk printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 171 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has hdLED1 that is a full color LED. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 is a foil cut character (that is, a cut character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil ( In FIG. 171 (c), only the foil letter LED 7 is shown as a part number corresponding to the hdLED 7 which is a full-color LED.)), And an area indicating the positions where the hdLED 1 to hdLED 10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged is shown. Foil-extracted regions excluding terminals (not shown) and wiring patterns (not shown) (that is, wiring patterns are formed) In the (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, the region formed by removing the copper foil (FIG. 171 (c)) shows only the foil extraction region LSLK7 as the region corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full color LED. .)), And the foil-extracted region and the foil-extracted characters are covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are formed as the foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and to the left or above, respectively. The foil removal region and the foil removal character are respectively covered with a white resist solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-extracted character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is disposed is a foil removal region (that is, a wiring pattern) (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). In the layer (copper plane), the area where the copper foil is removed except for each terminal and wiring pattern is formed, and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). Mounted are hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). In this way, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspections of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are individually performed (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is indicated in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins (not shown). In other words, in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, the wiring pattern is a copper foil. It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil around make. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, as shown in FIG. 172, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 172 (a)) as silk printing, and the lower left side decorative board IC1 (see FIG. 172 (a)), which is printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of 402b, and is the part number corresponding to the constant current driving circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa, is silk-printed. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. And the area | region which shows the position which arrange | positions resistance Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum electric current setting circuit 402bay is yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (refer FIG. 172 (a)) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd, and to the right, the resistances Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 172 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, respectively. Yes.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN has a housing made of a resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. In this way, resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is increased by the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Be able to.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish top upper decorative substrate 314 includes hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. Corresponding part numbers are formed as foil-extracted characters (that is, extracted characters formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed and then removing the surrounding copper foil) In addition, regions indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are not shown in the respective terminals and foil-extracted regions excluding a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, each terminal in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) And an area formed by removing the copper foil, except for the wiring pattern) WHITE resists areafill to D mounting surface 314x and its foil vent area and the foil outline characters are covered respectively. Specifically, areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper decorative board 314 as foil extraction areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs in the vicinity of the regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the right side are respectively formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper central decorative substrate 314 as a letter, The foil-extracted region and the foil-extracted character are respectively covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the central upper decorative substrate 314. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-extracted character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative board 314 in the dish center, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is disposed is formed with a foil removal region (that is, a wiring pattern) (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). In this layer (copper plane), a region where the copper foil is removed except for each terminal and wiring pattern is formed, and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color that is recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector HCN having a housing of the same color as the white resist that is covered (solid-coated) (color that is recognized as the same color) are mounted. In this way, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is individually subjected to a lighting test for the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is indicated in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins (not shown). In other words, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are made with the wiring pattern that is copper foil and its surroundings. It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the plate has a constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, and the like. The area indicating the position where the electronic component is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a yellow solid line (or black solid line) not shown, and the part number corresponding to the electronic component is shown as a silk print near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black).

  In the third embodiment, the resistors, capacitors, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( In 314bx), the package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment, the white color resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is reflected forward by the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs (that is, toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color LED. The regions indicating the positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed as silk printing at all, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is a component corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs. The number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, but in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b -The part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 LEDs are the letters without foil (that is, the letters formed with the wiring patterns that are copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring patterns are formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged is a foil-extracted area excluding terminals (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer on which the wiring pattern is formed) In the (copper plane), a white resist is formed as a solid region on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern. Covers the foil cutting area and the foil cutting letters, and further decorates the center of the dish. On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314, the part numbers corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are indicated by foil-extracted characters (that is, the characters are indicated by the wiring pattern which is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) The area where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, and the area where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is a foil-extracted area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (In other words, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the region formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and the wiring pattern), the LED mounting on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 The foil removal region and the foil removal letter are respectively formed by a white resist solid-coated on the surface 314x. It is different in that it is covered.

  The white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. It is like that. In addition, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has a reflectance to the front (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300) due to light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs. Can be increased. For this reason, in the case where the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED is printed by black printing. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, and there arises a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in milky white with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the player. Then, there is a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment, the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all for the player is formed as a foil-letter character, and the game is completely for the player. A full color LED is formed by forming a region indicating a position where a full color LED having no relation is arranged as a foil removal region, and covering the foil removal character and the foil removal region with a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface. A wiring pattern of the LED, a foil removal region indicating a mounting position of the full color LED (that is, a region indicating a position where the full color LED is disposed), a number for identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED), Is made of copper foil and the same color, and the white color formed on the LED mounting surface By covering with the dies, a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) is found, or a number for identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED) ) Can be difficult to find.

  In addition, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment, a full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all for the player is formed as a foil-letter character, and the game is completely at the same time for the player. A full color LED is formed by forming a region indicating a position where a full color LED having no relation is arranged as a foil removal region, and covering the foil removal character and the foil removal region with a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface. It can prevent that the reflectance in the LED mounting surface by LED light emission falls.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the same operational effects as the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number for identifying the full color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) and the foil removal region indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, the region indicating the position where the full color LED is disposed). In addition, the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED can be prevented from decreasing.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, since a process called silk printing can be omitted on the LED mounting surface, the board cost can be reduced by reducing the printing cost of silk printing and the number of manufacturing processes of the board. Manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment, in the foil extraction region indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, when forming the region indicating the position where the full color LED is disposed as the foil extraction region). Alternatively, a full-color LED polarity mark may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, which have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are emitted from the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. However, among the LED mounting surfaces due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member disposed in front is the LED. When it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, areas indicating positions where electronic components and connectors are arranged are not shown terminals (not shown) and foil-extracted areas (not shown) except for wiring patterns (not shown) (that is, layers on which wiring patterns are formed (copper planes) ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, a region formed by removing the copper foil), and a component number corresponding to an electronic component or connector is not shown in the vicinity of this region. That is, it is formed as a letter formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, and removing the surrounding copper foil.

[Contrast between the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment and the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has the constant current driving circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silks near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, regions corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as prints, and part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk prints in the vicinity of these regions, respectively. Has been.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central dish 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are located in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, regions corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown as prints, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are silk printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has hdLED1 which is a full color LED. -White resist-extracted characters using a white resist whose part number corresponding to hdLED10 is painted twice (FIG. 173 (c) shows only white resist-excluded characters as part numbers corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED. ) And a region indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is a white resist removal region using a white resist painted twice (see FIG. 173 (c), hdLED7 which is a full color LED). As a corresponding area, only the white resist removal area LSLK7 is shown.) It has been made. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-colored white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of white resist. (That is, the white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the white resists applied twice). Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is an area (position of a predetermined pin number) indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged for the second time among the white resists coated twice. 173 (c), the white resist removal region LSLK7 corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED7 shown in Fig. 173 (c) has the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark to be designated.) Is masked as white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and in the vicinity of these white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and to the left Or, hdLED1 to hd that are full color LEDs above In a state where the ED10 with a corresponding part numbers LED1~LED10 is masked as a white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist. By covering the whole area except for the area masked by the resist, the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are white resist removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10. While being formed, LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are formed as white resist removed characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. As a result, the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist are shaded, and the second layer white resist passes through the second layer white resist to form the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. When the base (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter) is seen, the white resist of the first layer appears pale. That is, when the background of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist-extracted characters in the first layer of white resist. ing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is disposed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector LDLCN in the vicinity of this region. Numbers are formed as white resist-extracted characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. When the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer The white resist of the eyes will appear pale. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removal region in the first layer of white resist can be identified. It has become.

  In addition, since the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is coated with white resist twice, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist, The light refractive index of the white resist layer changes. Accordingly, when the background of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist extracted characters and the white resist extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. Be able to.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). Mounted are hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). Thus, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspections of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are individually performed (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 174, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, A region indicating the position where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged is formed as a white resist removal region using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition, the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are formed in the vicinity of these areas as white resist-extracted characters using a white resist that is painted twice in the same manner as the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. . Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-colored white resist, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. The resist is covered (that is, the white resist is solidly applied to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the white resists applied twice). Then, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is, for example, an area indicating the position where the constant current driving circuit 402bax is to be disposed (second pin arrangement) as the second of the white resists coated twice. The white resist removal region LSLKa as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in Fig. 174 includes a first pin and a 36th pin of the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark for instructing the arrangement.) Is masked as a white resist removal region LSLKa, and in the vicinity of these white resist removal regions LSLKa, a constant current is applied upward. IC1 (see FIG. 174 (a)) which is a part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax is a white resist. In a state that is masked as can characters, the whole of the LED non-mounting surface 402by the left under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, two white resists are formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as with the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The whole area is covered with the white resist and the whole area is covered except for the area masked with the white resist of the second layer, so that the masked area is recessed as a concave portion, and corresponds to the constant current driving circuit 402bax. A white resist removal region LSLKa is formed as a region to be processed, and IC1 which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removal character.

  The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b is a white resist (not shown) indicating a region where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged. In the vicinity of this region, white resist-extracted characters R1, R2, not shown are part numbers corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A part number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor or a capacitor (not shown) formed as R3 is formed as a white resist-excluded letter (not shown). In addition, the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b is formed as a white resist removal area (not shown) indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is formed in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a white resist removal character (not shown).

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same in the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist are shaded, and the LED non-mounting surface of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is passed through the second layer white resist. When the base of 402 by (a copper foil portion and a region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter) is seen, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. As a result, when the background of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters formed in the first layer of white resist are identified. And a white resist removal region can be identified.

  In addition, since the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is coated with white resist twice, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed region in the first layer of white resist, The light refractive index of the second layer of white resist will change. As a result, when the background of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed region in the first layer white resist are identified. Can be done.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN has a housing made of a resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. In this way, resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is increased by the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Be able to.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 173 (b), hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper central decorative substrate 314. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a white resist painted twice, and the region indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged uses a white resist painted twice It is formed as a white resist removal region. Specifically, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is the first of the two-colored white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 is made of white resist. (That is, the white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish as the first of the white resists applied twice). Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the dish is the second area of the white resist that is painted twice, and is an area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers). For example, in the white resist removal area HSLK7 as an area corresponding to the hLED 7 that is a full-color LED, a notch mark that instructs the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hLED 7 that is a full-color LED is included. Are cut out as white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1 which is a full color LED in the vicinity of these white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10. LED which is the part number corresponding to hLED10 ~LED10 is in a state of being masked as white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the disc center on the decorative substrate 314 is covered by a white resist. Thus, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center, the whole is covered with the first layer of white resist, and the second layer of white resist is covered. By covering the whole area except for the area masked by the resist, the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are white resist removed areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. While being formed, LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are formed as white resist-extracted characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 of the dish are the same. As a result, the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist are shaded, and the second layer of white resist passes through the second layer of white resist to form the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314. When the base is viewed, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist-extracted characters in the first layer of white resist. ing.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN is provided in the vicinity of this region. Numbers are formed as white resist-extracted characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. When the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second white resist, the first layer The white resist of the eyes will appear pale. Accordingly, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removal region in the first layer of white resist can be identified. It has become.

  In addition, since the white color resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of the white resist, The light refractive index of the white resist layer changes. As a result, when the background of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed regions in the first layer of white resist are identified. Be able to.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color that is recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector HCN having a housing of the same color as the white resist that is covered (solid-coated) (color that is recognized as the same color) are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 at all. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is individually subjected to a lighting test on the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314, constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors not shown The areas indicating the positions where the electronic components are arranged are formed as white resist removal areas using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314. In the vicinity, the part number corresponding to the electronic part is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a white resist painted twice, like the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer in the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 of the dish are the same. Therefore, the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist are shaded, and the second layer of white resist passes through the second layer of white resist and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish When the substrate of 314y is seen, the white resist of the first layer appears light. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 of the dish center is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters formed on the white resist of the first layer are identified. And a white resist removal region can be identified.

  In addition, since the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 is coated with white resist twice, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted regions in the first layer of white resist, The light refractive index of the second layer of white resist will change. As a result, when the background of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed regions in the first layer of white resist are identified. Can be done.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the plate have no white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is not The package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of the full color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is reflected forward by the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs (that is, toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color LED. The regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is a component corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs. The number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, whereas in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b -The part numbers corresponding to the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed as white resist-extracted characters using a white resist painted twice, and the region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is twice It is formed as a white resist removal area using a painted white resist, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is painted twice with the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. Are formed as white resist-extracted characters using white resists, and regions indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as white resist-extracted regions using twice-painted white resists. Is different in that .

  The white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. It is like that. In addition, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has a reflectance to the front (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300) due to light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs. Can be increased. For this reason, in the case where the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED is printed by black printing. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, and there arises a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in milky white with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the player. Then, there is a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-extracted character using a white resist that is painted twice with a full-color LED that does not have any relation to the game for the player and the corresponding part number. In addition, the area where the full color LED having no relation to the game is arranged is formed as a white resist removal area using a white resist that is painted twice, so that the mounting position of the full color LED is formed. It is difficult to find a white resist removal region (that is, a region indicating a position where a full color LED is arranged) indicating a color, or a number that identifies a full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED). Can do.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-extracted character using a white resist that is painted twice with a full-color LED having no relation to the game at all for the player and the corresponding part number. By forming the area indicating the position where the full color LED, which has no relation to the game at all for the player, is formed as a white resist removal area using a white resist painted twice, the light emission of the full color LED It can prevent that the reflectance in a LED mounting surface falls.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the same operational effects as the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, a white resist removal area (that is, a position where the full color LED is arranged) using a number for identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED) and a white resist that is painted twice indicating a mounting position of the full color LED. Can be made difficult for the player to see, and the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED can be prevented from decreasing.

  In addition, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a step of silk printing can be omitted for the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface, respectively, so that the printing cost for silk printing and the manufacture of the substrate Reduction of the number of processes can contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

  Note that in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, which have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are emitted from the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. However, among the LED mounting surfaces due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member disposed in front is the LED. When it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, regions indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and connectors mounted on the LED mounting surface are arranged are formed as terminals (not shown) and white resist removal regions (not shown), and in the vicinity of these regions. In addition, a part number corresponding to an electronic part such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) and a connector mounted on the LED mounting surface is formed as a white resist letter (not shown).

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist. By covering the whole area except the area masked by the second layer of white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and an area indicating the position where the full-color LED and connector are arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted area. In addition, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and connectors are formed as white resist-extracted characters, but other methods may be used to form white resist-extracted regions and white resist-extracted characters. . For example, an area indicating the position where a full color LED or connector is placed before the white resist is dried after the white resist is solid-coated once or a plurality of times on the LED mounting surface and non-LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate A white resist removal region by pressing the plate, and a method of forming a white resist removal character by pressing a plate showing a part number corresponding to a full color LED or connector, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate, and After the white resist is solidly applied to the non-LED mounting surface once or a plurality of times, the white resist is dried, and then the region indicating the position where the full color LED or connector is arranged is set as a white resist removal region by laser irradiation. The part number corresponding to the full color LED and connector And a method of forming as outline characters.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes various substrates that are supplied from a power source from a power supply substrate and that can control electrical decoration (for example, JP-A-2006-199298 (FIG. 8)). By the way, inside the gaming machine, lines that transmit power to various boards and lines that transmit control signals are routed, and the length of the lines increases, which may cause various boards to malfunction due to the effects of external noise. was there.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a front frame configured to cover a window that opens back and forth with a fluoroscopic protective plate on the game board (see, for example, JP-A-2006-199298 (paragraph [0014]). And FIG. 1)). By the way, by increasing the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame is reduced, so that the decorative board accommodated in the left and right sides also has a band plate shape. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body in the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board is increased, so that the decorative board provided in the game board also has a band plate shape. However, in the case where the light emission control means for controlling the light emission means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a region for drawing the wiring from the light emission control means to the light emission means.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine that is arranged waiting in front of the display screen of an effect display device and includes a movable accessory device that operates at the time of the effect (for example, JP-A-2015-058064). Publication (paragraph [0040], FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9)). In the movable accessory device, a decorative substrate is mounted on which light emitting means facing the back surface of the light emitting portion (lens) on the design surface is mounted. However, there is a possibility that the player can visually recognize the number for identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative board that has no relation to the game for the player, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, etc. through the light emitting portion.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine to which a decorative board on which a light emitting means is mounted has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The player is provided with a variety of effects using the light emission effects by the light emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the reflectance decreases due to the number for identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, etc. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

[12. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 131 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3. However, it passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously per minute. That is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail N. Thus, the flow velocity of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by contact with the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position in the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503 into the game area 5a, the portion is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first start port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side ball 22001 and the obstacle nail N move toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 is displayed. Or, there is a possibility that the first start opening 2002, the general winning opening 2001, etc. of the start opening unit 2100 may be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit). , And is discharged to the upper part of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. In addition to the gate part 2003 of the gate unit 2300, this part is provided with the second start opening 2004 and the general winning opening 2001 of the center accessory 2500, and passes through the gate part 2003 with a certain probability.

  When the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the selected lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port that is closed 2004 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are transferred to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, The lottery of the special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability fluctuation (probability change)”, “per time reduction (shorter time)” is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) In addition, the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and is drawn by lottery. Special lottery results include “Lost”, “Small Bonus”, “2R Big Bonus”, “5R Big Bonus”, “15R Big Bonus”, “Per Probability (Probability Change)”, “Short Time (Time Reduction)”, “ "Short-term accuracy change", "No short-term accuracy change" Per ", and the like.

  The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball B can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the first grand prize port 2005 or the second major prize port 2006 when the first grand prize port 2005 or the second grand prize port 2006 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Thus, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580. Therefore, when the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 can accept the game ball B, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 accepts the game ball B. The game ball B can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize winning opening 2006 is a game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). An open / close pattern that is closed after the open state is received is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) after the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received. If any of the conditions of the passage or acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the first grand prize port 2005 or the second grand prize port 2006 is satisfied, the game ball B cannot be accepted. The open / close pattern to be closed (one open / close pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R big hit”, five rounds for “5R big hit”, and 15 rounds for “15R big hit”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  In this embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a command from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is a state where the image sequence is changed and displayed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of designs are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Are stopped and displayed, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed symbols are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until display is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the front effect unit 2600 and the rear unit 3000, the upper rear Using the movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like as appropriate, it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like, and the player can be entertained by various effects. It can suppress that the interest with respect to falls.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player should perform an operation that should be mistaken or not, the correct operation is performed. To that effect to the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the front effect unit of the table unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the lottery special lottery result. 2600, the lower movable production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, the upper front movable production unit 3300, etc. can be used as appropriate to perform a light emission production, a movable production, a display production, etc. Various effects can also entertain the player, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a plurality of game areas in which a game is played when a game medium is struck by a player's operation and a plurality of gauges arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the game area. Obstacle nails and a plurality of entrances (general winning entrances, starting entrances, variable winning entrances (variable starting entrances, large entrances) that are allowed to receive gaming media within the gaming area and that give benefits according to the acceptance of gaming media A prize winning opening, a prize winning opening), a V winning opening, etc.). Then, when the game medium is received at the entrance, a privilege (payout of the game medium, occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage, etc.) is given, so the game medium is sent to the entrance to the player. It is possible to entertain the game medium driving operation so as to be accepted.

  As this type of gaming machine, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the vicinity of the upper edge and the vicinity of the center in the front-view gaming area, and can rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and project outward. There has been proposed one having a rotating decorative body (for example, JP 2010-279548 A). In the technique of this document, in a normal state, the rotating decorative body is positioned near the upper edge, and the rotating decorative body is lowered to the vicinity of the center in accordance with the gaming state that changes as a game is performed in the game area. By rotating, the entire rotating decoration body rotates in a state of protruding outward, the whole becomes larger, the player can be surprised, and the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance.

  However, in the technique as described in the above document, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies visible from the player side protrude outward due to the rotation in a normal state where the rotation is stopped, the overall size is reduced. However, since the appearance does not change significantly, some players may get bored early with the effects of multiple rotating decorations, and the enjoyment of the effects may be reduced, thereby reducing the interest of the game. It was.

[13. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 153 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 175, and FIG. 177 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not to generate a reach (reach out) when no big hit gaming state is generated Reach determination random number for use in determination, and variable display pattern for use in determination of variable display pattern of special symbol that is variably displayed on first special symbol display and second special symbol display of function display unit 1400 Random numbers, random numbers for jackpot symbols for use in determining the jackpot symbols derived and displayed by the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 when generating the jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot Random number for determining the initial value of the big hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol, function display unit when generating a small hit gaming state 400 random numbers for small hits to be used for determination of small hits symbols derived and displayed by the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display, and for use in determining initial values of random numbers for small hits A random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol is prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol determination for use in determining whether to open or close the movable piece that can accept the game ball of the second starting port 2004, and determination for this normal symbol per unit Normal value for determining the initial value of the normal symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for use, and the normal value for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A random number for symbol variation display pattern is prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main random number built-in main random number circuit incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed in advance based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values within the specified numerical range one after another, and once all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value within the predetermined numerical range and Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at a high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining the big hit It is supposed to be set as.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the normal value for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as “initial value updating type counter”. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 14 when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on or in the main control side power-on process described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the various information stored in the memory as a numerical value is the checksum value stored in the main control power-off process (at power-off) When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when it does not match (sum value), the main control MPU 1310a uses the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol from the built-in nonvolatile RAM. The ID code is taken out, and the same fixed value is always obtained from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determination per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code. Perform initial value derivation to output a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. If the ID code is stored in the ID code, the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and the ID code is executed by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if the counter value that is obtained illegally and the counter value for updating the determination random number per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are given, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a ′ included in the other game board 5 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if an instantaneous power failure is generated at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 of the gate unit 2300 at every predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed to open the game ball to the second starting port 2004. A gaming state that can be accepted cannot be generated.

[13-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns. This indicates the address accumulated on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under control by the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). The main control built-in RAM can be updated by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU 1310a”). The timer setting value is set in the “WDT control register”), the main control built-in WDT is started, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register (incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a) reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) This is a flag indicating whether or not various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing various information and a value of 0 when not erasing various information. . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU 1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on process again. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that there is no power failure warning signal input, it determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing various information and a value 0 when not erasing various information. In step S26, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete various information (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU 1310a uses the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later as the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  In step S32, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control built-in RAM of the main control built-in RAM is in the power recovery state. A work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery time information is read from a ROM (that is, main control internal ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which power is turned on from a power-off state, a state in which power is subsequently recovered from a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high-frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process described later is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines that when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, or in the determination in step S30. When the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0). That is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 in the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a is used when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f instructs the RAM clear, and when various information is erased, the sum values do not match, or the main control side When the power-off process is not normally terminated, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and a random number for normal symbol determination is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol per-determining random number. Set to a random number for decision.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main winning ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 are incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state is stored in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating by hardware. In addition to setting to acquire a random number by latching it, the hard random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at a high speed one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and determined in advance. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The other values are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information by creating a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command To remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various commands are read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning voltage as described above. Is done. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When determining in step S54 that the main control MPU 1310a has not received the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs non-winning random number update processing (step S56). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If there is no power failure warning signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Step S54 to Step S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including game information and other information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S14 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops, for example, the drive signals output to the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, the second attacker solenoid 2516, and the like ( Step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets a RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on process again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent processing is performed. The problems in will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 162 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off. The charged electric charge is applied as + 5V DC for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous interruption. That is, even when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island in the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power supply to the facility is cut off until a time of about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process described later is being performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the island facilities of the game hall In the case where the power supply from is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, a standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery. If a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs immediately before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the electric charge charged to is applied as DC +5 V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within the period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, whereby the main control side described later Even if timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power It may become impossible to complete when processing main control side power-off during the process. For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or a power failure. Thereafter, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the value calculated in the checksum based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. In other words, even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no indication by the staff such as a game hall clerk such as RAM clear, it is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that the game backup information described above is erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24. If the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. The game information and other information (for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is displayed. Various information including the information) can be prevented from being updated, so as never change occurs in the checksum calculation result. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation value stored in step S64. Therefore, the game information that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the pachinko machine Even if the power to 1 is cut off, the game information by the progress of this game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) are supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by supplying the power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2. Backup information for storing various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter). Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control-side power-off processing composed of the processes of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a When the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation value stored in step S64). Therefore, the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby allowing the contents of the main control built-in RAM to be reset. The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in this embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the island facility of the game hall is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control side The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as a direct current + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power outage or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure warning signal is input, the determination in step S24 is performed. As long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated, so that the timer clear is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT by setting a value and clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT and starting the time measurement again.

  The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by such software built-in main control WDT so that the step after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, the number of main winning balls) are set by interrupt permission to prevent progress to the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A mechanism is adopted in which it is possible to avoid updating various information) including information indicating information output determination counter values). Thus, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment in the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) The various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for the counter), etc.) is completely covered by software so that the main control side power-off process is reliably completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and By configuring it in two parts, such as various pieces of information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter), etc., so that it is not changed at all. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are reliably prevented from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and main control is built in as transmission information Store in the transmission information storage area of the RAM This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2514 and information for instructing the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2515 and the second attacker solenoid 2516. . Here, first, the power-on main control return destination command includes information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2514 and information for instructing the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2515 and the second attacker solenoid 2516. In the case where the command is not set, that is, the case where the reservation setting of the command transmitted when the power is turned on at the time of turning on the main control return destination command is not performed in step S50 will be described.

  For example, the main control board 1310 drives the first attacker solenoid 2515 when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs when the first big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 displays the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the game machine is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and the drive of the first attacker solenoid 2515 is started. The first big prize opening 2005 is shifted from the closed state by the opening / closing member to the opened state.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the That is, for example, a game ball enters the first grand prize opening 2005 and is detected by the first big prize opening sensor 2512, and the number of game balls that have entered the first big prize opening 2005 is counted as one count. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits the display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the display command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the first big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the short time state. Even if the number of game balls played can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round of the big hit gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2515 is stopped and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed. The main control board displays a large winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing to shift from the opened state to the closed state (that is, the closing of the first big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100 during the round). 1310 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round of the big hit gaming state (the fifth round), the first attacker solenoid 2515 starts to drive and the first big prize opening 2005 Transition from the state closed by the opening / closing member to the state opened (that is, the first big prize opening 2 To send the 05 th round winning opening open the fifth display command to open start) to instruct the from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the five rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time reduction state, and displays it on the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, a screen (for example, a player indicating that the movable piece is open) that indicates that the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. When the peripheral control board 1510 performs display control on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start opening solenoid 2514 to open the movable piece, and the second start opening is displayed. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while 2004 is open, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, it is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, so that the start port solenoid 2514 starts to be driven and the movable piece is closed. So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the gaming state is such that the gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to convey in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the game instruction screen for entering the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed. There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game he played.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the first attacker solenoid 2515 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310 and the first big prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be informed of the transition to the open state, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, how many rounds it is) Can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but in the big hit gaming state, the first attacker A screen indicating that the first big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member by starting the driving of the renoid 2515 (for example, “It is a big hit. The big prize opening is open. Please display the message “Please play the game so that the ball enters the player” in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine will be A game can be instructed to enter a game ball into the big prize opening 2005. For example, in the above-described example, the player enters a game state in which the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004, and the player When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs in a game state advantageous to the game, and then power is restored, the start port solenoid 2514 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310 A screen that informs that the second start opening 2004 is opened by opening the movable piece (for example, “The movable piece is open. The peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and displays the message “Please play a game” to the player. A game of entering a game ball into the mouth 2004 can be instructed.

  As a result, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if a checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38.

  As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In these main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, a power-on state command is first transmitted, followed by a power-on main control return destination command, and then a power-on main prize ball number. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). When RAM is to be cleared, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), Information indicating which state (probability and time-short state) to return from among the low-probability time-short state, high-probability time-short state, low-probability non-time-short state, and high-probability non-time-short state, and the model code of the pachinko machine And information to be displayed. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), What kind of game specifications (for example, when the probability variation occurs, the state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of special symbol variations (for example, 30 times or 70 times) ), It is possible to specify whether the game specifications (such as so-called ST machines) in which probability fluctuations occur in a state of being played.

  In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is responsible for the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). The main control board for the one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is lost, or it is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the comic F), even though the main control board 1310 flows on the production line to manufacture 1310. There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line.

  For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the workers on the manufacturing line can It is impossible to confirm which copyright of the work the produced main control board 1310 belongs to, and for any copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what type of game it is (a game specification or ST machine that will continue until the next jackpot gaming state occurs when probability changes occur).

  As a result, when the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board for the copyrights of the plurality of types of works is mixed. While 1310 is mixed, it is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreases.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is included. In step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs.

  Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[13-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 175 and 176.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 177 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits in addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol and normal electric symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process described later. Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a detects, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2301, a detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001, and a detection from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002. Signal, detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first start port sensor 3002, detection signal from the second start port sensor 2511, detection signal from the first big prize opening sensor 2512, second large The payout control board 633 is normal for the detection signal from the winning opening sensor 2513, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys the fact that it has been received is read as input information. Stored in the input information storage area of the main control chip RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2511 are read, the start port winning command classified into the other corresponding to this is transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the second start When there is a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2511, a corresponding start mouth winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in a state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal process). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal processing) is performed for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice in total, that is, the twice reading to be compared and the twice reading to be compared for the second time to the fourth time, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering or noise. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002, the first Detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the start port sensor 3002, detection signal from the second start port sensor 2511, first prize winning A detection signal from the sensor 2512, a detection signal from the second big prize opening sensor 2513, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a prize ball control process described later. It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that notifies the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command has been normally received.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal failure monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal trouble monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to the empty terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 whether or not the logical state of the input terminal subjected to the empty terminal process among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to the empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a is classified into a notification display that indicates that a failure has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number that is updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. It should be noted that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update processing. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are set in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. The winning random number update process and the winning random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. However, each time an interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol Also, a mechanism for updating the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 Or create a self-check command to check the connection state between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first grand prize opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is 10 balls. In order to notify that, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, Self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 when the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the winning ball command is not input within a predetermined time. A command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process in step S108, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on this input information. In order to notify that, a main prize ball number information output command classified into others is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is obtained by reading the input information from the input information storage area described above and based on this input information, that is, the general winning port 2001 and the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5. , Game balls that have entered the various winning holes (hereinafter referred to as “various winning holes provided in the game board 5”) such as the second starting opening 2004, the first grand winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006. The number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is counted based on the prize ball, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. It has become. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number is 10 When the number of game balls is over (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the fact, and as transmission information The award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of balls exceeding the value is used as the main prize ball number information output determination counter value. It is adapted to store update.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a reformats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16 bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error canceling navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, the logic of the detection signal from the first starter sensor main side 3002a is compared with the logic of the detection signal from the first starter sensor slave side 3002b, If the logic is different, an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having approximately the same diameter or a ball having approximately the same diameter) with a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) attached. It is judged that fraudulent acts (hereinafter referred to as “radio wave irradiation goto”) by radio wave irradiation using a synthetic resin ball having a diameter are added, and the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment) To do. The value of the radio wave counter is incremented every time it is determined that radio wave irradiation is performed in the fraud detection process. When the RAM is cleared, a value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control timer interrupt process) ), A radio wave irradiation gossip command that is classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave got is being performed is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Here, the radio wave irradiation goat will be briefly described. An illegal ball (a game ball or a metal having almost the same diameter as it) attached with a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter). A ball or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as the ball) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 to enter the first start port 2002, and the first start Radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the game ball is stopped in a region where the game ball passing through the mouth sensor is detected (the ball passage detection region of the first start port sensor). Thus, when radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor (that is, when radio wave irradiation is turned on), the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor is While the logic is that the game ball is not detected, when the radio wave irradiation is not performed (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned off), the logic of the detection signal from the first start sensor becomes the logic that the game ball is detected. . In other words, in the state where the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor, the ball passage detection of the first start port sensor is repeated by repeatedly performing radio wave irradiation ON or radio wave irradiation OFF. A signal indicating that a plurality of game balls have passed through the area can be created in a pseudo manner and output from the first start port sensor to the main control board 4100.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first starter sensor main side 3002a and the first starter sensor slave side 3002b are larger than the false detection prevention distance dimension so that such a radio wave irradiation spot can be found. They are spaced apart by a distance (43 mm in this embodiment). As a result, an illegal ball with a flexible string-like operation line attached is struck into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and enters the first starting port 2002. An area for detecting a game ball passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a (a ball pass detection area of the first start port sensor main side 3002a) or a game ball passing through the first start port sensor sub side 3002b Even if a stopped state can be formed in the area where the movement is detected (the ball passage detection area of the first starter sensor slave side 3002b), the player who performs the fraudulent action turns on the radio wave irradiation or the radio wave irradiation. The logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002b are always different by turning OFF or repeating the operation. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value, a radio wave irradiation goto notification command that is classified into a notification display informing that radio wave irradiation got is performed is created, and the transmission information is described above. It can be stored in the transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the radio wave irradiation got by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall can find the radio wave got at an early stage. It is like that.

  Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the first big prize opening sensor 2512 is input when the game state is not the big hit gaming state (first operation) When a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005), etc., a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main random number circuit with built-in main control, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main random number circuit with built-in main control when the latch signal is input Obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, the obtained random number value is set as a jackpot determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. (Determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (referred to as “special lottery”)) or taking out the value of a counter for updating the big hit symbol random number and determining the probability variation hit stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches the value (determination of whether or not probability fluctuation is generated).

  Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of probability change) set higher than that at the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set for the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (the jackpot determination range), which is read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value for the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in ROM are stored in advance. When determining whether or not the stored jackpot determination value matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random value acquired from the hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range. Depending on whether or not.

  When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special drawing 1 tuning effect are created, whereas when the lottery result is based on the second start port sensor 2511, the special results are generated. FIG. 2 Various commands related to the tuning effect are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on the display, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Also, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when a big hit gaming state is entered, various commands classified as jackpot related (a big hit opening command, a big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, a big winning opening 1 closing display command, a large winning combination, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, the first attacker solenoid 2515 is driven to open and close the opening / closing member When the signal output is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (round) at which the first big prize opening 2005 is opened from the closed state is two, the round of the function display unit 1400 Point to the 2-round indicator lamp to light the 2-round indicator lamp on the display The signal output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is 15, the 15-round display lamp is turned on to turn on the 15-round display lamp of the round display of the function display unit 1400. Set the output of the lighting signal and store it as output information in the output information storage area, or set the output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 so that the presence or absence of probability fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color And stored as output information in an output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the counter value or the like for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol determination random number is extracted and gate information of the main control built-in RAM is used as gate information. Store in the information storage area.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the gate information is stored in the third gate information storage. Store in the parcel.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on with the total number of stored gate information as the hold ball. Based on the gate information, the output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened / closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the opened state, so that a gaming state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 is obtained, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is achieved. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information In the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol taken out matches the judgment value per ordinary symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect production are created and transmitted. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2514 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above, while the extracted normal When the random number for determination per symbol does not match the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. , Create various commands that are classified as related to the usual figure synchronization production, and store it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as output information To remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU 1310a, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. To the first opening solenoid 2515 that opens and closes the opening / closing member of the first big prize opening 2005 when it is in the big hit gaming state, or to the start opening solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the movable piece In addition to driving signal output, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal , Various information related to the game (game information) signal such as start opening prize information output signal 33 or to output.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, classified as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, and classified as related to the jackpot. Various winning commands (for example, the big winning mouth 1 corresponding to the big winning mouth count command based on the detection signal from the first big winning mouth sensor 2512 when the game ball that has entered the first big winning mouth 2005 is detected). Count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to ordinary drawing effects, various commands classified as related to ordinary electronic effects, various commands classified as notification displays, status display Various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as test-related, and other various commands that are classified as other (for example, the main control board 1310 is idle) Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of game balls entered in various winning openings provided on the board 5, the main prize ball number information is used as the main prize ball number information. A main prize ball number information output command for instructing the output signal to be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 is stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, various commands are configured as main peripheral serial data, and are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as DC +5 V when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and completes transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register. Can be done. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure after the power is turned on, this is transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. In order to notify that power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be performed, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, as the main peripheral serial data, the power-on state command is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The status, mode, and sum value that are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and then constitute the main control return destination command when the power is turned on Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in accordance with the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be completed by executing the process. At the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, a power-on main control return destination command for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2514 and the first attacker solenoid 2515 which are electrical drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It can be output. That is, the main control board 1310 uses the main control built-in RAM of step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 175 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power on in step S50 in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. In the setting of the work area, a power-on state command classified as power-on in order to notify that the power was turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, configure the power-on status command as the main peripheral serial data. Send to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then send to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value constituting the main control return destination command at power-on, Subsequently, the main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command upon power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and thumb value.

  For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to display effects. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, that is, in a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the player has failed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  In the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the process shown in FIG. 176, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed, the power-on state command classified into the power-on state When the power is turned on, a main control return destination command at power-on and a main notification ball count information output judgment counter notification command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As peripheral serial data, configure the power-on status command, send it to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, then configure the power-on main control return destination command, Status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process, followed by the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command when the power is turned on. Status, mode, and sum value In order, it transmits to the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[14. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 153 will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 178, and FIG. 180 is a payout control unit following FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[14-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control unit 633a performs the payout control unit power-on process as shown in FIGS. . When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU 633aa. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU 633aa performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU 633aa performs the wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and does not instruct to perform the RAM clear when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI. It is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

  If the payout control MPU 633aa determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU 633aa is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU 633aa does not operate the RAM clear switch 1310f, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, a prize ball information storage area) The logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. This is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc.) is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 633aa.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU 633aa performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete the payout information (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (at power-off) described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that they match, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG determines whether or not the value is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  In the determination of step S528, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is set as the power recovery. Is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU 633aa (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off from a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, determines that the payout information is to be erased, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination in step S528, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is sent from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Entered. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  In the determination in step S540, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 when determining that the power failure warning signal is not input (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Is set.

  In the determination of step S542, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU 633aa returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU 633aa receives a power failure notice signal. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value 2 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when it is determined that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU 633aa performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that indicates that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as driving information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 633c are stored, and payout is based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU 633aa, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as an award ball number information output signal. And outputs to the terminal plate 558 (in this embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided. The prize ball number information output determination counter is provided by the payout motor 584. The number of game balls that have been paid out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later. Is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the payout.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process in step S550 described later, and the stored value is updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( In other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 has reached 10 balls, an award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (in this case, the number of balls exceeding the number is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as the value of the award ball number information output determination counter), and a display signal is output to the error LED display 633c.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit , A BRDY signal, a CR connection signal, and a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, respectively, as input information Store in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU 633aa performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, a ball bite determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball bite state caused by the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout vane 589 is not performed, and the determination condition is set when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual number It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that are not consistent with the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 are repeatedly paid out. At this time, time management of the judgment condition and the mismatch counter reset judgment time set is performed. For example, when the ball scratch determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the ball scratch determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gummy judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU 633aa performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit, while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery By restoring the values to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit immediately before stopping or power failure It is possible to continue from, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is not possible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 633aa to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball play operation determination setting process, For example, if you are not communicating with the CR unit, pay a rental ball as an error status output setting to the CR unit. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thus, in the CR communication processing, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa at the next timer interruption from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before an instantaneous stop, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, and the payout device 580 is supplied to the CR unit. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless rental request signal from the CR unit, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the port connection process in step S550 reads the CR connection signal from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, a pachinko machine. When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, in order to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is possible, PRDY When the logic state of the signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. To convey the fact is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU633aa to CR unit logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 The number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above based on the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full is determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms, and the full tank and the ball shortage check process from the full tank detection sensor 154. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the above-described full tank determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and ball shortage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information for notifying that the game ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored is full is stored in the state information storage area described above. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information that indicates that the lower tray 202 is not full with the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms. When the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned ON, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 574 is When the transition is made from OFF to ON, the above-described ball breakage determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the ball breakage determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball breakage determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and ball breakage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is ON, the ball break is transmitted to indicate that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than a predetermined number. The ball breakage information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU 633aa performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball play are performed, a retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU 633aa performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 633c of the payout control board 633 is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, the above-described ball break information is read from the state information storage area, and when the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this ball break information Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays based on the various information are created. To the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball break information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not greater than a predetermined number based on the ball break information, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S540, and this power failure warning If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552. In step S5, timer update processing is performed in step S5. 4 performs a CR communication process, performs a full tank and out of ball check process in step S556, performs a command reception process in step S558, performs a command analysis process in step S560, performs a main operation setting process in step S562, In step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed. In step S566, command transmission processing is performed. In step S568, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 633aa varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 633aa preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 633aa secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU 633aa has received a power failure notice signal, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control MPU 633aa stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU 633aa performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a setting for prohibiting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU 633aa enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in this order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU 633aa is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Note that the processing in step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and a payout control unit power-on process is performed by power recovery thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[14-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 181 (step S590). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, a value of 1 when 2 ms elapses, and a value of 0 when 2 ms elapses. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU 633aa switches (returns) the register (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU 633aa sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[15. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 153 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 184 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 185 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 186 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

  As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on a single semiconductor chip.

[15-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIG. 182 under the control of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, and the like are performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a very short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, for example, a command related to control of game effects that is output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. Current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing this current time information acquisition process so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to notify that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be received. The value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again to check whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset. ing.

  In step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process is to be executed, first, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG. Value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a rendering operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, and a press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. Based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382, the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and Various information obtained by operating the press operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and the press operation) Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set). Monitors operation whether the rotational direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, in the display data creation processing described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates it on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thereby, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is performed, outputting the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. Yes. This can prevent a delay in processing time, but a so-called frame drop occurs. However, a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a main body frame by sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to effects such as music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as “various speakers”).

  Subsequent to step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and outputs to the various speakers from the set output channel. Output. Thereby, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to indicate what screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. The pointer is updated.

  In the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to indicate the number of light emission data to be output from the head light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound command data for instructing sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The pointer is updated in order to instruct what sound command data from the command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data is output. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to do so. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data to be performed, it is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the received command analysis process, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyzes various commands. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands ( (Extract) Set in RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a indicates that the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start opening start winning effect, or a normal symbol. Normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol storage command output when the number of start hold changes, first large It is analyzed whether or not it is a large winning opening 1-count display command that is output every time a game ball is received in the winning opening 2005, and it is recognized which gaming state is present.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyzes various commands. The various commands include various commands classified as related to Special Figure 1 tuned effects, various commands classified as related to Special Figure 2 tuned effects, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, Various commands categorized in relation to figure production effect, various commands categorized in relation to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized in notification display, various commands categorized in status display, various commands categorized in test relation, and There are various other commands.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning processing, when various commands classified into notification display are included in the command analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is obtained from the control ROM 1510b. Read (extract) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  When the screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, It is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and outputs sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. At the same time, set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d performs the sound volume adjustment operation signal based on the sound volume adjustment operation signal. The slide position is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the volume corresponds to the slide position of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and is set in this sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018 Sound data is output to various speakers from the output channel. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various performances flow from various speakers.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the sound volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d. The sound source of the control IC 1510a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a game hall clerk slides the volume adjustment switch 1510d to set the volume to a low level, although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from various speakers is reduced, the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs in the player, or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the attendant such as the store clerk of the game hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of the malfunction or the player's fraud by the notification sound. Further, based on the current volume set by the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or sound effect. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen (image) unfolded on the effect display device 1600 may be rendered more powerful, or may be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the content stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied and backed up to the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the content stored in the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 is copied to the SDRAM 1510c1, Copy and backup to the steady processing backup area provided in 1510c2.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1008, and the value 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer start process is started. , Step S1014,..., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0. Become. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is transmitted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to the peripheral control IC 1510a. A value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[15-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 183 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, End the routine. On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1045 that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB. -A value 1 is set in FLG (step S1050), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the process is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady process starts to be executed from the beginning, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In step S1008 in the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process), a value of 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. V blank signal interrupt processing, and in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 182, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 so that the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. To have. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[15-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 182 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. 184 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in the routine 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU adds the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments, step S1102). By adding 1 to this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In accordance with the drive data to be driven, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the movable effect unit provided in the game board 5 are input, thereby history information of detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original information). Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. It is possible to acquire the original position, the movable position, and the like of various movable bodies (various decorative bodies) included in the movable effect unit provided in the game board 5 from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. it can.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, a rotation operation unit) 302 (rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are backed up. Copy and backup to a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In the present embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are set in different areas, and the SDRAM 1510c1. , 1510c2 is set to a different area from the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided to SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes relating to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 182, various processes related to the effects in steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. Yes. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to happen before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[15-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a takes the main peripheral serial data as 1 byte (8 bits) from the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a. ) Is received in the reception buffer, and when this acquisition is completed, an interrupt is generated at this timing, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 185 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the receivable period, 1-byte information received from the serial I / O port reception buffer of the peripheral control IC 1510a is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented). Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, is still in the second byte of the main circumference serial data. If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has not been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the reception counter SRXC has a value 3, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, at the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated. The environment is susceptible.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to main peripheral serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

  In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a matches the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 with the sum value calculated in step S1212. Is determined, the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a (step S1216). ), This routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a obtains the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 If it is determined that the sum calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated.

[15-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1302 that a power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has not passed 2 macroseconds, the CPU returns to step S1302, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and if a power failure warning signal is not input. When the determination is made, the routine is terminated as it is, while when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds has elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  In step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, power saving processing is performed. This is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off excitation of motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing the power, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a can receive at least the period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied and backed up to the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312, that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, returns to step S1312, and whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Determine whether. In other words, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. By continuing to make an infinite determination in this way, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a cannot output a clear signal to the external WDT when determining that the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination of step S1312. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312, that the power failure warning signal has been input, the CPU performs the WDT clear process in step S1314, and the peripheral control IC 1510a The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 182 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. It does not take. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted because the WDT clear process is not executed. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. When the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment,
Thereby, in the normal state, the central decorative body 3351 in the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the retreat position raised near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a, and the two first A first position where a pair of first projecting decorative part 3352a and second projecting decorative part 3353a of projecting decorative body 3352 and second projecting decorative body 3353 overlap each other on the left and right sides of central decorative body 3351. Is located. Here, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a is arranged on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is arranged on the front side on the right side. For this reason, the central decorative body 3351 can be seen near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a, and the first projecting decorative part 3352a and the second projecting decorative part 3353a are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351. And the game area 5a is decorated with the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. In a normal state, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a that are located at the first position overlap in the front-rear direction. Since only the decorative portion 3353a can be seen from the front (player side), it is difficult to notice the presence of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the rear side. It can be recognized that there are only a number of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a that are currently visible. When the LEDs mounted on the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board are caused to emit light in a normal state, the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative part 3352a, and the first Since the two protruding decorative portions 3353a can be decorated with light emission, the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion are formed by the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a. The portion 3353a can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351. Further, in the normal state, the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are in the retracted position near the upper edge of the front viewing game area 5a. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged at the center in the area 5a is not blocked by the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351, and is in a good state from the player side. The effect image can be visually recognized, and the player can entertain the effect image.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the game state that changes as a game is played in the game area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position toward the lower appearance position. Then, the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are lowered together. At this time, on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353, and on the right side of the central decorative body 3351, on the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the remaining first protruding decorative body 3352, The lower end portions of the second link rods 3304 arranged on the left and right are respectively attached, and the upper end portions of the left and right second link rods 3304 are respectively attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable within a predetermined range. Are attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the central decorative body 3351, and are thus lowered together with the central decorative body 3351. Two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and second protruding decorative bodies 3353 (first protruding decorative portions 3352a and second protruding decorative bodies The second link rod 3304 of the left and right by part 3353A) is pulled to the same downwardly moving direction of the central decorative body 3351, respectively, the upper end portion of the second link rod 3304 is able to slide downwardly relative to the unit base 3301. Since the upper ends of the left and right second link bars 3304 are slidable in the vertical direction within a range shorter than the moving distance (lifting distance) of the central decorative body 3351 by the first link bar 3303, the central decorative body Before 3351 reaches the appearance position of the descending end, the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 reach the lower end in the sliding direction. Then, after the upper end of the second link bar 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, when the central decorative body 3351 further moves in the direction of the lower appearance position, the lower end of the second link bar 3304 no longer appears. The right and left sides of the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 which are about to descend together with the central decorative body 3351 by the left and right second link rods 3304 are not allowed. The first projecting decorative part 3352a and the left second projecting decorative part 3353a are pulled toward the upper unit base 3301. By this force, the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 become the central decoration. The first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b attached to the rear side of the body 3351 are arranged in the center of the central decorative body 3351. Rotating in different directions with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction as the center, the first projecting decorative part 3352a and the second projecting decorative part 3353a on both the left and right sides are eliminated from the first position where they overlap in the front-rear direction. Will move to the second position. As a result, the first projecting decorative part 3352a and the second projecting decorative part 3353a, which were seen as one on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, are rotated so that the fan spreads in two, and the central decorative body 3351 and The four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a extending radially from the central decorative body 3351 can form a single large decoration and show to the player. Accordingly, since all the number of the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a appear around the central decorative body 3351 moved to the center of the game area 5a, the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3352a and second An increase in the number of projecting decorative portions 3353a makes it possible to strike the player's intentions, and the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and second projecting decorative portions 3353a around the central decorative body 3351 spread to increase the overall decoration. Can be increased, and a strong impact can be given to the player to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position of the ascending end to the appearing position of the descending end by the upper front drive motor 3302, the upper end portions of the left and right second link rods 3304 become the lower end portions in the sliding direction. Until reaching the lower end of the first link rod 3303, the two first projecting decorative portions 3352a and 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 overlap each other. After the lower position of the second link bar 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, the central ornament 3351 is moved in the direction of the appearance position (downward). ) To move to the second position where the overlap has been eliminated from the first position where the two left and right first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a overlap each other. The center decorative body 3351 is radially spread around the central decorative body 3351, and the player can be shown a movable effect that moves in two stages by the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353. Therefore, by appropriately controlling the upper front drive motor 3302, it is possible to stop the movement (production) in the first stage or move (production) to the second stage. The variation of the movable performance using the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be increased, the player can be entertained by various performances, and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the central decorative body 3351 can be moved from the retracted position of the ascending end to the appearing position of the descending end by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the gaming state, When the game state changes, the player can be thrilled by whether or not the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. Then, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position side by the upper front drive motor 3302 and moved to the first stage where the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 do not rotate, Since the decoration body 3351, the two first protrusion decoration bodies 3352, and the second protrusion decoration body 3353 move downward in a normal state, there seems to be something good for the player. And can give a sense of expectation to the game. Further, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position of the descending end until the second stage, that is, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a radially spread around the central decorative body 3351. The central decorative body 3351, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can show a large decoration to the player, and the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and Since the second projecting decorative portion 3353a is lowered, it is possible to make the player feel like being posted from the heavens, so that the advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage over the player Can cause the player to think that the game will occur, increase the expectation of the game, and make it difficult for the player to get bored. Against it is possible to suppress the lowering of interest.

  In this way, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position, the movement of the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be changed in two stages. Therefore, the possibility (expected value) of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous differs between when the player stops at the first stage and when stopped at the second stage. It can be recognized that the expected value is higher in the second stage than in the first stage, and the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body With the body 3353, various expected values can be displayed to the player.

  Further, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position to secure a space around the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a can be moved radially from the first position to the second position around the central decorative body 3351 at the appearance position, and can be expanded radially. The body 3351, the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352, and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can form a decoration as large as possible. Therefore, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the gaming state, the central decorative body 3351 and four first protrusions radially extending around the central decorative body 3351 in the vicinity of the center of the gaming area 5a. Since the player can be shown a large decoration by the decoration part 3352a and the second projecting decoration part 3353a, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5a. In addition, a large decoration by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, when the central decorative body 3351 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the first position. Since the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are moved by one upper front drive motor 3302, When performing an effect (movable effect) using the central decorative body 3351, the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352, and the second projecting decorative body 3353, only one upper front drive motor 3302 needs to be controlled. Such a load can be reduced. Therefore, when performing an effect using the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353, an effect using other movable decorative bodies, light emitting decorative bodies, etc. is performed simultaneously. However, since it is possible to suppress an increase in the load related to the control of the production, the control of the production becomes unstable due to overload, so that the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 are driven by the upper front drive motor 3302. And the movement of the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be prevented from being jerky, and the production effect using the central decorative body 3351, the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be surely exhibited. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, as described above, from the middle when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the second position. Since it is made to move, the speed which the 1st protrusion decoration part 3352a and the 2nd protrusion decoration part 3353a move (rotate) to a 2nd position becomes relatively faster with respect to the moving speed of the center decoration body 3351. Therefore, the four first projecting decorative parts 3352a and the second projecting decorative part 3353a can be moved so as to suddenly spread around the central decorative body 3351. An effect using the one projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, as described above, after the central decorative body 3351 has moved to some extent from the retracted position to the appearance position, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the first. The position is moved from the position to the second position. That is, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a are moved from the vicinity of the upper edge of the front view game area 5a to the center side to some extent, and then the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a are radially spread around the central decorative body 3351. Since the first projecting decorative part 3352a and the second projecting decorative part 3353a are moved to the second position, the first projecting decorative part 3352a and the second projecting decorative part are moved from the position to the second position. The part 3353a can be prevented from coming into contact with other members, and the first projecting decorative part 3352a, the second projecting decorative part 3353a, and other members can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board are caused to emit light, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and Since the second projecting decoration part 3353a can be independently decorated with light emission, the central decoration body 3351 and the first projecting part 3353a can be illuminated with the central decoration body 3351, the first projecting decoration part 3352a, and the second projecting decoration part 3353a. The decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351. Accordingly, before the upper front drive motor 3302 lowers the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353 from the retracted position to the appearance position, the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative body The player can decorate the central decorative body 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on both the left and right sides with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board and the second protruding decorative part. Therefore, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the central decorative body 3351 or the like is moved to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302. I can do it.

  Then, the upper front drive motor 3302 causes the central decorative body 3351 to descend to the appearance position on the center side of the game area 5a, and four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and second protruding decorative portions 3353a are radially formed around the central decorative body 3351. If it spreads over, it can surprise the player and think that there is something good, and can raise the player's expectation for the game. When the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate are formed by the upper front central decorative substrate, the first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate, and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate. When the two-projection decoration portion 3353a is light-decorated, it is possible to show the player a decoration that greatly shines in the center of the game area 5a. Therefore, an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage over the player (for example, “big hit game” ")" Can be generated, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be enhanced, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center in the front-view game area 5a, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the center of appearance in the game area 5a by the upper front drive motor 3302, the center Since the effect image (a part) is blocked by the decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353, the player may notice the lowering of the central decorative body 3351 or the like to be noticed. The first projecting decoration part 3352a and the second projecting decoration part 3353a can be shown which move from the first position to the second position and spread radially around the central decoration body 3351. Therefore, in the center of the game area 5a, a large decoration by the central decorative body 3351, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be surely shown to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be reliably played.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a, and the game ball B is not included in the area except for the frame of the center accessory 2500. You can play games that are distributed. A front effect unit 2600 having a transparent front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame, and an effect arranged rearward through the front light guide plate 2610. The effect images displayed on the display device 1600 can be enjoyed. In this state, a predetermined LED 2630 among a plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the upper peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 via the reflector 2620 in accordance with a game state that changes as a game is performed in the game area 5a. When one of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d is caused to emit light, the identification on the peripheral surface of the front light guide plate 2610 corresponding to the LED 2630 Light is irradiated to the light incident part 2612 (any one of the first specific light incident part 2612a, the second specific light incident part 2612b, the third specific light incident part 2612c, and the fourth specific light incident part 2612d), and the specific light incident The pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a, second pattern 2614b, third picture) corresponding to the light incident on the front light guide plate 2610 from the light portion 2612 2614C, so that the fourth picture 2614D, one) is the luminous display. More specifically, the periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted in the fixed recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, and from the plurality of through holes 2622 passing through the fixed recess 2621 to the specific light incident portion 2612 side. Since the plurality of LEDs are attached to the reflector 2620 via the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 so as to face the LED 2630, the LED 2630 can be brought as close as possible to the peripheral surface (specific light incident portion 2612) of the light guide plate body 2611. In addition, it is possible to reliably irradiate the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 with the light from the LED 2630, and it is possible to prevent the light from the LED 2630 from diffusing through the through hole 2622. The portion 2612 can be prevented from being irradiated with light.

  And the light which entered into the light-guide plate main body 2611 from the specific light-incidence part 2612 corresponds to the corresponding reflective recessed part 2613 (1st reflective recessed part 2613a, 2nd reflective recessed part 2613b, 3rd reflective recessed part 2613c, 4th reflective recessed part 2613d. ), The light emitted from the reflective recess 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. At this time, since the reflective concave portion 2613 extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the reflective concave portion 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. Since the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 is included, the light guide plate main body 2611 is reflected by the reflective recess 2613 to the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a (light guide plate main body 2611). The light reflected or refracted in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light reaches the reflection concave portion 2613, and the pattern 2614 composed of the reflective concave portion 2613 appears to be lit and displayed. On the other hand, the light that has entered the light guide plate body 2611 from the specific light incident portion 2612 reaches the reflective concave portion 2613 that does not correspond to the specific light incident portion 2612, but the reflective concave portion 2613 that does not correspond to the specific concave portion 2613 Since the light extends in a direction different from the direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the specific light incident portion 2612 on which light is incident, the direction of light reflected or refracted by the reflective recess 2613 is perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate body 2611. It is a direction inclined with respect to a certain direction, and it does not reach the eyes of the player seated in front of the game area 5a, and the non-corresponding reflection recess 2613 does not appear to shine. In this way, when the LED 2630 irradiates the specific light incident portion 2612 with light, only the reflective concave portion 2613 corresponding to the specific light incident portion 2612 reflects or refracts light in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate body 2611. Thus, it reaches the eyes of the player seated in front of the game area 5a, and it can be shown to the player as if only the pattern 2614 formed of the corresponding reflective recess 2613 is lit and displayed. .

  Therefore, by appropriately selecting the LED 2630 to emit light and changing the specific light incident portion 2612 irradiated with light, the pattern 2614 displayed and emitted on the front light guide plate 2610 can be changed variously. By displaying 2614 in a light-emitting manner, the player can be surprised and entertained, and it is difficult to get tired of the player, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. Since the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 are formed so as to be sequentially related to each other, a plurality of LEDs 2630 (a first LED group 2630a, a second LED group 2630b, a third LED group) When the 2630c and the fourth LED group 2630d) are caused to emit light sequentially, a plurality of patterns (first pattern 2614a, second pattern 2614b, third pattern 2614c, and fourth pattern 2614d) are sequentially emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610. As shown, the player can show a light-emitting display with movement.

  Specifically, the first design 2614a, the second design 2614b, the third design 2614c, and the fourth design 2614d are displayed in the order of light emission. When the light emitting display is repeated in order, the player can show the light emitting display that continues to move from the outside toward the center by the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to make the illusion that the momentum is concentrated on the person, and to raise the sense of expectation for the game by thinking that there is something good. On the other hand, on the other hand, the fourth design 2614d, the third design 2614c, the second design 2614b, and the first design 2614a are displayed in the order of light emission. When the light emission display is repeated in order from the four patterns 2614d, the player can show the player the light emission display that continues to move from the center toward the outside by the plurality of patterns on the light guide plate. The player can have an illusion of spreading from the center or an illusion of moving forward, so that the player can foresee a change in the gaming state. In this way, since the player can show a moving light-emitting display like an animation, the player is strong by the moving light-emitting display by the front light guide plate 2610 that has never been seen in the pachinko machine 1 so far. It can give an impact, attract the player's interest strongly, and can make the player think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage will occur. The expectation can be raised and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is displayed by the LED 2630, the light emission is performed. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be viewed in a good state from the player side, making it difficult to see the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and entertain the game in a good state.

  Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the case where the light guide plate main body 2611 is attached by two members as in the prior art. Can be eliminated, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light incident portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 can be reliably irradiated with light from the LED 2630, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be irradiated. It is possible to reliably display the light emission.

  Furthermore, since the pattern 2614 is configured by a plurality of reflective recesses 2613 extending in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connected to the specific light incident portion 2612, the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 are arranged on the light guide plate body 2611. The front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) can be guided by arranging a plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 on the upper side of the light guide plate body 2611. It can be disposed only on the upper side of the optical plate body 2611. Accordingly, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is not surrounded by the outer periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611, and compared with the case where the front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611. Thus, since it is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged at the rear, it is possible to make the effect image and the like easier to see from the player side. It is possible to entertain the production image in a good state and suppress a decrease in interest, and to make the pachinko machine 1 with a feeling of opening because there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a in front view, The pachinko machine 1 having appealing power that can attract the player's interest by improving the appearance of the game area 5a can be obtained.

  In addition, as described above, a plurality of (in this case, four) patterns 2614 can be displayed by light emission with one front light guide plate 2610, so that it is not necessary to use a plurality of light guide plates as in the prior art. The size in the front-rear direction of the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614 can be made as small (thin) as possible, and the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, so the front light guide plate 2610 is moved to the player side. The position can be as close as possible, and a large space can be easily secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like are provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. The pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal to the player by improving the appearance in the game area 5a can be arranged, and in addition to the effect by the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect Various effects can be provided to the player by performing the movable effects by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. be able to.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) is made by matching the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. Or a plurality of LEDs 2630) from the player side, making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who thought that 2610 did not exist and to surprise the player with light emission display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, since the front cover 2650 prevents the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from being seen from the player side, it is possible to prevent the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated by seeing the reflector 2620 and the like. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are not seen from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630, and thus the LED 2630. The display 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 is displayed in a light-emitting manner, so that the player can be greatly surprised by the light-emitting display that the player has not predicted, and the player 26 can enjoy the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614. It is possible to think that there is something good for the game, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image behind the front light guide plate 2610 is provided, a light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610, and an effect image by the effect display device 1600 Since it is possible to show the player a combined effect, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 It is possible to entertain the player by directing and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610, the distance to the effect display device 1600, Therefore, by displaying the effect image related to the plurality of patterns 2614 displayed and emitted on the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to add a sense of depth and a three-dimensional appearance to the displayed pattern 2614. An effect (display effect) that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a has an upper rear left decorative body 3220 in which decorations are formed on the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 that move in the vertical direction, and The upper rear left decorative body 3240, the upper rear left decorative body 3220, and the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs for light-decorating the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are mounted are attached. Therefore, the weight applied to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 is heavy, and a force for moving the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward by gravity is exerted greatly. In this state, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is transported or the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted or vibrated by the pachinko machine 1. Or when a force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is further applied, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212, Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240), the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are about to descend, so that the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the output member 3253 tries to rotate, the roller 3254 is accommodated by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. The roller 3254 is pressed between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and a force to rotate the storage case 3251 by the plurality of rollers 3254 acts. Will be. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the storage case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, frictional resistance is generated between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the storage case 3254 is interposed via the plurality of rollers 3254. The force to rotate 3251 resists the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, so that the housing case 3251 does not rotate and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. As described above, output is performed according to the rotation load from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from being arbitrarily lowered. Accordingly, since the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be locked by the clutch mechanism 3250, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are arbitrarily used during transportation and installation. By moving to the left, it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from colliding with other members at the moving end, and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 and other members from being damaged. In addition, it is possible to surely enjoy the movable effects by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is shipped at the manufacturing plant, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are shipped in the state of the origin even when the upper rear left decorative body 3240 is shipped. Since it is possible to prevent the decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving without permission, the origin adjustment of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is performed when installed in the island facility of the game hall. There is no need to perform the operation, the labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 can be saved, and the burden on the installation can be reduced.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is installed or maintained, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved from their normal positions (origin positions) for some reason. In this case, when the operator tries to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to the proper positions by hand, the clutch mechanism 3250 uses the tightening spring as the torque limiter on the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are prevented from moving by locking the rotation on the output side according to the rotational load by tightening with 3255, so that the operator can move the upper rear left decorative body. Further force is applied to the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 in order to move the 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. When the force to rotate the housing case 3251 via the plurality of rollers 3254 is greater than the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, the housing case resists the frictional resistance. Slip occurs between the spring 3255 and the tightening spring 3255, the housing case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates together with the housing case 3251, and the output member 3253 rotates. Is transmitted to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side via the input member 3252, so that a strong force acting on the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is generated. The upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side can be escaped, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and upper It is possible to rear right decorative body 3240 and the clutch mechanism 3250 and the like can be prevented from being damaged.

  Also, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear left unit 3210 in the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 according to the gaming state that changes as a game is performed in the game area 5a. When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the rotation is transmitted through the clutch mechanism 3250 so that the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attached to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 are in front view game area 5a. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 attached to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are respectively lowered, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and The player is surprised by the descent (appearance) of the upper rear right decoration 3240 The player can focus on the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to enjoy the movement and decoration of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. Lowering the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can make the player think that there is something good, and increase the sense of expectation for the game and decrease the interest Can be suppressed.

  At this time, a clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decorative body 3220 and upper rear right decorative body 3240). Therefore, the vibration from the production operation unit 301 and other movable ornaments that can be operated by the player, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left ornament 3220, the upper rear right ornament 3240, the upper portion Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 attempts to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 going down due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the output member 3253. The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the A state where the roller 3254 has been bitten between the inner surface and the cam surface 3253b of over scan 3251, the force to rotate the accommodating case 3251 by a plurality of rollers 3254 is to act. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the storage case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, frictional resistance is generated between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the storage case 3254 is interposed via the plurality of rollers 3254. The force to rotate 3251 resists the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, so that the housing case 3251 does not rotate and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. As described above, output is performed according to the rotation load from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from dropping freely, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 can be controlled. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from unexpectedly moving (falling), and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be moved unintentionally, thereby distrusting the player. Giving the player the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The decrease in the flavor can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side are going to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position via the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are various. A variety of performance patterns that stop moving up and down at the position can be shown to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with the movable effects of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 even if the upper rear left decorative body 3240 is stopped. The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and early damage to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload can be prevented, and the upper It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by avoiding interruption of the game due to breakage of the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. be able to.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 145 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively moved by lock springs 3260. When urging to the projecting portion 3252a side close to each, when a force is applied to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately applied. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the lock is applied after the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 until this can be reduced as much as possible. Thus, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without being jerky. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and enjoys the movable performance by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Since the clutch mechanism 3250 has a relatively simple configuration using the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, a plurality of rollers 3254, etc., the clutch mechanism 3250 has two planetary gear mechanisms as the clutch mechanism. Compared to the above, the overall size can be easily reduced. Therefore, by reducing the size of the clutch mechanism 3250, a space for arranging the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (or other members) can be provided. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made relatively large and conspicuous, and the large upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made more conspicuous. The pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be obtained by attracting the player's interest strongly.

  Further, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 having the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, respectively, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 are provided according to the gaming state. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is appropriately lifted and lowered via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 to play various patterns of movable effects by the two upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. Can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. At this time, each of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 includes the clutch mechanism 3250, and thus, as described above, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, respectively. Therefore, the movement of each of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, when the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 are moved downward according to the gaming state, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper By bringing the rear right decorative bodies 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body. This can give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage over the player due to the appearance of a large decorative body (for example, “ It can be thought that a big hit game ") will occur, and the expectation for the game can be increased and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other and joined together, the upper upper right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side is moved by contacting each other. However, since each has the clutch mechanism 3250, as described above, the force (from the output side) to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 even if a force to rotate) is applied, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are used. The movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving, and It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from returning due to the movement, and it is possible to reliably play a movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 come into contact with each other. It is possible to entertain those who have fun and suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be illuminated and decorated by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board to emit light according to the gaming state. Therefore, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be conspicuous to attract the player's attention, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be decorated and moved. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are illuminated and decorated, and it can be thought that there is something good for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and to suppress the decrease in interest. Further, by providing the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board, the weights related to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increase, and the gravity and inertial force acting on the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 become larger. Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided as described above, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be reliably stopped via the left base 3211 and the right base 3231. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 that can emit light by the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board from moving unintentionally. It is possible to cause the upper rear right decoration body 3240 to perform a desired movement with a high production effect, and to delight the player and suppress the decrease in interest. Rukoto can.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. 3253 is rotated, and the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, so that the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force for rotating the housing case 3251 is applied via the plurality of rollers 3254, a force (torque) for rotating the housing case 3251 is a frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. Is larger between the housing case 3251 and the clamping spring 3255. Rigashoji, the accommodating case 3251 is able to rotate. Then, by rotating the housing case 3251, the output member 3253 rotates through the plurality of rollers 3254, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253 abuts on the protruding portion 3252 a of the input member 3252, The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated with a strong force from the output side, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 can be strongly bitten and cannot be unlocked, or the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration The body 3240, the output member 3253, and the housing case 3251 can be prevented from being damaged, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side on the left and right sides of the lower center lifting base 3121 and the lower center lifting base 3121 in the front view game area 5a. After the elevating base 3171 is lowered, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body are moved by a slider or the like (sliding mechanism) attached to the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171. 3173 is slid to the outside in the left-right direction, and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 below the game area 5a is moved downward. In this normal state, the effect image displayed by the effect display device 1600 can be seen in the center of the front-view game area 5a, and the lower front center decoration 3111 (lower rear center decoration) The four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged in the left-right direction of the body 3122) and the central movable unit 3125 attached to the top of the body 3122) can be seen, and separated from the left and right ends of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 in the left-right direction. The left side rotation decoration body 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173 of the lower left side production unit 3150 and the lower right side production unit 3170 are seen at positions, and the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 are seen thereabove. Furthermore, the production operation that the player can operate on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 below the game area 5a. As part 301 rotates the operation portion 302 of the annular and the pushing operation section 303 placed in the ring being visible.

  In this state, when a game state is changed by playing a game in the game area 5a (the first special lottery result or the first lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004) Two rotating lots 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front center decorative body 3111 or four rotary ornaments arranged side by side by the lower central lifting base 3121) 3126 is lifted together with the lower rear center decorative body 3122, the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 raised by the lower central lifting base 3121 are rotated, the lower left slide drive motor and the lower right side of the lower left side rendering unit 3150 A pair of left side rotating decorative bodies 3153 and a right support are provided by a lower right slide drive motor or the like (slide mechanism) of the effect unit 3170. The left rotating decorative body 3173 slides in the left-right direction, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 rotate, and the slide mechanism and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 move left. The side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 are lined up with the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 in the left-right direction, or the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. Or the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be shown to the player so that the player can move. Thus, the player can see the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorative bodies 3126), the left side rotating decorative body 3153, and the like. Right side rotating decorative body 3173 and left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 It is possible to focus on the right Sabusaido rotating decorative body 3175 and the like, it is possible to entertain the movable effects by them.

  Further, when the lower center elevating base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower rear center ornament 3122 emits light and the lower front center ornament 3111 emits light to display a downward arrow, or lower center elevating By raising the base 3121 and causing the plurality of LEDs on the lower central decorative board to emit light from the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111, a large downward arrow is displayed by light emission, or a pair of lower left side up and down Since the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 are raised and the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. It is possible to entertain the player by directing, and the downward light is displayed. Arrow makes it possible to guide the viewpoint of the player's downward staging operation unit 301, it is possible to prompt the operation of the staging operation unit 301 to the player. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, or the press operation unit 303 is pressed, so that the player participates in the player participation type effect. And can entertain.

  Accordingly, since various movable effects, light-emitting effects, and player participation effects as described above can be performed, various combinations of effects can be provided to the player by combining them appropriately. Since it can make the player hard to get bored and make it difficult for the player to predict the production pattern, the player can be surprised by the unexpected production. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the pair of left side rotation decoration bodies 3153 and right side rotation decoration bodies 3173, and the pair of left sub-side rotation decoration bodies 3155 and right sub-side rotation decoration bodies 3175 respectively extend in the left-right direction. It is designed to rotate independently around its axis and has four decorative portions 3127, 3154, and 3156, which are different from each other in the circumferential direction. The facing surface (decoration part 3127, decoration part 3154, decoration part 3156) can be changed, and the player can be entertained by changing the appearance (decoration) in the game area 5a in various ways.

  In addition, when the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the pair of left side rotation decoration bodies 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the pair of left sub-side rotation decoration bodies 3155 and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175, the rotation is stopped. Various messages are given to the player as decorations by stopping their rotation so that the combination of the decoration part 3127, the decoration part 3154, and the decoration part 3156 facing the player is a predetermined combination. Since it can be provided, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “hit game”) that is advantageous to the player is generated by the combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, and the decorative portion 3156 that are stopped rotating. By representing (expected value), each of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 and the pair of left side rotating decorative bodies 3153 according to the gaming state. And the right side rotating decorative body 3173 and the pair of left subside rotating decorative body 3155 and right subside rotating decorative body 3175 are rotated by a combination of a decorative part 3127, a decorative part 3154, and a decorative part 3156 having higher expected values. Depending on whether or not to stop, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower rear center decorative body 3122 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged in the vertical direction and capable of independently emitting light, if the plurality of light emitting regions 3122a emit light simultaneously, A downward arrow can be displayed in a light-emitting manner, and if the plurality of light-emitting regions 3122a are repeatedly light-emitted in order from the top, the player's line of sight is directed to the effect operation unit 301 below by light emission that flows from top to bottom. The guidance operation unit 301 can be more easily guided, and the player can be more urged to operate the production operation unit 301 to reliably operate the production operation unit 301.

  Further, since the production operation unit 301 includes an annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by the player. Since the player can perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, various combinations of the operations of the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be used to make a variety of player participation type patterns. It is difficult to get tired of, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring of the annular rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation operation unit 302 surrounds the pressing operation unit 303, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased. It is possible to attract the player's interest with the large rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, as described above, when the player's line of sight is guided downward by the downward arrow light emitting display by the lower rear center decorative body 3122 or the lower front central decorative body 3111, the rotation operation unit 302 (press operation unit 303). ) Can be easily noticed, so that the player can be strongly encouraged to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be enjoyed. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring of the annular rotation operation unit 302, as described above, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111 emit light by displaying a downward arrow. When the player looks below the arrow, the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 that are rotating can be seen, so that the player may have an advantageous gaming state depending on the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302. Can be recognized at the same time, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be strongly urged, the pressing operation unit 303 can be surely pressed, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced. Can reduce the interest of the elderly.

  In addition, since the pressing operation unit 303 can be in a lowered state and a protruding state, the pressing operation unit 303 can be seen conspicuously when the pressing operation unit 303 is protruding. It is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous will occur. On the other hand, since the pressing operation unit 303 is not easily noticeable when the pressing operation unit 303 is lowered, it is possible to make the player think that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state is low, and the pressing operation unit 303. The advance / retreat position of the player can suggest the possibility (expected value) of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state to the player.

  Further, since the advance / retreat position of the pressing operation unit 303 can indicate the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous gaming state to the player, as described above, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the lower front decoration body 3122 When a downward arrow is emitted and displayed by the central decorative body 3111 or the like, the player can be throbbing and thrilled by whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes. The pressing operation of the portion 303 can be enjoyed, and it is difficult to get tired of the player, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image in the center of the front view game area 5a is provided, in addition to the game performed in the game area 5a, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 However, it is possible to entertain the player, and to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a behind the lower movable effect unit 3100, the lower center elevating base 3121 and the lower rear center decorative body 3122 according to the game state. The four rotating decorative bodies 3126 are raised, or the lower left side decorative body 3153 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 are moved together with the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 by the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171. When the body 3173 is raised, a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the like. Four rotation decorations 3126 and left side rotation decoration for the player Since it is possible to notice the rise of 3153, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, etc., it is possible to surely show the player the effects using them, and to make the player entertained and suppress the decrease in interest. .

  Further, since the effect image can be displayed in the center in the front view game area 5a, as described above, the lower front center decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, the lower right side When a down arrow is emitted and displayed by the decorative body 3172 or the like and the player is prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301 below, an effect image that prompts the effect display unit 1600 to operate the effect operation unit 301 or an effect operation unit The effect operation unit 301 is displayed to the player by displaying an effect image explaining the operation 301, an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous and the effect operation unit 301, and the like. Can be strongly encouraged to participate in the player-participation-type production, and the production operation unit 301 can be easily operated, and the player-participation-type production can be enjoyed. The reduction of interest can be suppressed Te.

  Further, as described above, since various combinations of effects can be shown to the player, for example, the lower center lifting base 3121, the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 are lowered. From the state, when the left and right left side rotation decoration bodies 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173 are moved to the center side in the left and right direction by slide mechanisms such as the lower left slide drive motor and the lower right slide drive motor, the four side by side are arranged. The left side rotation decoration body 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173 are positioned on the left and right sides of the row of the three rotation decoration bodies 3126, and the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the pair of the left side rotation decoration body 3153, and the right side rotation decoration body. Since the body 3173 is aligned side by side, it can surprise the player and It can be.

  In this state, the lower center elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171 raise the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the pair of left side rotating decorative bodies 3153, and the right side rotating decorative body 3173. And four rotation decoration bodies 3126, a pair of left side rotation decoration bodies 3153 and right side rotation decoration bodies 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotation decoration bodies 3155 and right sub-side rotation decoration bodies 3175 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The player can show the player a large oblong decoration that crosses the game area 5a, so that it can have a strong impact on the player and there may be something good. Can increase the expectation of the game.

  And four rotation decoration bodies 3126, a pair of left side rotation decoration bodies 3153 and right side rotation decoration bodies 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotation decoration bodies 3155 and right sub-side rotation decoration bodies 3175 are left and right in an appropriate combination. When the rotation is stopped after rotating them in a state where they are in line, the combination of each decoration part 3127, decoration part 3154, and decoration part 3156 is determined by whether or not the combination stops rotation in a desired combination. It is possible to enjoy the rotation (movable effect) of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 and the like, and when the decorative portions 3127 and the like are stopped in a desired combination, a gaming state advantageous to the player Occurrence can be convinced, and a sense of expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state can be enhanced to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Thereafter, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 (lower front central decorative body 3111), the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 are caused to emit a downward arrow to display the player's line of sight. The player can be guided to the unit 301, and the player can be prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301.

  At this time, the possibility of an advantageous gaming state (expected value) can be suggested by the size of the downward-pointing arrow that is lit and displayed. Therefore, if the lit and displayed arrow is small, it continues to the player. It can be thought that it can be recovered by the operation of the production operation unit 301, and when the light-emitting arrow is small, it can be convinced that an advantageous gaming state is generated, so that in any case, the expectation for the game is increased. It is possible to entertain the subsequent operation of the production operation unit 301 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, an effect is produced based on a command from the main control board 1310 included in the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 as a main control board that can control the progress of the game. As an effect control board capable of controlling the progress, a peripheral control board 1510 included in the effect control unit 1500 of FIG. 13 is provided. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 of FIG. 148 as a ROM substrate and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 of FIG. 148 as a video signal output substrate. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a shown in FIG. 148 as a ROM in which control information (peripheral data) related to effects based on game specifications is stored in advance. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can output to the effect display device 1600 a signal that matches the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 130 as a display device.

  Between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as a first connector, a plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 148 and a special connector provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in FIG. It is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector that can be connected between boards by a socket of SCN3. Between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, as a second connector different from the first connector, a plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 148 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 of FIG. The board is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector that can be connected between boards by a socket of a special connector SCN4 provided in the board.

  The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the presentation by the control information (peripheral data) read from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and can output the video signal to the liquid crystal output board 1530 in a plurality of types. . Examples of a plurality of types of video signal systems include RGB system, LVDS system, MIPI system, eDP system, and clockless system. In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of video signal systems, there are four systems (four systems in total): one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system and second LVDS system), and MIPI system. ) Is adopted.

  The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 of FIG. 148 as the same board box.

  As described above, the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which control information (peripheral data) relating to the presentation based on the game specifications is stored in advance is provided on a dedicated board called the peripheral data ROM board 1520 which is a separate board from the peripheral control board 1510, and the presentation display device A substrate that outputs a signal that matches the method of the video signal input to 1600 is provided on a dedicated substrate called a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that is a separate substrate from the peripheral control substrate 1510. That is, the peripheral control board 1510 is adapted to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 unless it is modified and newly manufactured according to control information (peripheral data) related to the effect based on the game specifications. Since it is not modified and newly manufactured, it can be configured as a common substrate that does not depend on the game specifications or the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. As a result, it is not necessary to manufacture a plurality of types of peripheral control boards 1510 according to the game specifications and the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and the cost can be reduced by manufacturing only the same peripheral control boards 1510. Can contribute. Therefore, the cost of the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout device 580 of FIG. 93 is provided in which one payout passage 580a to which the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 of FIG. 93 are supplied is formed. ing. The payout device 580 includes at least a payout motor 584 in FIG. 105 and a payout blade 589 in FIG. The payout motor 584 can rotate the rotating shaft by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle in accordance with step driving. The payout blade 589 rotates via a drive gear 585, a first transmission gear 586, a second transmission gear 587, and a payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, in which rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 constitutes a rotation transmission member. Thus, a plurality of ball receiving portions 589b are formed at equal intervals (three at equal intervals of 120 degrees) as ball receiving recesses that can receive and send out game balls B one by one. .

  The reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance so that the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Specifically, the reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by calculation based on the mechanism. The rotation angle of the payout blade 589 can be detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 in FIG. Specifically, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 can detect the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

  Thus, since the reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member that is not an integer is determined in advance, the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout vane 589 is determined in advance. Each time the ball is paid out, the positioning position is different. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, so that the positions where dust and dust are attached can be dispersed. Of course, if the reduction ratio n of the rotation transmitting member described above that causes such a positioning error is set, the error accumulates, but even if the error accumulates every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotation angle is reset when the accumulated error is accumulated to some extent by detecting it with a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is ensured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotational position of the ball feed rotating unit that receives and sends out the game ball is changed every time the game ball is paid out, and the positions where the dust and dust adhere are distributed to the dust and dust. On the other hand, a strong dispensing device 580 can be provided.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the progress of the production based on the normal lottery result, the first special lottery result, or the second special lottery result as the lottery result by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. 148 is provided as an effect control means capable of controlling the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540 of FIG. 148 is used as the first shield, and the metal back cover and the conductive cover in the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 152 are shown as the second shield. 152 conductive elastic members 1545 are provided. The metal shield plate 1540 is formed of metal as a conductive member. The metal back cover in the effect display device 1600 is formed of metal as a conductive member. The conductive elastic member 1545 is formed by covering the surface of the foam 1545b in FIG. 152 as a core material formed of an elastic member with the conductive coating portion 1545a in FIG. 152 as a conductive member.

  A peripheral control board 1510 is arranged between the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are conductive. Electrical connection is made via an elastic member 1545.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is disposed between the metal shield plate 1540 formed of the conductive member and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 1545, so that the influence of electromagnetic wave noise on the peripheral control board 1510 is reduced. This can be reduced by the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the influence by electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 of FIG. 126, the ball tank 552 of FIG. 126, and the tank rail 553 of FIG. 126 are provided. The game board 5 includes a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 in FIG. 126 on the rear side as a box to which the effect control unit 1500 of FIG. 126 is attached as a board box. The ball tank 552 can store game balls. The tank rail 553 can flow the game ball stored in the ball tank 552 to the downstream side.

  The effect control unit 1500 as a board box is accommodated in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. The tank rail 553 is formed with a notch 553aa in FIG. 126 as a hole through which foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) generated by the flowing game ball B can fall. When the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, an upper wall 3010 a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. In this pachinko machine 1, foreign matter falling from a notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received on the upper wall 3010a as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. .

  As described above, since the foreign matter falling from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5, the foreign matter Even if it falls from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the falling unit from entering the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5 due to the fallen foreign matter. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter falling on the effect control unit 1500 as a board box accommodated in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means. The power supply board 630 of FIG. 155 is provided as power supply means that can create various voltages based on the power supply voltage from the game hall outside the gaming machine. Yes.

  The power supply substrate 630 includes, as a plurality of parts having the same shape, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, and D9 in FIG. 155 having the same package type (TO-220F). , D10. Of the plurality of parts having the same shape on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, silk printing TSLK9 of FIG. 158 (b) as a silk printing for a specific part is another part excluding this specific part. Silk-printed so that it can be distinguished from the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 in FIG.

  Specifically, the silk print TSLK9 of FIG. 158 (b) is silk-printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, except for the specific parts, as the silk print of the specific part FETQ5. 155, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 of FIG. 155 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are respectively provided with the silk prints TSLK1 to TSLK8 of FIG. Silk-printed. In the silk print TSLK9, a white oblique line ad1 that does not exist in the silk prints TSLK1 to TSLK8 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  As described above, as a plurality of parts having the same shape, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 of FIG. 155 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and the like having the same package type (TO-220F) are used. Even if D10 is provided on the power supply board 630, among the plurality of parts having the same shape, the silk print TSLK9 for the FETQ5 which is a specific part is the FETQ1, Q2, which is another part excluding the specific part Since it is silk-printed so that it can be distinguished from Q3, Q4, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, FET Q5 which is a noticeable part is replaced with FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 which are other parts. Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 can be identified There. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish a notable part from other parts among the plurality of parts.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the above, the game can be advanced, and light emission control can be performed on the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full-color LEDs provided on the left side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. 167 as light emitting means. As a possible light emission control means, there are a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba provided on the lower left side decorative board 402b of FIG. 167 and a constant current drive circuit 402bbx constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. The left door frame in FIG. 167 as a strip-shaped decorative board formed in a predetermined shape And a left side under the decorative board 402b which is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the Id decorative body 404.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx are formed so that the planar shape thereof is substantially rectangular, and each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx extends along both longitudinal sides of the strip-like left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is arranged so as to be non-parallel. Specifically, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx shown in FIG. 169 are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Is arranged as.

  As described above, the strip-shaped left side lower decorative substrate 402b includes the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the constant current driving circuit 402bbx whose planar shape is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, the constant current driving circuit 402bax, and the constant current driving circuit 402bax. Each side of the current drive circuit 402bbx is arranged so as to be non-parallel along both ends in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, compared with the case where each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is arranged so as to be parallel along both longitudinal sides of the strip-like lower side decorative substrate 402b. Since a region sandwiched between both ends in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped left side lower decorative substrate 402b and each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be formed large, Wiring can be drawn from each side of the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the constant current driving circuit 402bbx and electrically connected to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full color LEDs. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region in which the wiring is drawn from each side of the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the constant current driving circuit 402bbx in the strip-shaped left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the above, it is possible to proceed with the game, and LED mounting in which hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are ten full-color LEDs provided on the left side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. 168 (a), are mounted as light emitting means. The left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 168 (a) having the surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by on which the light emitting means is not mounted is provided.

  The left side lower decorative substrate 402b is a white resist as a white coating film, and chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 of FIG. 169 (a) as mounting auxiliary symbols (FIG. 169 (a) is a chain line corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full color LEDs). LSLK4 and LSLK5 are shown respectively.) And part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs in FIG. 169 (a) (in FIG. 169 (a), there are part numbers corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full color LEDs). Only certain LEDs 4 and 5 are shown.) The white resist is formed on the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The auxiliary mounting symbols specify chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 as auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. The part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are yellow as the paint of a predetermined color different from the white resist on the white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Or black).

  Thus, auxiliary lines (that is, chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 169 (a), and FIG. 169 (a) full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are identified by numbers (that is, part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10), and the left side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. On the white resist of the mounting surface 402by, it is formed in yellow (or black) as a paint of a predetermined color different from the white resist. That is, a white resist is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 168 (a), and the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs in FIG. Auxiliary lines to be shown (that is, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) and numbers identifying hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are the full color LEDs in FIG. 169 (a) (that is, hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs) No corresponding yellow (or black) part number) is formed. Therefore, the numbers specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full color LEDs of FIG. 169 (a) (that is, the yellow (or black) part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full color LEDs) and the full color of FIG. 169 (a). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize auxiliary lines (that is, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are LEDs.

  Further, the white resist formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 168 (a) is the light emission of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which is the full color LED of FIG. 168 (a). ) Of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b on the LED mounting surface 402bx can be increased, so that the numbers specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full color LEDs in FIG. 169 (a) (that is, the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full color LEDs). , Corresponding to the yellow (or black) part number), and auxiliary lines (that is, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1) indicating the mounting positions of hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full color LEDs of FIG. 169 (a). LSLK10), the full color of Fig. 168 (a) It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance in the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 168 (a) of light emitted hdLED1~hdLED10 is ED. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 168 (a) from being lowered by the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full color LEDs of FIG. 168 (a).

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, various boards inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 13). 161 is provided as a power supply means for supplying power to 1510 and the like. 161 includes a fuse FUSE1 of FIG. 161 as a fuse, a surge absorber SA1 of FIG. 161 as a surge voltage absorbing element, a rectifier circuit 630c of FIG. 161 as a rectifier circuit, and a power generation circuit 630f ′ of FIG. 161 as a power supply means. Yes. The fuse FUSE1 can be supplied with AC power from an island facility in the game hall as an outside of the gaming machine. The surge absorber SA1 can absorb the surge voltage of the AC power input through the fuse FUSE1. The rectifier circuit 630c can rectify the AC power input through the surge absorber SA1 into a DC power. The power generation circuit 630f 'is capable of supplying power to various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 based on a DC power input via the rectifier circuit 630c.

  When the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for the gaming machine (AC24V) is input through the fuse FUSE1 as the AC power supply from the island equipment of the game hall, the surge absorber SA1 is allowed to have a surge voltage. As a result, it is possible to form a circuit in which the fuse FUSE1 is blown by passing a large current through the fuse FUSE1.

  As described above, when a commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for game machines (AC24V) is input to the surge absorber SA1 through the fuse FUSE1 as an AC power supply from the island facility of the game hall, the surge voltage When the voltage exceeds the allowable voltage, the circuit is short-circuited and a circuit is formed to blow the fuse FUSE1 by passing a large current through the fuse FUSE1. As a result, even if the plug of the power cord for supplying AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of the commercial power voltage (AC 100V), the power board 630 is destroyed. However, it is possible to reliably prevent various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply substrate 630 from being destroyed. Therefore, when the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) having a voltage higher than the gaming machine power supply voltage (AC24V) is supplied, it is possible to prevent the various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 from being destroyed.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the above, the game can proceed, and hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are ten full-color LEDs provided on the left side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. 168 (a) as light emitting means, are provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx. The left side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. 168 (a) to be mounted is provided.

  The left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a white resist solidly coated as a white coating film, and a connector LDUCN of FIG. 168 (a) as a connector. The white coating film is formed on the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs having the same color or the same color as the white coating film, and the same color or the same color as the white coating film A connector LDUCN having a housing of a distinguishable color is mounted. Specifically, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is solid-coated with a white resist, and the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are recognized as white (the same color as white). The connector LDUCN is made of a resin whose housing is white (also referred to as a natural color and recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). A full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated) are mounted. An electronic component such as a resistor or a capacitor (not shown) that does not have a connector and a connector that does not have a white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b.

  As described above, a white coating film (that is, a white resist) is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. A full color LED having a package of a color that can be distinguished from the same color or the same color as the first resist), and a housing of a color that can be distinguished from the same color or the same color as the white coating (that is, the white resist). Since the connectors LDUCN are respectively mounted, the LEDs of the left side lower decorative board 402b are mounted even if the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs and the connector LDUCN are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. The entire mounting surface 402bx is a white coating film (that is, a white resist). It has the same color or colors that can be identified as the same color. Thereby, it can contribute to making the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b a bright light emitting surface. Therefore, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can be a bright light emitting surface.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the gate portion 2003 of FIG. 130 in the game area 5a of the game board 5 of FIG. 130, the four general winning ports 2001, the first start port 2002, the second start. The gate sensor 2301, the general winning port sensor 3001, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2511, a plurality of entering ports such as the mouth 2004, the first grand winning port 2005, and the second large winning port 2006. Detection means such as a first big prize opening sensor 2512 and a second big prize opening sensor 2513 can be provided, respectively, and a game can be advanced based on a detection signal from the detection means.

  Among the plurality of entrances, for example, as the entrances having similar uses, the first starter sensor 3002 and the second starter sensor 2511 are detection means corresponding to the first starter 2002 and the second starter 2004. Are provided differently. Specifically, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. In addition, a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2511 to the main control board 1310. Further, as described above, the gate sensor 2301 serving as a detection means corresponding to the gate unit 2003 as a entrance opening similar in use to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is provided on the game board 5. A first big prize opening sensor 2512 for detecting the game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005, and a second big prize opening for detecting the game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2006 provided in the game board 5. A sensor 2513, a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in a general winning port 2001 provided on the game board 5, and a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 provided on the game board 5. Together with various sensors such as 3003, they are electrically connected and aggregated on a relay board (not shown) and electrically connected to the main control board 1310 through one connector. It is connected.

  As described above, for example, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are detection means corresponding to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the second start port, among the plurality of entrances. Since the shape of the connector of the start port sensor 2511 is different, for example, the first start port 2002 and the first start port serving as detection means corresponding to the second start port 2004 are used as similar entrances. Incorrect connection of the connectors of the sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2511 can be prevented. Further, the gate sensor 2301, which is a detection means corresponding to the gate unit 2003 as a entrance hole similar in use to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, includes a first grand prize port sensor 2512 and a second big prize. Along with various sensors such as the mouth sensor 2513, the general winning mouth sensor 3001, and the magnetic sensor 3003, they are electrically connected and aggregated on a relay board (not shown) and electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via one connector. It is connected. In other words, the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the gate unit 2003, which are similar entrances, and the detection unit corresponding to the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, and the gate. An erroneous connection of the connector of the sensor 2301 can be prevented. Accordingly, erroneous connection can be prevented.

[17. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the rotational decoration body 3126 in which the plurality of (four) decoration portions 3127 that are rotatable around the axis extending in the left-right direction and are different from each other in the circumferential direction is formed as the movable effect unit. Although four of them are provided on the same axis, the present invention is not limited to this. A rotating decorative body that is rotatable around a vertically extending axis and has a plurality of decorative portions that are different from each other in the circumferential direction is provided. It may be provided with at least one, provided with at least one rotating decorative body that can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, provided with at least one movable decorative body that slides in the left-right direction, etc. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is used for the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 that are moved up and down via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between the drive motor and a movable decorative body that moves in the left-right direction, a movable decorative body that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the like.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 includes the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, and the roller 3254. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and rotation from the drive motor The first sun gear, the first planetary gear, and the rotation connected to the drive motor side are provided with a speed reduction unit that temporarily decelerates the speed and a speed conversion unit that shifts the decelerated rotation and transmits it to the output side. A first planetary gear mechanism having an immovable fixed ring gear, and a second planetary gear mechanism having a second sun gear, a second planetary gear and a rotatable rotating ring gear coupled to the first sun gear. A carrier having support shafts on both sides thereof arranged between the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, and the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear machine. And in may be those adapted to be transmitted at a reduced speed rotation from the drive motor to rotate the ring gear provided with a number of teeth difference between at least one gear of the ring gear and the sun gear.

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, you may arrange | position so that the direction through which information and a signal flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information and signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information and signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the embodiment described above, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket), and correspondingly, when the socket is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector (or plug and plug) is provided. A special connector). In the above-described embodiment, since a plurality of types of video signal systems are output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is the transmission side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the reception side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket), and correspondingly, when the socket is provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, it becomes a special connector (or plug). A special connector).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are configured by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, but are made of a conductive material containing carbon in polycarbonate. It may be configured by being molded in opaque black as a resin, or if it is made of conductive resin, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are molded in a translucent color. May be. Even in this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the peripheral control board described above is provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). By fixing various substrates such as 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with metal pan-head screws, as described above, circuit grounds are provided to the ground (GND) of these various substrates. Can be configured. As a result, noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be caused to flow as a circuit ground to the ground (GND) of various substrates, thereby removing the noise.

  In the embodiment described above, the payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. However, four may be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 187 is a modified rear view of the payout device, and is a cutaway rear sectional view of the payout device provided with the payout blade 589 including the four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape and provided with the radio wave sensor. FIG. 187 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit corresponding to FIG. 105 described above, cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade, and is given the same reference numerals as in FIG. When the delivery blade 589 has four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, the above-described delivery gear member 588 is not illustrated in FIG. 187, but the above-described delivery gear member 588 has a flat plate-like detection piece having an arc shape extending outward. Four 588b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the 90-degree area in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 is defined as the light-shielding range as the 45-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed. It is managed by an 18-step rotation including a 9-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 and a 9-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 with the 45-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed as a light receiving range. As described above, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 18 steps for paying out one game ball B. In other words, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 18 steps, the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, and the second transmission so that the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 can rotate 90 degrees. The reduction ratio n can be determined by selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, respectively.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 580 includes the payout detection sensor 591 that is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a and detects the game ball B. However, a radio wave sensor that detects radio waves may be provided in the vicinity of the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch and detects the passing of the game ball B. When the game ball B is affected by the radio wave, the game ball B actually passes. Nevertheless, it is possible to make it appear that the game ball B is not passing due to malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633 to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the payout motor By controlling to rotate the 584 rotation shaft excessively, a large amount of the game ball B is paid out. In order to detect such an illegal act of acquiring the game ball B illegally (referred to as “radio wave”), as shown in FIG. 187, a radio wave sensor 594 is provided near the upper part of the payout detection sensor 591. And can be configured. When the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633, the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is irradiated based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594. The rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is urgently stopped, and a radio wave notification command that notifies that is transmitted to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit wide radio goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the radio goto notification command is changed from 8-bit width to 16-bit width, and the radio goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume. While flowing from various speakers, various LEDs are set in a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red), and are shaped into a content that can be notified of a radio wave failure and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a radio wave notification command having a 16-bit width, the peripheral display board 1600 displays a large message “abnormality has occurred” on the effect display device 1600, and controls various LEDs in the warning notification light emission mode. To do.

  Instead of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact type ball passing sensor 594 'which is a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch may be used. A detection signal from the contact ball passing sensor 594 ′ is input to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 receives a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and a detection signal from the contact ball passing sensor 594 ′. Based on this, it can be configured that it can be determined that some fraud has been made when the number of game balls B paid out does not match. When the payout control board 633 determines that any fraud has been made, the payout motor 584 stops the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 in an emergency and transmits a goto notification command to that effect to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit wide goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310 sets the goto notification command from 8 bits wide to 16 bits wide and sets the goto warning sound to the maximum volume and from various speakers. While flowing, various LEDs are set in a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red), and are shaped into a content that can be notified of a goto and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the goto notification command having a 16-bit width, the peripheral display board 1600 displays a large message “abnormality has occurred” on the effect display device 1600, and controls various LEDs to the warning notification light emission mode. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is step-driven, the rotation shaft is configured to step-rotate by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to the step drive. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation shaft by 18 degrees in one step rotation.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is connected to the rotation gear via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. , The delivery blade 589 can be rotated, and the rotation shaft of the delivery motor 584 is rotated at a low speed to rotate the rotation transmission member (a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586 ′, The speed may be increased via the second transmission gear 587 ′ and the payout gear 588a ′)) of the payout gear member 588 so that the payout blade 589 can be rotated. By doing so, the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance so that the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Each time one ball is paid out, the positioning position is different. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, so that the positions where dust and dust are attached can be dispersed. Of course, when the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmitting member described above that causes such a positioning error is set, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotation angle is reset by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 588b (light-shielding pieces) of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotary shaft of the payout blade 589, and the accumulated error is accumulated to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is ensured. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increasing ratio of such a rotation transmission member is determined in advance, the rotational position of the payout vane 589 that receives and sends out the game ball is changed every time the game ball is paid out, so By dispersing the position where the water adheres, it is possible to have a dispensing device 580 that is strong against dust and dirt.

  In the embodiment described above, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540. In a state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, a predetermined amount is provided between the surfaces of the various substrates (the surface opposite to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a height distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging a metal shield plate 1540 in this space, and this 2 The two spaces are the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the metal shield plate A first space 1505a having a distance of a first predetermined height (12 mm in this embodiment) between the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of 540, and the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540; And a second space 1505b having a distance of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the present embodiment) between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. This is a case where a large movable effect unit (electrical drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating the movable effector and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operation position) is arranged on the game board 5 in the depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as a distance dimension of the same predetermined height. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a, and heat in the second space 1505b. By not accommodating the various electronic components that emit light, heat generated from the various electronic components in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540d is formed with a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 And the model (or management number), the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized. Also, the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, (Part number, pin number, etc.) and peripheral data ROM The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are respectively silk-printed. However, the control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, peripheral data ROM 1520a, and peripheral data ROM 1520a are made of metal. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540d. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d so that the periphery can be seen. . Also, the shape of the board-to-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to a larger area, or the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. From the shape of the board-to-board connector (a shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector with 1530 can be confirmed. The position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide a rectangular opening in.

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining one or a combination of them except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of 1501e. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even if configured in this way, the foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling on the various substrates of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553 can be prevented. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is passed through the ventilation hole 1501az. The foreign matter generated by the game ball B toward the inside (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) drops and enters, so that the electrical due to the fallen foreign matter on the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505 This is because the probability of occurrence of trouble increases.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505 by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. In addition, as a reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501az provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is interposed via the ventilation hole 1501az. When foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) falls and enters the peripheral control board box 1505, the peripheral control board box 1505 drops onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that an electrical trouble due to a foreign object will occur.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated due to wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, the same cutout portion, hole, or groove as the cutout portion 553aa may be formed in the ball passage where the game ball B rolls. More specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having one guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner as shown in FIG. 110, the metal of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a. A notch, hole, or groove that can remove powder from the guide passage 570a to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570 shown in FIG. Below the ball guiding unit 570, as shown in FIG. 110, a payout device 580, a substrate unit 620, and the like are arranged. The payout device 580 includes a substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The board unit 620 includes the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. Therefore, when a notch, hole, or groove is formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the B metal powder from adhering to various substrates disposed below the induction unit 570. Therefore, a hook-shaped member can be formed so as to protrude rearward along the upper side of the payout device rear cover 582 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 103, or formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves to be formed and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the dispensing device 580 is mounted can be configured to be shifted. It can also be configured. Also, the hook-shaped member is moved backward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. The position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be formed. It is possible to configure by shifting the positions of these, and it is also possible to employ both.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, and the power destruction circuit 630g are provided on one board called the power board 630. Although various electronic components and the like have been provided, it may be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 includes a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuits of the second power supply substrate 630B include the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the power destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. The fuse FUSE3 and the wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, the input is input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, the output is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power supply generation circuit 630f. It will be. Various DC voltages, such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc., created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 excluding the first power supply board 630A. The

  Further, the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 161 in the above-described embodiment can be divided into two boards, ie, a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the microgap type arrester AL1, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B mainly composed of the connector A is the rectifier circuit 630c, power factor correction circuit 630d, smoothing circuit 630e, power generation circuit 630f, relay drive circuit 630i, relay RL1, shown in FIG. The thermistor TH1, choke coil L2, fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Various DC voltages, such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc., created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 excluding the first power supply board 630A. The

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit is arranged in substantially the same manner on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is changed as shown in FIG. The left side lower decorative board 402b is arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into group 1 and group 2. Although the configuration in which the constant current driving circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, the present invention can also be applied to a slender plate-like decorative board provided in the game board 5. Examples of the long and slender plate-like decorative boards provided in the game board 5 include the performance shown in FIG. 133 in addition to the decorative boards provided in the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300. The front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 in the exit unit 2600 can be exemplified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current driving circuit in each decorative board of the door frame 3 controls the light emission by supplying a constant current to the eight full color LEDs. , Red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green, and other single color LEDs may be used. A monochromatic LED can also be used. In this case, light emission control of a maximum of 24 single color LEDs can be performed with one LED constant current drive circuit.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the direct current +12 V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, but the constant current drive circuit of the LED constant current drive circuit is used. The internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply (linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 166) is used for LED lighting within the current allowable range of the linear power supply. It may be used as a voltage. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, a maximum of one single-color LED (for example, within the current allowable range of the linear power supply for one output channel (for example, When an LED other than the red LED) is electrically connected, an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by a linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the single color LED and the single color LED The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion resistor circuit described above. In addition, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current driving circuit described above, a maximum of two single-color LEDs (for example, within the current allowable range of the linear power supply for one output channel (for example, When the red LEDs are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply is inputted to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion resistor circuit described above. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 of the constant current drive circuit. ˜LG8, LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full color LED is electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion resistor circuit described above. However, a plurality of full color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is 2 to 3. If it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, DC +35 V from the power supply board 630 is used as the LED lighting voltage instead of DC +12 V from the power supply board 630. May be. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 include the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door. Since the frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side of the decorative substrate is large. The edge of the land pattern is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper edge and the lower edge of the door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457. Any one of the frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and any two decorative substrates The end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit, may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper side and lower side of the decorative substrate. The door frame top right decorative board 457 directly controls the light emission of the other right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs are mounted, for example, by the LED constant current driving circuit provided in the door frame, in addition to the full-color LED provided in the door frame. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative board 456 may be directly connected to, for example, another left decorative board on which one full-color LED is mounted in addition to the full-color LED provided therein by an LED constant current driving circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456. You may control light emission.

  In the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and the LED non-mounting surface 314y are provided on the door frame 3. Although the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative boards provided in each decorative body are solid-coated with white resist, they may be printed by white silk printing instead. In this case, after printing the entire LED mounting surface and non-LED mounting surface of various decorative boards with white silk printing, the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are set as silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, various decorative boards included in each decorative body provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are provided. On the LED non-mounting surface, the area corresponding to the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative boards was printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) as silk printing, but the mounting position of the full-color LED Auxiliary line indicating the position of the full color LED (i.e., when printing with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) as an area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) You may comprise so that mounting direction may be specified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2511 and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 to the lower substrate holder 1200. The second start port sensor main side 2511a and the second start port sensor sub side 2511b are arranged in a state of being separated by at least a false detection prevention distance dimension, like the first start port sensor 3002. You may be comprised from two sensors (double sensor). In this way, similarly to the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511 configured by two sensors (double sensors), that is, the second start port sensor main side 2511a and the second start port sensor slave side 2511b. By adopting, it is possible to reliably detect the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. It should be noted that an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as it or a synthetic resin ball having approximately the same diameter as it) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and notified in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interruption process of FIG. 177, so that a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall can Can be found at an early stage.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is first detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2511a by passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2511a, and then the second starting port sensor subordinate side. After being detected by the second start port sensor slave side 2511b by passing through 2511b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2511a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected electrically), whereas the second start start sensor A detection signal from the mouth sensor slave side 2511b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown) (that is, indirectly connected electrically). A detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2511a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and a detection signal from the second start port sensor sub side 2511b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  This relay board (not shown) detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above in addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2511b. The first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the one start port sensor 3002, the gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the game board 5, and the first big prize opening provided in the game board 5 A first big prize opening sensor 2512 for detecting the game ball B received in 2005, a second big prize opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2006 provided in the game board 5, a game A general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided on the board 5, and acts near the first start port 2002 provided on the game board 5. Two wires from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the air are electrically connected and integrated through respective connectors and are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 through one connector. It is connected to the.

  Further, the detection signal from the first starter sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second starter sensor slave side 2511b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same relay board (not shown). ing. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b to a relay board (not shown), and the second starting port sensor slave side is connected. A connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the side 2511b to a relay board (not shown). As a result, the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2511b can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself. In the manufacturer, the line operator can connect the two wires from the first starter sensor slave side 3002b and the second starter sensor slave side in the manufacturing process. In addition to being able to reliably prevent work mistakes such as miswiring between the two wires from 2511b (wiring mistakes that are mistakenly inserted), in the game hall, the staff of the game hall, for example, can check whether there is fraud. When confirming, in the case of temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original state, two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side 2511b Two and wiring al, miswiring that operational error (wiring that insert mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001a that constitutes the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in one general winning opening 2001 included in the start opening unit 2100, and the two that are included in the side unit 2200. The general winning opening sensors 3001b and 3001c constituting the general winning opening sensor 3001 that respectively detects the game balls B received in the two general winning openings 2001, and one general winning opening 2001 that is attached to the game area 5a substantially in the front view. A connector having the same shape is selected as the connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the general winning port sensor 3001d constituting the general winning port sensor 3001d for detecting the game ball B received in the main control board 1310. However, the progress and direction of the game with the entry to the four general winning entries 2001 To contribute to the change may be the connector of shape different respectively. In this way, since the physical structure in which the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 3001a to 3001d can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself can be obtained, In the manufacturing process, the worker can surely prevent a work mistake (wiring mistake called incorrect insertion) of two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 3001a to 3001d, and in the game hall, A staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall, when confirming the presence or absence of fraud, when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original position, the work of miswiring of the two wirings from the general prize opening sensors 3001a to 3001d It is possible to reliably prevent mistakes (wiring mistakes such as incorrect insertion).

  In the embodiment described above, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2301, but, like the first start port sensor 3002, May be composed of two sensors (double sensors) that are arranged in a state of being separated by at least the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. In this way, similarly to the first start port sensor 3002, by adopting a gate sensor 2301 composed of two sensors (double sensors), ie, a gate sensor main side 2301a and a gate sensor subordinate side 2301b, the gate unit 2003 is provided. The game ball B that has passed through can be reliably detected. It should be noted that an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as it or a synthetic resin ball having approximately the same diameter as it) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and notified in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interruption process of FIG. 177, so that a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall can Can be found at an early stage.

  In this case, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is first detected by the gate sensor main side 2301a by passing through the gate sensor main side 2301a, and then detected by the gate sensor subordinate side 2301b by passing through the gate sensor subordinate side 2301b. Will be. The detection signals from the gate sensor main side 2301a and the gate sensor subordinate side 2301b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown) (that is, indirectly connected electrically). Have been). The detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2301a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the gate sensor subordinate side 2301b is the main control input circuit 1310b. Is input to the input terminal PC0 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a (this input port is composed of 8 bits).

  Further, the detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2301a and the detection signal from the gate sensor subordinate side 2301b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 through the same relay board (not shown). For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2301a to a relay board (not shown), and two wires from the gate sensor subordinate side 2301b are selected. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the wiring to a relay board (not shown). Thus, the physical structure in which the two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2301a and the two wirings from the gate sensor subordinate side 2301b can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself. Therefore, in the manufacturer, in the manufacturing process, the line operator miswires the two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2301a and the two wirings from the gate sensor subordinate side 2301b. In the game hall, the staff of the game hall, such as store staff, can temporarily remove the wiring during maintenance to ensure that there are no mistakes. In the case of returning to the original state, there is an error between the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2301a and the two wires from the gate sensor subordinate side 2301b. Work that line Miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a 2.5 mm pitch is provided as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. A connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2511 to the main control board 1310. The four wires, which are the two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the mouth sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2511, are configured as one connector. Alternatively, one connector composed of these four wires may be electrically connected to the main control board 1310. In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310, and 2 from the second start port sensor 2511 are provided. Since the connector that electrically connects the two wirings to the main control board 1310 can be made into a single connector composed of four wirings without being separated, the manufacturer can In the manufacturing process, the line operator has two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start port sensor 2511. In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent mistakes such as wiring mistakes (wiring mistakes that are mistakenly inserted). In the case where the wiring is temporarily removed and returned to the original state due to maintenance, two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2511 are used. It is possible to reliably prevent a work mistake (wiring mistake called insertion mistake) of erroneous wiring of these two wirings.

  Further, this embodiment is adopted, and the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2511 and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 to be below the substrate holder 1200 below. However, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor main side 2511a and the second start port sensor sub side 2511b are arranged in a state separated by at least a false detection prevention distance dimension. You may be comprised from two sensors (double sensor). In this way, similarly to the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511 configured by two sensors (double sensors), that is, the second start port sensor main side 2511a and the second start port sensor slave side 2511b. By adopting, it is possible to reliably detect the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. It should be noted that an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as it or a synthetic resin ball having approximately the same diameter as it) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and notified in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interruption process of FIG. 177, so that a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall can Can be found at an early stage.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is first detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2511a by passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2511a, and then the second starting port sensor subordinate side. After being detected by the second start port sensor slave side 2511b by passing through 2511b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Also, two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start port sensor main side 2511a constituting the second start port sensor 2511. Are configured as one connector, and one connector composed of the four wirings is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2511a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected electrically), whereas the second start port sensor The detection signal from the slave side 2511b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown) (that is, indirectly connected electrically). A detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2511a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and a detection signal from the second start port sensor sub side 2511b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  This relay board (not shown) detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above in addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2511b. The first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the one start port sensor 3002, the gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the game board 5, and the first big prize opening provided in the game board 5 A first big prize opening sensor 2512 for detecting the game ball B received in 2005, a second big prize opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2006 provided in the game board 5, a game A general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided on the board 5, and acts near the first start port 2002 provided on the game board 5. Two wires from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the air are electrically connected and integrated through respective connectors and are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 through one connector. It is connected to the.

  Further, this mode is adopted, and the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2511b are connected to the main control board 1310 via the same relay board (not shown). Since the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2511b are combined, four wires are combined. It may be configured as one connector, and one connector configured by these four wires may be configured to be electrically connected to a relay board (not shown). In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to a relay board (not shown) and the second start port sensor 2511 are formed. A physical connector in which two wirings from the second start port sensor slave side 2511b are electrically connected to a relay board (not shown) and one connector composed of four wirings without being separately provided. Therefore, in the manufacturer, in the manufacturing process, the operator of the line uses two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and two from the second start port sensor slave side 2511b. It is possible to reliably prevent mistakes in the wiring between the book and the wiring (wiring mistakes that are mistakenly inserted). In the case of confirming the presence or absence, when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original state, two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and two from the second starting port sensor slave side 2511b It is possible to reliably prevent an operation mistake (wiring mistake called incorrect insertion).

  In the embodiment described above, the game board 5 is provided with two wires from the first big prize opening sensor 2512 that detects the game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. As described above, the two wirings from the second grand prize opening sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2006 are electrically connected to a relay board (not shown) via the respective connectors. And connected to the main control board 1310 through a single connector from a relay board (not shown), but with two wires from the first big prize opening sensor 2512, The four wirings, which are the two wirings from the two major prize opening sensors 2513, are configured as one connector (single connector), and one connector composed of these four wirings is not shown. It may be configured to be aggregated is electrically connected to the relay board. In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wirings from the first big prize opening sensor 2512 to a relay board (not shown) and the two wirings from the second big prize opening sensor 2513 to the relay board (not shown). Since the connector to be electrically connected can have a physical structure that is a single connector composed of four wires without being separated, the manufacturer of the line must In the process, work mistakes (wiring mistakes of incorrect insertion) of incorrect wiring between the two wirings from the first grand prize opening sensor 2512 and the two wirings from the second big winning prize sensor 2513 are surely prevented. In the game hall, the staff of the game hall, such as a store clerk, can check if there is any fraud, temporarily remove the wiring due to maintenance, It is possible to surely prevent an operation mistake (wiring mistake called insertion error) of incorrect wiring between the two wirings from the first prize winning opening sensor 2512 and the two wirings from the second biggest winning prize opening sensor 2513. .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001a that constitutes the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in one general winning opening 2001 included in the start opening unit 2100, and the two that are included in the side unit 2200. The general winning opening sensors 3001b and 3001c constituting the general winning opening sensor 3001 that respectively detects the game balls B received in the two general winning openings 2001, and one general winning opening 2001 that is attached to the game area 5a substantially in the front view. A connector having the same shape is selected as the connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the general winning port sensor 3001d constituting the general winning port sensor 3001d for detecting the game ball B received in the main control board 1310. However, the progress and direction of the game with the entry to the four general winning entries 2001 In the case of contributing to the change, the eight wirings combined with these wirings are configured as one connector (single connector), and one connector including the eight wirings is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. You may comprise so that it may connect. In this way, the physical structure can be made as a single connector composed of eight wires without the two wires from the general winning award opening sensors 3001a to 3001d being separated from each other. In the manufacturing process, the line operator can reliably prevent a work mistake (wiring mistake called insertion error) of two wirings from the general prize opening sensors 3001a to 3001d in the manufacturing process. In the hall, a staff member such as a game hall clerk checks the presence of fraud, temporarily removes the wiring for maintenance, and restores it to the original position. It is possible to surely prevent an operation mistake of incorrect wiring (wiring mistake of incorrect insertion).

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example. However, the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine (rotating type) The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine) or a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused (one that performs a slot game using a game ball). Here, a slot machine as a swing type gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 188, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. Front door 6002 and main body portion 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, the front door 6002 can be opened from the main body portion 6004 by inserting a key into a key hole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise.

  The upper half of the front door 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door 6002 is formed with a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006. In the protruding portion, a medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. In addition, a storage and settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are disposed in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. The bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, the storage settlement button 6022, and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been. The main control board 1310 is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) that is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and provided inside the main body portion 6004.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Three variable rotators (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through the display window are provided. You can see through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, an effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

  On these variable rotators, translucent symbol bands on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information are affixed to the respective cylindrical frames. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motor, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from top to bottom from the display window described above. It has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. Peripheral control unit 1500 is based on various commands from main control board 1310, such as operation control of a plurality of movable effects, drawing control of effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, and the like. The progress of the production is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above.

  The main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of medals as game media into the medal slot 6008, and starts to display symbol information variation based on the operation of the start lever 6014. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right Based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time, the change display of symbol information is stopped. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as gaming media to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008 ′, and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls thrown in the ball slot 6008 ′ as a game medium to operate the start lever 6014. The symbol information variation display is started based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as gaming media to the tray 6026.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine, 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Door frame, 4 ... Main body frame, 5 ... Game board, 5a ... Game area, 558 ... External terminal board, 559 ... Frame earth board, 560 ... Dispensing unit, 570 ... Ball Guide unit, 580... Dispensing device, 580a... Discharging passage, 580b .. Ball extraction passage, 581... Discharging device main body, 582. Dispensing device rear lid, 583. Dispensing device front lid, 584. ... first transmission gear, 587 ... second transmission gear, 588 ... dispensing gear member, 588a ... dispensing gear, 588b ... detection piece, 589 ... dispensing blade, 589a ... blade piece, 589b ... sphere housing portion, 590 ... blade rotation detection Sensor, 591 ... Discharge detection sensor, 592 ... Ball removal movable piece, 593 ... Ball removal lever, 600 ... Upper full ball path unit, 610 ... Lower full ball path unit, 630 ... Power supply board, 6 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 0a ... Power switch, 630b ... Noise countermeasure circuit, 630c ... Rectifier circuit, 630d ... Power factor correction circuit, 630e ... Smoothing circuit, 630f ... Power generation circuit, 630g ... Power supply destruction circuit, 633 ... Discharge control board, 1300 ... Main Control unit, 1310 ... main control board, 1500 ... production control unit, 1501 ... cover body, 1502 ... base body, 1503 ... wiring cover body, 1510 ... peripheral control board, 1520 ... peripheral data ROM board, 1530 ... liquid crystal output board, 1540... Shield plate, 1545... Conductive elastic member, 1600.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be provided with detection means at a plurality of entrances in a game area, and that can advance a game based on a detection signal from the detection means,
A gaming machine characterized in that a connector of the detecting means corresponding to a similar entrance of the plurality of entrances is provided with a different shape.